# 4. Proxies

> Defaults, frontends, backends, listeners, proxy keywords, and action references

---

LLMS index: [llms.txt](/llms.txt)

---

<!-- Generated by scripts/generate-haproxy-docs.py from pinned upstream text. -->

Proxy configuration can be located in a set of sections:

- defaults [`<name>`] [ from `<defaults_name>` ]
- frontend `<name>` [ from `<defaults_name>` ]
- backend `<name>` [ from `<defaults_name>` ]
- listen `<name>` [ from `<defaults_name>` ]

A "frontend" section describes a set of listening sockets accepting client connections.

A "backend" section describes a set of servers to which the proxy will connect to forward incoming
connections.

A "listen" section defines a complete proxy with its frontend and backend parts combined in one
section. It is generally useful for TCP-only traffic.

A "defaults" section resets all settings to the documented ones and presets new ones for use by
subsequent sections. All of "frontend", "backend" and "listen" sections always take their initial
settings from a defaults section, by default the latest one that appears before the newly created
section. It is possible to explicitly designate a specific "defaults" section to load the initial
settings from by indicating its name on the section line after the optional keyword "from". While
"defaults" section do not impose a name, this use is encouraged for better readability. It is also
the only way to designate a specific section to use instead of the default previous one. Since
"defaults" section names are optional, by default a very permissive check is applied on their name
and these are even permitted to overlap. However if a "defaults" section is referenced by any other
section, its name must comply with the syntax imposed on all proxy names, and this name must be
unique among the defaults sections. Please note that regardless of what is currently permitted, it
is recommended to avoid duplicate section names in general and to respect the same syntax as for
proxy names. This rule might be enforced in a future version. In addition, a warning is emitted if a
defaults section is explicitly used by a proxy while it is also implicitly used by another one
because it is the last one defined. It is highly encouraged to not mix both usages by always using
explicit references or by adding a last common defaults section reserved for all implicit uses.

Note that it is even possible for a defaults section to take its initial settings from another one,
and as such, inherit settings across multiple levels of defaults sections. This can be convenient to
establish certain configuration profiles to carry groups of default settings (e.g. TCP vs HTTP or
short vs long timeouts) but can quickly become confusing to follow.

By default, named defaults sections are preserved after configuration parsing. This allows to reuse
them for dynamic backends creation. This behavior can be changed globally via "tune.defaults.purge"
keyword.

All proxy names must be formed from upper and lower case letters, digits, '-' (dash), '\_'
(underscore) , '.' (dot) and ':' (colon). ACL names are case-sensitive, which means that "www" and
"WWW" are two different proxies.

Historically, all proxy names could overlap when certain conditions were met (e.g. when not having
the same frontend/backend capabilities), but it used to cause too many problems in the logs as well
as confusion on CLI operations, stick-tables naming and stats retrieval. It is now mandatory that
two proxies have different names, regardless of their respective capabilities.

Right now, two major proxy modes are supported: "tcp", also known as layer 4, and "http", also known
as layer 7. In layer 4 mode, HAProxy simply forwards bidirectional traffic between two sides. In
layer 7 mode, HAProxy analyzes the protocol, and can interact with it by allowing, blocking,
switching, adding, modifying, or removing arbitrary contents in requests or responses, based on
arbitrary criteria.

In HTTP mode, the processing applied to requests and responses flowing over a connection depends in
the combination of the frontend's HTTP options and the backend's. HAProxy supports 3 connection
modes:

- KAL: keep alive ("option http-keep-alive") which is the default mode: all requests and responses
  are processed, and connections remain open but idle between responses and new requests.

- SCL: server close ("option http-server-close"): the server-facing connection is closed after the
  end of the response is received, but the client-facing connection remains open.

- CLO: close ("option httpclose"): the connection is closed after the end of the response and
  "Connection: close" appended in both directions.

The effective mode that will be applied to a connection passing through a frontend and a backend can
be determined by both proxy modes according to the following matrix, but in short, the modes are
symmetric, keep-alive is the weakest option and close is the strongest.

                   Backend mode

```text
                | KAL | SCL | CLO
            ----+-----+-----+----
            KAL | KAL | SCL | CLO
            ----+-----+-----+----
   mode     SCL | SCL | SCL | CLO
            ----+-----+-----+----
            CLO | CLO | CLO | CLO
```

It is possible to chain a TCP frontend to an HTTP backend. It is pointless if only HTTP traffic is
handled. But it may be used to handle several protocols within the same frontend. In this case, the
client's connection is first handled as a raw tcp connection before being upgraded to HTTP. Before
the upgrade, the content processings are performed on raw data. Once upgraded, data is parsed and
stored using an internal representation called HTX and it is no longer possible to rely on raw
representation. There is no way to go back.

There are two kind of upgrades, in-place upgrades and destructive upgrades. The first ones involves
a TCP to HTTP/1 upgrade. In HTTP/1, the request processings are serialized, thus the applicative
stream can be preserved. The second one involves a TCP to HTTP/2 upgrade. Because it is a
multiplexed protocol, the applicative stream cannot be associated to any HTTP/2 stream and is
destroyed. New applicative streams are then created when HAProxy receives new HTTP/2 streams at the
lower level, in the H2 multiplexer. It is important to understand this difference because that
drastically changes the way to process data. When an HTTP/1 upgrade is performed, the content
processings already performed on raw data are neither lost nor reexecuted while for an HTTP/2
upgrade, applicative streams are distinct and all frontend rules are evaluated systematically on
each one. And as said, the first stream, the TCP one, is destroyed, but only after the frontend
rules were evaluated.

There is another important point to understand when HTTP processings are performed from a TCP proxy.
While HAProxy is able to parse HTTP/1 in-fly from tcp-request content rules, it is not possible for
HTTP/2. Only the HTTP/2 preface can be parsed. This is a huge limitation regarding the HTTP content
analysis in TCP. Concretely it is only possible to know if received data are HTTP. For instance, it
is not possible to choose a backend based on the Host header value while it is trivial in HTTP/1.
Hopefully, there is a solution to mitigate this drawback.

There are two ways to perform an HTTP upgrade. The first one, the historical method, is to select an
HTTP backend. The upgrade happens when the backend is set. Thus, for in-place upgrades, only the
backend configuration is considered in the HTTP data processing. For destructive upgrades, the
applicative stream is destroyed, thus its processing is stopped. With this method, possibilities to
choose a backend with an HTTP/2 connection are really limited, as mentioned above, and a bit useless
because the stream is destroyed. The second method is to upgrade during the tcp-request content
rules evaluation, thanks to the "switch-mode http" action. In this case, the upgrade is performed in
the frontend context and it is possible to define HTTP directives in this frontend. For in-place
upgrades, it offers all the power of the HTTP analysis as soon as possible. It is not that far from
an HTTP frontend. For destructive upgrades, it does not change anything except it is useless to
choose a backend on limited information. It is of course the recommended method. Thus, testing the
request protocol from the tcp-request content rules to perform an HTTP upgrade is enough. All the
remaining HTTP manipulation may be moved to the frontend http-request ruleset. But keep in mind that
tcp-request content rules remains evaluated on each streams, that can't be changed.

## 4.1. Proxy keywords matrix {#section-4-1}

The following list of keywords is supported. Most of them may only be used in a limited set of
section types. Some of them are marked as "deprecated" because they are inherited from an old syntax
which may be confusing or functionally limited, and there are new recommended keywords to replace
them. Keywords marked with "(\*)" can be optionally inverted using the "no" prefix, e.g. "no option
contstats". This makes sense when the option has been enabled by default and must be disabled for a
specific instance. Such options may also be prefixed with "default" in order to restore default
settings regardless of what has been specified in a previous "defaults" section. Keywords supported
in defaults sections marked with "(!)" are only supported in named defaults sections, not anonymous
ones.

Note: Some dangerous and not recommended directives are intentionnaly not listed in the following
matrix. It is on purpose. These directives are documentated. But by not listing them below is one
more way to discourage anyone to use it.

```text
 keyword                              defaults   frontend   listen    backend
------------------------------------+----------+----------+---------+---------
acl                                       X (!)      X         X         X
backlog                                   X          X         X         -
balance                                   X          -         X         X
be-unpublished                            -          -         X         X
bind                                      -          X         X         -
capture cookie                            -          X         X         -
capture request header                    -          X         X         -
capture response header                   -          X         X         -
clitcpka-cnt                              X          X         X         -
clitcpka-idle                             X          X         X         -
clitcpka-intvl                            X          X         X         -
compression                               X          X         X         X
cookie                                    X          -         X         X
crt                                       -          X         X         -
declare capture                           -          X         X         -
default-server                            X          -         X         X
default_backend                           X          X         X         -
description                               -          X         X         X
disabled                                  X          X         X         X
dispatch                    (deprecated)  -          -         X         X
email-alert from                          X          X         X         X
email-alert level                         X          X         X         X
email-alert mailers                       X          X         X         X
email-alert myhostname                    X          X         X         X
email-alert to                            X          X         X         X
enabled                                   X          X         X         X
errorfile                                 X          X         X         X
errorfiles                                X          X         X         X
errorloc                                  X          X         X         X
errorloc302                               X          X         X         X
-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
errorloc303                               X          X         X         X
error-log-format                          X          X         X         -
external-check command                    X          -         X         X
external-check path                       X          -         X         X
force-persist                             -          -         X         X
force-be-switch                           -          X         X         -
filter                                    -          X         X         X
filter-sequence                           -          X         X         X
fullconn                                  X          -         X         X
guid                                      -          X         X         X
hash-balance-factor                       X          -         X         X
hash-preserve-affinity                    X          -         X         X
hash-type                                 X          -         X         X
http-after-response                       X (!)      X         X         X
http-check comment                        X          -         X         X
http-check connect                        X          -         X         X
http-check disable-on-404                 X          -         X         X
http-check expect                         X          -         X         X
http-check send                           X          -         X         X
http-check send-state                     X          -         X         X
http-check set-var                        X          -         X         X
http-check unset-var                      X          -         X         X
http-error                                X          X         X         X
http-request                              X (!)      X         X         X
http-response                             X (!)      X         X         X
http-reuse                                X          -         X         X
http-send-name-header                     X          -         X         X
id                                        -          X         X         X
ignore-persist                            -          -         X         X
load-server-state-from-file               X          -         X         X
log                                  (*)  X          X         X         X
log-format                                X          X         X         -
log-format-sd                             X          X         X         -
log-tag                                   X          X         X         X
log-steps                                 X          X         X         -
max-keep-alive-queue                      X          -         X         X
max-session-srv-conns                     X          X         X         -
maxconn                                   X          X         X         -
mode                                      X          X         X         X
monitor fail                              -          X         X         -
monitor-uri                               X          X         X         -
option abortonclose                  (*)  X          X         X         X
option allbackups                    (*)  X          -         X         X
option checkcache                    (*)  X          -         X         X
option clitcpka                      (*)  X          X         X         -
option contstats                     (*)  X          X         X         -
option disable-h2-upgrade            (*)  X          X         X         -
option dontlog-normal                (*)  X          X         X         -
option dontlognull                   (*)  X          X         X         -
-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
option external-check                     X          -         X         X
option forwardfor                         X          X         X         X
option forwarded                     (*)  X          -         X         X
option h1-case-adjust-bogus-client   (*)  X          X         X         -
option h1-case-adjust-bogus-server   (*)  X          -         X         X
option http-buffer-request           (*)  X          X         X         X
option http-drop-request-trailers    (*)  X          -         -         X
option http-drop-response-trailers   (*)  X          -         X         -
option http-ignore-probes            (*)  X          X         X         -
option http-keep-alive               (*)  X          X         X         X
option http-no-delay                 (*)  X          X         X         X
option http-pretend-keepalive        (*)  X          -         X         X
option http-restrict-req-hdr-names        X          X         X         X
option http-server-close             (*)  X          X         X         X
option http-use-proxy-header         (*)  X          X         X         -
option httpchk                            X          -         X         X
option httpclose                     (*)  X          X         X         X
option httplog                            X          X         X         -
option httpslog                           X          X         X         -
option idle-close-on-response        (*)  X          X         X         -
option independent-streams           (*)  X          X         X         X
option ldap-check                         X          -         X         X
option log-health-checks             (*)  X          -         X         X
option log-separate-errors           (*)  X          X         X         -
option logasap                       (*)  X          X         X         -
option mysql-check                        X          -         X         X
option nolinger                      (*)  X          X         X         X
option originalto                         X          X         X         X
option persist                       (*)  X          -         X         X
option pgsql-check                        X          -         X         X
option prefer-last-server            (*)  X          -         X         X
option redispatch                    (*)  X          -         X         X
option redis-check                        X          -         X         X
option smtpchk                            X          -         X         X
option socket-stats                  (*)  X          X         X         -
option splice-auto                   (*)  X          X         X         X
option splice-request                (*)  X          X         X         X
option splice-response               (*)  X          X         X         X
option spop-check                         X          -         X         X
option srvtcpka                      (*)  X          -         X         X
option ssl-hello-chk                      X          -         X         X
-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
option tcp-check                          X          -         X         X
option tcp-smart-accept              (*)  X          X         X         -
option tcp-smart-connect             (*)  X          -         X         X
option tcpka                              X          X         X         X
option tcplog                             X          X         X         -
option transparent      (deprecated) (*)  X          -         X         X
option use-small-buffers             (*)  X          -         X         X
persist rdp-cookie                        X          -         X         X
quic-initial                              X (!)      X         X         -
rate-limit sessions                       X          X         X         -
redirect                                  -          X         X         X
-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
retries                                   X          -         X         X
retry-on                                  X          -         X         X
server                                    -          -         X         X
server-state-file-name                    X          -         X         X
server-template                           -          -         X         X
source                                    X          -         X         X
srvtcpka-cnt                              X          -         X         X
srvtcpka-idle                             X          -         X         X
srvtcpka-intvl                            X          -         X         X
stats admin                               -          X         X         X
stats auth                                X          X         X         X
stats enable                              X          X         X         X
stats hide-version                        X          X         X         X
stats http-request                        -          X         X         X
stats realm                               X          X         X         X
stats refresh                             X          X         X         X
stats scope                               X          X         X         X
stats show-desc                           X          X         X         X
stats show-legends                        X          X         X         X
stats show-node                           X          X         X         X
stats show-version                        X          X         X         X
stats uri                                 X          X         X         X
-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
stick match                               -          -         X         X
stick on                                  -          -         X         X
stick store-request                       -          -         X         X
stick store-response                      -          -         X         X
stick-table                               -          X         X         X
tcp-check comment                         X          -         X         X
tcp-check connect                         X          -         X         X
tcp-check expect                          X          -         X         X
tcp-check send                            X          -         X         X
tcp-check send-lf                         X          -         X         X
tcp-check send-binary                     X          -         X         X
tcp-check send-binary-lf                  X          -         X         X
tcp-check set-var                         X          -         X         X
tcp-check unset-var                       X          -         X         X
tcp-request connection                    X (!)      X         X         -
tcp-request content                       X (!)      X         X         X
tcp-request inspect-delay                 X (!)      X         X         X
tcp-request session                       X (!)      X         X         -
tcp-response content                      X (!)      -         X         X
tcp-response inspect-delay                X (!)      -         X         X
timeout check                             X          -         X         X
timeout client                            X          X         X         -
timeout client-fin                        X          X         X         -
timeout client-hs                         X          X         X         -
timeout connect                           X          -         X         X
timeout http-keep-alive                   X          X         X         X
timeout http-request                      X          X         X         X
timeout queue                             X          -         X         X
timeout server                            X          -         X         X
timeout server-fin                        X          -         X         X
timeout tarpit                            X          X         X         X
timeout tunnel                            X          -         X         X
transparent                 (deprecated)  X          -         X         X
unique-id-format                          X          X         X         X
unique-id-header                          X          X         X         -
use_backend                               -          X         X         -
use-fcgi-app                              -          -         X         X
use-server                                -          -         X         X
------------------------------------+----------+----------+---------+---------
 keyword                              defaults   frontend   listen    backend
```

## 4.2. Alphabetically sorted keywords reference {#section-4-2}

This section provides a description of each keyword and its usage.

<a id="entry-4-2-acl"></a>

**`acl <aclname> <criterion> [flags] [operator] <value> ...`**

```haproxy
acl <aclname> <criterion> [flags] [operator] <value> ...
```

Declare or complete an access list.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes(!) \| yes \| yes \| yes

This directive is only available from named defaults sections, not anonymous ones. ACLs defined in a
defaults section are not visible from other sections using it.

Example:

```text
acl invalid_src  src          0.0.0.0/7 224.0.0.0/3
acl invalid_src  src_port     0:1023
acl local_dst    hdr(host) -i localhost
```

See [section 7](/docs/haproxy/acls-and-samples/) about ACL usage.

<a id="entry-4-2-backlog"></a>

**`backlog <conns>`**

```haproxy
backlog <conns>
```

Give hints to the system about the approximate listen backlog desired size

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments:

```text
<conns>   is the number of pending connections. Depending on the operating
          system, it may represent the number of already acknowledged
          connections, of non-acknowledged ones, or both.
```

This option is only meaningful for stream listeners, including QUIC ones. Its behavior however is
not identical with QUIC instances.

For all listeners but QUIC, in order to protect against SYN flood attacks, one solution is to
increase the system's SYN backlog size. Depending on the system, sometimes it is just tunable via a
system parameter, sometimes it is not adjustable at all, and sometimes the system relies on hints
given by the application at the time of the listen() syscall. By default, HAProxy passes the
frontend's maxconn value to the listen() syscall. On systems which can make use of this value, it
can sometimes be useful to be able to specify a different value, hence this backlog parameter.

On Linux 2.4, the parameter is ignored by the system. On Linux 2.6, it is used as a hint and the
system accepts up to the smallest greater power of two, and never more than some limits (usually
32768).

For QUIC listeners, backlog sets a shared limits for both the maximum count of active handshakes and
connections waiting to be accepted. The handshake phase relies primarily of the network latency with
the remote peer, whereas the second phase depends solely on haproxy load. When either one of this
limit is reached, haproxy starts to drop reception of INITIAL packets, preventing any new connection
allocation, until the connection excess starts to decrease. This situation may cause browsers to
silently downgrade the HTTP versions and switching to TCP.

See also: "maxconn" and the target operating system's tuning guide.

<a id="entry-4-2-balance"></a>

**`balance <algorithm> [ <arguments> ]`**

```haproxy
balance <algorithm> [ <arguments> ]
balance url_param <param> [check_post]
```

Define the load balancing algorithm to be used in a backend.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<algorithm> is the algorithm used to select a server when doing load
            balancing. This only applies when no persistence information
            is available, or when a connection is redispatched to another
            server. <algorithm> may be one of the following:

  roundrobin  Each server is used in turns, according to their weights.
              This is the smoothest and fairest algorithm when the server's
              processing time remains equally distributed. This algorithm
              is dynamic, which means that server weights may be adjusted
              on the fly for slow starts for instance. It is limited by
              design to 4095 active servers per backend. Note that in some
              large farms, when a server becomes up after having been down
              for a very short time, it may sometimes take a few hundreds
              requests for it to be re-integrated into the farm and start
              receiving traffic. This is normal, though very rare. It is
              indicated here in case you would have the chance to observe
              it, so that you don't worry. Note: weights are ignored for
              backends in LOG mode.

  static-rr   Each server is used in turns, according to their weights.
              This algorithm is as similar to roundrobin except that it is
              static, which means that changing a server's weight on the
              fly will have no effect. On the other hand, it has no design
              limitation on the number of servers, and when a server goes
              up, it is always immediately reintroduced into the farm, once
              the full map is recomputed. It also uses slightly less CPU to
              run (around -1%). This algorithm is not usable in LOG mode.

  leastconn   The server with the lowest number of connections receives the
              connection. Round-robin is performed within groups of servers
              of the same load to ensure that all servers will be used. Use
              of this algorithm is recommended where very long sessions are
              expected, such as LDAP, SQL, TSE, etc... but is not very well
              suited for protocols using short sessions such as HTTP. This
              algorithm is dynamic, which means that server weights may be
              adjusted on the fly for slow starts for instance. It will
              also consider the number of queued connections in addition to
              the established ones in order to minimize queuing. This
              algorithm is not usable in LOG mode.

  first       The first server with available connection slots receives the
              connection. The servers are chosen from the lowest numeric
              identifier to the highest (see server parameter "id"), which
              defaults to the server's position in the farm. Once a server
              reaches its maxconn value, the next server is used. It does
              not make sense to use this algorithm without setting maxconn.
              The purpose of this algorithm is to always use the smallest
              number of servers so that extra servers can be powered off
              during non-intensive hours. This algorithm ignores the server
              weight, and brings more benefit to long session such as RDP
              or IMAP than HTTP, though it can be useful there too. In
              order to use this algorithm efficiently, it is recommended
              that a cloud controller regularly checks server usage to turn
              them off when unused, and regularly checks backend queue to
              turn new servers on when the queue inflates. Alternatively,
              using "http-check send-state" may inform servers on the load.
              This algorithm is not usable in LOG mode.

  hash        Takes a regular sample expression in argument. The expression
              is evaluated for each request and hashed according to the
              configured hash-type. The result of the hash is divided by
              the total weight of the running servers to designate which
              server will receive the request. This can be used in place of
              "source", "uri", "hdr()", "url_param()", "rdp-cookie" to make
              use of a converter, refine the evaluation, or be used to
              extract data from local variables for example. When the data
              is not available, round robin will apply. This algorithm is
              static by default, which means that changing a server's
              weight on the fly will have no effect, but this can be
              changed using "hash-type". This algorithm is not usable for
              backends in LOG mode, please use "log-hash" instead.

  source      The source IP address is hashed and divided by the total
              weight of the running servers to designate which server will
              receive the request. This ensures that the same client IP
              address will always reach the same server as long as no
              server goes down or up. If the hash result changes due to the
              number of running servers changing, many clients will be
              directed to a different server. This algorithm is generally
              used in TCP mode where no cookie may be inserted. It may also
              be used on the Internet to provide a best-effort stickiness
              to clients which refuse session cookies. This algorithm is
              static by default, which means that changing a server's
              weight on the fly will have no effect, but this can be
              changed using "hash-type". See also the "hash" option above.
              This algorithm is not usable for backends in LOG mode.

  uri         This algorithm hashes either the left part of the URI (before
              the question mark) or the whole URI (if the "whole" parameter
              is present) and divides the hash value by the total weight of
              the running servers. The result designates which server will
              receive the request. This ensures that the same URI will
              always be directed to the same server as long as no server
              goes up or down. This is used with proxy caches and
              anti-virus proxies in order to maximize the cache hit rate.
              Note that this algorithm may only be used in an HTTP backend.
              This algorithm is static by default, which means that
              changing a server's weight on the fly will have no effect,
              but this can be changed using "hash-type".

              This algorithm supports two optional parameters "len" and
              "depth", both followed by a positive integer number. These
              options may be helpful when it is needed to balance servers
              based on the beginning of the URI only. The "len" parameter
              indicates that the algorithm should only consider that many
              characters at the beginning of the URI to compute the hash.
              Note that having "len" set to 1 rarely makes sense since most
              URIs start with a leading "/".

              The "depth" parameter indicates the maximum directory depth
              to be used to compute the hash. One level is counted for each
              slash in the request. If both parameters are specified, the
              evaluation stops when either is reached.

              A "path-only" parameter indicates that the hashing key starts
              at the first '/' of the path. This can be used to ignore the
              authority part of absolute URIs, and to make sure that HTTP/1
              and HTTP/2 URIs will provide the same hash. See also the
              "hash" option above.

  url_param   The URL parameter specified in argument will be looked up in
              the query string of each HTTP GET request.

              If the modifier "check_post" is used, then an HTTP POST
              request entity will be searched for the parameter argument,
              when it is not found in a query string after a question mark
              ('?') in the URL. The message body will only start to be
              analyzed once either the advertised amount of data has been
              received or the request buffer is full. In the unlikely event
              that chunked encoding is used, only the first chunk is
              scanned. Parameter values separated by a chunk boundary, may
              be randomly balanced if at all. This keyword used to support
              an optional <max_wait> parameter which is now ignored.

              If the parameter is found followed by an equal sign ('=') and
              a value, then the value is hashed and divided by the total
              weight of the running servers. The result designates which
              server will receive the request.

              This is used to track user identifiers in requests and ensure
              that a same user ID will always be sent to the same server as
              long as no server goes up or down. If no value is found or if
              the parameter is not found, then a round robin algorithm is
              applied. Note that this algorithm may only be used in an HTTP
              backend. This algorithm is static by default, which means
              that changing a server's weight on the fly will have no
              effect, but this can be changed using "hash-type". See also
              the "hash" option above.

  hdr(<name>) The HTTP header <name> will be looked up in each HTTP
              request. Just as with the equivalent ACL 'hdr()' function,
              the header name in parenthesis is not case sensitive. If the
              header is absent or if it does not contain any value, the
              roundrobin algorithm is applied instead.

              An optional 'use_domain_only' parameter is available, for
              reducing the hash algorithm to the main domain part with some
              specific headers such as 'Host'. For instance, in the Host
              value "haproxy.1wt.eu", only "1wt" will be considered.

              This algorithm is static by default, which means that
              changing a server's weight on the fly will have no effect,
              but this can be changed using "hash-type". See also the
              "hash" option above.

  random
  random(<draws>)
              A random number will be used as the key for the consistent
              hashing function. This means that the servers' weights are
              respected, dynamic weight changes immediately take effect, as
              well as new server additions. Random load balancing can be
              useful with large farms or when servers are frequently added
              or removed as it may avoid the hammering effect that could
              result from roundrobin or leastconn in this situation. The
              hash-balance-factor directive can be used to further improve
              fairness of the load balancing, especially in situations
              where servers show highly variable response times. When an
              argument <draws> is present, it must be an integer value one
              or greater, indicating the number of draws before selecting
              the least loaded of these servers. It was indeed demonstrated
              that picking the least loaded of two servers is enough to
              significantly improve the fairness of the algorithm, by
              always avoiding to pick the most loaded server within a farm
              and getting rid of any bias that could be induced by the
              unfair distribution of the consistent list. Higher values N
              will take away N-1 of the highest loaded servers at the
              expense of performance. With very high values, the algorithm
              will converge towards the leastconn's result but much slower.
              In addition, for large server farms with very low loads (or
              perfect balance), comparing loads will often lead to a tie,
              so in case of equal loads between all measured servers, their
              request rate over the last second are compared, which allows
              to better balance server usage over time in the same spirit
              as roundrobin does, and smooth consistent hash unfairness.
              The default value is 2, which generally shows very good
              distribution and performance. For large farms with low loads
              (less than a few requests per second per server), it may help
              to raise it to 3 or even 4. This algorithm is also known as
              the Power of Two Random Choices and is described here:
              http://www.eecs.harvard.edu/~michaelm/postscripts/handbook2001.pdf

              For backends in LOG mode, the number of draws is ignored and
              a single random is picked since there is no notion of server
              load. Random log balancing can be useful with large farms or
              when servers are frequently added or removed from the pool of
              available servers as it may avoid the hammering effect that
              could result from roundrobin in this situation.

  rdp-cookie
  rdp-cookie(<name>)
              The RDP cookie <name> (or "mstshash" if omitted) will be
              looked up and hashed for each incoming TCP request. Just as
              with the equivalent ACL 'req.rdp_cookie()' function, the name
              is not case-sensitive. This mechanism is useful as a degraded
              persistence mode, as it makes it possible to always send the
              same user (or the same session ID) to the same server. If the
              cookie is not found, the normal roundrobin algorithm is
              used instead.

              Note that for this to work, the frontend must ensure that an
              RDP cookie is already present in the request buffer. For this
              you must use 'tcp-request content accept' rule combined with
              a 'req.rdp_cookie_cnt' ACL.

              This algorithm is static by default, which means that
              changing a server's weight on the fly will have no effect,
              but this can be changed using "hash-type". See also the
              "hash" option above.

  log-hash    Takes a comma-delimited list of converters in argument. These
              converters are applied in sequence to the input log message,
              and the result will be cast as a string then hashed according
              to the configured hash-type. The resulting hash will be used
              to select the destination server among the ones declared in
              the log backend. The goal of this algorithm is to be able to
              extract a key within the final log message using string
              converters and then be able to stick to the same server thanks
              to the hash. Only "map-based" hashes are supported for now.
              This algorithm is only usable for backends in LOG mode, for
              others, please use "hash" instead.

  sticky      Tries to stick to the same server as much as possible. The
              first server in the list of available servers receives all
              the log messages. When the server goes DOWN, the next server
              in the list takes its place. When a previously DOWN server
              goes back UP it is added at the end of the list so that the
              sticky server doesn't change until it becomes DOWN.

<arguments> is an optional list of arguments which may be needed by some
            algorithms. Right now, only "url_param", "uri" and "log-hash"
            support an optional argument.
```

The load balancing algorithm of a backend is set to "random" when no other algorithm, mode nor
option have been set. The algorithm may only be set once for each backend.

With authentication schemes that require the same connection like NTLM, URI based algorithms must
not be used, as they would cause subsequent requests to be routed to different backend servers,
breaking the invalid assumptions NTLM relies on.

TCP/HTTP Examples:

```text
balance roundrobin
balance url_param userid
balance url_param session_id check_post 64
balance hdr(User-Agent)
balance hdr(host)
balance hdr(Host) use_domain_only
balance hash req.cookie(clientid)
balance hash var(req.client_id)
balance hash req.hdr_ip(x-forwarded-for,-1),ipmask(24)
```

LOG backend examples:

```text
global
  log backend@mylog-rrb local0 # send all logs to mylog-rrb backend
  log backend@mylog-hash local0 # send all logs to mylog-hash backend

backend mylog-rrb
  mode log
  balance roundrobin

  server s1 udp@127.0.0.1:514 # will receive 50% of log messages
  server s2 udp@127.0.0.1:514

backend mylog-hash
  mode log

  # extract "METHOD URL PROTO" at the end of the log message,
  # and let haproxy hash it so that log messages generated from
  # similar requests get sent to the same syslog server:
  balance log-hash 'field(-2,\")'

  # server list here
  server s1 127.0.0.1:514
  #...
```

Note: the following caveats and limitations on using the "check_post" extension with "url_param"
must be considered:

    - all POST requests are eligible for consideration, because there is no way
      to determine if the parameters will be found in the body or entity which
      may contain binary data. Therefore another method may be required to
      restrict consideration of POST requests that have no URL parameters in
      the body. (see acl http_end)

    - using a `<max_wait>` value larger than the request buffer size does not
      make sense and is useless. The buffer size is set at build time, and
      defaults to 16 kB.

    - Content-Encoding is not supported, the parameter search will probably
      fail; and load balancing will fall back to Round Robin.

    - Expect: 100-continue is not supported, load balancing will fall back to
      Round Robin.

    - Transfer-Encoding (RFC7230 3.3.1) is only supported in the first chunk.
      If the entire parameter value is not present in the first chunk, the
      selection of server is undefined (actually, defined by how little
      actually appeared in the first chunk).

    - This feature does not support generation of a 100, 411 or 501 response.

    - In some cases, requesting "check_post" MAY attempt to scan the entire
      contents of a message body. Scanning normally terminates when linear
      white space or control characters are found, indicating the end of what
      might be a URL parameter list. This is probably not a concern with SGML
      type message bodies.

See also: "dispatch", "cookie", "transparent", "hash-type".

<a id="entry-4-2-be-unpublished"></a>

**`be-unpublished`**

```haproxy
be-unpublished
```

Instructs the backend to start in the unpublished state.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend no \| no \| yes \| yes

In effect, any use_backend and default_backend rules from another proxy which reference the current
proxy are ignored and the next content switching rules are evaluated. This can be bypassed though
via a "force-be-switch" rule.

This state is similar to the disabled one but with some differences. First, an unpublished backend
will still be fully initialized, including the server health checks which remain active. Finally, a
backend can be publicly exposed via the command "publish backend" on the CLI. See the management
manual.

See also: "force-be-switch"

<a id="entry-4-2-bind"></a>

**`bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] [param*]`**

```haproxy
bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] [param*]
bind /<path> [, ...] [param*]
```

Define one or several listening addresses and/or ports in a frontend.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend no \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments:

```text
<address>     is optional and can be a host name, an IPv4 address, an IPv6
              address, or '*'. It designates the address the frontend will
              listen on. If unset, all IPv4 addresses of the system will be
              listened on. The same will apply for '*' or the system's
              special address "0.0.0.0". The IPv6 equivalent is '::'. Note
              that for UDP, specific OS features are required when binding
              on multiple addresses to ensure the correct network interface
              and source address will be used on response. In other way,
              for QUIC listeners only bind on multiple addresses if running
              with a modern enough systems.

              Optionally, an address family prefix may be used before the
              address to force the family regardless of the address format,
              which can be useful to specify a path to a unix socket with
              no slash ('/'). Currently supported prefixes are:
                - 'ipv4@'  -> address is always IPv4
                - 'ipv6@'  -> address is always IPv6
                - 'udp@'   -> address is resolved as IPv4 or IPv6 and
                  protocol UDP is used. Currently those listeners are
                  supported only in log-forward sections.
                - 'udp4@'  -> address is always IPv4 and protocol UDP
                  is used. Currently those listeners are supported
                  only in log-forward sections.
                - 'udp6@'  -> address is always IPv6 and protocol UDP
                  is used. Currently those listeners are supported
                  only in log-forward sections.
                - 'unix@'  -> address is a path to a local unix socket
                - 'abns@'  -> address is in abstract namespace (Linux only).
                - 'abnsz@'  -> address is in abstract namespace (Linux only)
                   but it is explicitly zero-terminated. This means no \0
                   padding is used to complete sun_path. It is useful to
                   interconnect with programs that don't implement the
                   default abns naming logic that haproxy uses.
                - 'fd@<n>' -> use file descriptor <n> inherited from the
                  parent. The fd must be bound and may or may not already
                  be listening.
                - 'sockpair@<n>'-> like fd@ but you must use the fd of a
                  connected unix socket or of a socketpair. The bind waits
                  to receive a FD over the unix socket and uses it as if it
                  was the FD of an accept(). Should be used carefully.
                - 'quic4@' -> address is resolved as IPv4 and protocol UDP
                  is used. Note that to achieve the best performance with a
                  large traffic you should keep "tune.quic.fe.sock-per-conn
                  default-on". Else QUIC connections will be multiplexed
                  over the listener socket. Another alternative would be to
                  duplicate QUIC listener instances over several threads,
                  for example using "shards" keyword to at least reduce
                  thread contention.
                - 'quic6@' -> address is resolved as IPv6 and protocol UDP
                  is used. The performance note for QUIC over IPv4 applies
                  as well.
                - 'rhttp@' [ EXPERIMENTAL ] -> used for reverse HTTP.
                  Address must be a server with the format
                  '<backend>/<server>'. The server will be used to
                  instantiate connections to a remote address. The listener
                  will try to maintain "nbconn" connections. This is an
                  experimental features which requires
                  "expose-experimental-directives" on a line before this
                  bind.

              You may want to reference some environment variables in the
              address parameter, see section 2.3 about environment
              variables.

<port_range>  is either a unique TCP port, or a port range for which the
              proxy will accept connections for the IP address specified
              above. The port is mandatory for TCP listeners. Note that in
              the case of an IPv6 address, the port is always the number
              after the last colon (':'). A range can either be:
               - a numerical port (ex: '80')
               - a dash-delimited ports range explicitly stating the lower
                 and upper bounds (ex: '2000-2100') which are included in
                 the range.

              Particular care must be taken against port ranges, because
              every <address:port> couple consumes one socket (= a file
              descriptor), so it's easy to consume lots of descriptors
              with a simple range, and to run out of sockets. Also, each
              <address:port> couple must be used only once among all
              instances running on a same system. Please note that binding
              to ports lower than 1024 generally require particular
              privileges to start the program, which are independent of
              the 'uid' parameter.

<path>        is a UNIX socket path beginning with a slash ('/'). This is
              alternative to the TCP listening port. HAProxy will then
              receive UNIX connections on the socket located at this place.
              The path must begin with a slash and by default is absolute.
              It can be relative to the prefix defined by "unix-bind" in
              the global section. Note that the total length of the prefix
              followed by the socket path cannot exceed some system limits
              for UNIX sockets, which commonly are set to 107 characters.

<param*>      is a list of parameters common to all sockets declared on the
              same line. These numerous parameters depend on OS and build
              options and have a complete section dedicated to them. Please
              refer to section 5 to for more details.
```

It is possible to specify a list of address:port combinations delimited by commas. The frontend will
then listen on all of these addresses. There is no fixed limit to the number of addresses and ports
which can be listened on in a frontend, as well as there is no limit to the number of "bind"
statements in a frontend.

Example:

```text
listen http_proxy
    bind:80,:443
    bind 10.0.0.1:10080,10.0.0.1:10443
    bind /var/run/ssl-frontend.sock user root mode 600 accept-proxy

listen http_https_proxy
    bind:80
    bind:443 ssl crt /etc/haproxy/site.pem

listen http_https_proxy_explicit
    bind ipv6@:80
    bind ipv4@public_ssl:443 ssl crt /etc/haproxy/site.pem
    bind unix@ssl-frontend.sock user root mode 600 accept-proxy

listen external_bind_app1
    bind "fd@${FD_APP1}"

listen h3_quic_proxy
    bind quic4@10.0.0.1:8888 ssl crt /etc/mycrt
```

Note: regarding Linux's abstract namespace sockets, "abns" HAProxy sockets uses the whole sun_path
length is used for the address length. Some other programs such as socat use the string length only
by default. Pass the option ",unix-tightsocklen=0" to any abstract socket definition in socat to
make it compatible with HAProxy's, or use the "abnsz" HAProxy socket family instead.

See also: "source", "option forwardfor", "unix-bind" and the PROXY protocol documentation, and
[section 5](/docs/haproxy/bind-and-server-options/) about bind options.

<a id="entry-4-2-capture-cookie"></a>

**`capture cookie <name> len <length>`**

```haproxy
capture cookie <name> len <length>
```

Capture and log a cookie in the request and in the response.

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend no \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments:

```text
<name>    is the beginning of the name of the cookie to capture. In order
          to match the exact name, simply suffix the name with an equal
          sign ('='). The full name will appear in the logs, which is
          useful with application servers which adjust both the cookie name
          and value (e.g. ASPSESSIONXXX).

<length>  is the maximum number of characters to report in the logs, which
          include the cookie name, the equal sign and the value, all in the
          standard "name=value" form. The string will be truncated on the
          right if it exceeds <length>.
```

Only the first cookie is captured. Both the "cookie" request headers and the "set-cookie" response
headers are monitored. This is particularly useful to check for application bugs causing session
crossing or stealing between users, because generally the user's cookies can only change on a login
page.

When the cookie was not presented by the client, the associated log column will report "-". When a
request does not cause a cookie to be assigned by the server, a "-" is reported in the response
column.

The capture is performed in the frontend only because it is necessary that the log format does not
change for a given frontend depending on the backends. This may change in the future. Note that
there can be only one "capture cookie" statement in a frontend. The maximum capture length is set by
the global "tune.http.cookielen" setting and defaults to 63 characters. It is not possible to
specify a capture in a "defaults" section.

Example:

```text
capture cookie ASPSESSION len 32
```

See also: "capture request header", "capture response header" as well as [section 8](/docs/haproxy/configuration-logging/) about logging.

<a id="entry-4-2-capture-request-header"></a>

**`capture request header <name> len <length>`**

```haproxy
capture request header <name> len <length>
```

Capture and log the last occurrence of the specified request header.

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend no \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments:

```text
<name>    is the name of the header to capture. The header names are not
          case-sensitive, but it is a common practice to write them as they
          appear in the requests, with the first letter of each word in
          upper case. The header name will not appear in the logs, only the
          value is reported, but the position in the logs is respected.

<length>  is the maximum number of characters to extract from the value and
          report in the logs. The string will be truncated on the right if
          it exceeds <length>.
```

The complete value of the last occurrence of the header is captured. The value will be added to the
logs between braces ('{}'). If multiple headers are captured, they will be delimited by a vertical
bar ('\|') and will appear in the same order they were declared in the configuration. Non-existent
headers will be logged just as an empty string. Common uses for request header captures include the
"Host" field in virtual hosting environments, the "Content-length" when uploads are supported,
"User-agent" to quickly differentiate between real users and robots, and "X-Forwarded-For" in
proxied environments to find where the request came from.

Note that when capturing headers such as "User-agent", some spaces may be logged, making the log
analysis more difficult. Thus be careful about what you log if you know your log parser is not smart
enough to rely on the braces.

There is no limit to the number of captured request headers nor to their length, though it is wise
to keep them low to limit memory usage per stream. In order to keep log format consistent for a same
frontend, header captures can only be declared in a frontend. It is not possible to specify a
capture in a "defaults" section.

Example:

```text
capture request header Host len 15
capture request header X-Forwarded-For len 15
capture request header Referer len 15
```

See also: "capture cookie", "capture response header" as well as [section 8](/docs/haproxy/configuration-logging/) about logging.

<a id="entry-4-2-capture-response-header"></a>

**`capture response header <name> len <length>`**

```haproxy
capture response header <name> len <length>
```

Capture and log the last occurrence of the specified response header.

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend no \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments:

```text
<name>    is the name of the header to capture. The header names are not
          case-sensitive, but it is a common practice to write them as they
          appear in the response, with the first letter of each word in
          upper case. The header name will not appear in the logs, only the
          value is reported, but the position in the logs is respected.

<length>  is the maximum number of characters to extract from the value and
          report in the logs. The string will be truncated on the right if
          it exceeds <length>.
```

The complete value of the last occurrence of the header is captured. The result will be added to the
logs between braces ('{}') after the captured request headers. If multiple headers are captured,
they will be delimited by a vertical bar ('\|') and will appear in the same order they were declared
in the configuration. Non-existent headers will be logged just as an empty string. Common uses for
response header captures include the "Content-length" header which indicates how many bytes are
expected to be returned, the "Location" header to track redirections.

There is no limit to the number of captured response headers nor to their length, though it is wise
to keep them low to limit memory usage per stream. In order to keep log format consistent for a same
frontend, header captures can only be declared in a frontend. It is not possible to specify a
capture in a "defaults" section.

Example:

```text
capture response header Content-length len 9
capture response header Location len 15
```

See also: "capture cookie", "capture request header" as well as [section 8](/docs/haproxy/configuration-logging/) about logging.

<a id="entry-4-2-clitcpka-cnt"></a>

**`clitcpka-cnt <count>`**

```haproxy
clitcpka-cnt <count>
```

Sets the maximum number of keepalive probes TCP should send before dropping the connection on the
client side.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments:

```text
<count>   is the maximum number of keepalive probes.
```

This keyword corresponds to the socket option TCP_KEEPCNT. If this keyword is not specified,
system-wide TCP parameter (tcp_keepalive_probes) is used. The availability of this setting depends
on the operating system. It is known to work on Linux.

See also: "option clitcpka", "clitcpka-idle", "clitcpka-intvl".

<a id="entry-4-2-clitcpka-idle"></a>

**`clitcpka-idle <timeout>`**

```haproxy
clitcpka-idle <timeout>
```

Sets the time the connection needs to remain idle before TCP starts sending keepalive probes, if
enabled the sending of TCP keepalive packets on the client side.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments:

```text
<timeout> is the time the connection needs to remain idle before TCP starts
          sending keepalive probes. It is specified in seconds by default,
          but can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the
          unit, as explained at the top of this document.
```

This keyword corresponds to the socket option TCP_KEEPIDLE. If this keyword is not specified,
system-wide TCP parameter (tcp_keepalive_time) is used. The availability of this setting depends on
the operating system. It is known to work on Linux.

See also: "option clitcpka", "clitcpka-cnt", "clitcpka-intvl".

<a id="entry-4-2-clitcpka-intvl"></a>

**`clitcpka-intvl <timeout>`**

```haproxy
clitcpka-intvl <timeout>
```

Sets the time between individual keepalive probes on the client side.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments:

```text
<timeout> is the time between individual keepalive probes. It is specified
          in seconds by default, but can be in any other unit if the number
          is suffixed by the unit, as explained at the top of this
          document.
```

This keyword corresponds to the socket option TCP_KEEPINTVL. If this keyword is not specified,
system-wide TCP parameter (tcp_keepalive_intvl) is used. The availability of this setting depends on
the operating system. It is known to work on Linux.

See also: "option clitcpka", "clitcpka-cnt", "clitcpka-idle".

<a id="entry-4-2-compression-algo"></a>

**`compression algo <algorithm> ...`**

```haproxy
compression algo <algorithm> ...
compression algo-req <algorithm>
compression algo-res <algorithm>
compression type <mime type> ...
```

Enable HTTP compression.

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
algo     is followed by the list of supported compression algorithms for
         responses (legacy keyword)
algo-req is followed by compression algorithm for request (only one is
  provided).
algo-res is followed by the list of supported compression algorithms for
         responses.
type     is followed by the list of MIME types that will be compressed for
         responses (legacy keyword).
type-req is followed by the list of MIME types that will be compressed for
         requests.
type-res is followed by the list of MIME types that will be compressed for
         responses.
```

The currently supported algorithms are:

```text
identity     this is mostly for debugging, and it was useful for developing
             the compression feature. Identity does not apply any change on
             data.

gzip         applies gzip compression. This setting is only available when
             support for zlib or libslz was built in.

deflate      same as "gzip", but with deflate algorithm and zlib format.
             Note that this algorithm has ambiguous support on many
             browsers and no support at all from recent ones. It is
             strongly recommended not to use it for anything else than
             experimentation. This setting is only available when support
             for zlib or libslz was built in.

raw-deflate  same as "deflate" without the zlib wrapper, and used as an
             alternative when the browser wants "deflate". All major
             browsers understand it and despite violating the standards,
             it is known to work better than "deflate", at least on MSIE
             and some versions of Safari. Do not use it in conjunction
             with "deflate", use either one or the other since both react
             to the same Accept-Encoding token. This setting is only
             available when support for zlib or libslz was built in.
```

Compression will be activated depending on the Accept-Encoding request header. With identity, it
does not take care of that header. If backend servers support HTTP compression, these directives
will be no-op: HAProxy will see the compressed response and will not compress again. If backend
servers do not support HTTP compression and there is Accept-Encoding header in request, HAProxy will
compress the matching response.

Compression is disabled when: \* the request does not advertise a supported compression algorithm in
the "Accept-Encoding" header \* the response message is not HTTP/1.1 or above \* HTTP status code is
not one of 200, 201, 202, or 203 \* response contain neither a "Content-Length" header nor a
"Transfer-Encoding" whose last value is "chunked" \* response contains a "Content-Type" header whose
first value starts with "multipart" \* the response contains the "no-transform" value in the
"Cache-control" header \* User-Agent matches "Mozilla/4" unless it is MSIE 6 with XP SP2, or MSIE 7
and later \* The response contains a "Content-Encoding" header, indicating that the response is
already compressed (see compression offload) \* The response contains an invalid "ETag" header or
multiple ETag headers \* The payload size is smaller than the minimum size (see compression
minsize-res)

Note: The compression does not emit the Warning header.

Examples:

```text
compression algo gzip
compression type text/html text/plain
```

See also: "compression offload", "compression direction", "compression minsize-req" and "compression
minsize-res"

<a id="entry-4-2-compression-minsize-req"></a>

**`compression minsize-req <size>`**

```haproxy
compression minsize-req <size>
compression minsize-res <size>
```

Sets the minimum payload size in bytes for compression to be applied.

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Payloads smaller than this size will not be compressed, avoiding unnecessary CPU overhead for data
that would not significantly benefit from compression. "minsize-req" applies on requests and
"minsize-res" on responses. The default value is 0.

<a id="entry-4-2-compression-offload"></a>

**`compression offload`**

```haproxy
compression offload
```

Makes HAProxy work as a compression offloader only.

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend no \| yes \| yes \| yes

The "offload" setting makes HAProxy remove the Accept-Encoding header to prevent backend servers
from compressing responses. It is strongly recommended not to do this because this means that all
the compression work will be done on the single point where HAProxy is located. However in some
deployment scenarios, HAProxy may be installed in front of a buggy gateway with broken HTTP
compression implementation which can't be turned off. In that case HAProxy can be used to prevent
that gateway from emitting invalid payloads. In this case, simply removing the header in the
configuration does not work because it applies before the header is parsed, so that prevents HAProxy
from compressing. The "offload" setting should then be used for such scenarios.

If this setting is used in a defaults section, a warning is emitted and the option is ignored.

See also: "compression type", "compression algo", "compression direction"

<a id="entry-4-2-compression-direction"></a>

**`compression direction <direction> (deprecated)`**

```haproxy
compression direction <direction> (deprecated)
```

Makes haproxy able to compress both requests and responses. Valid values are "request", to compress
only requests, "response", to compress only responses, or "both", when you want to compress both.
The default value is "response".

This directive is only relevant when legacy "filter compression" was enabled, as with explicit
comp-req and comp-res filters compression direction is redundant.

May be used in the following contexts: http

See also: "compression type", "compression algo", "compression offload"

<a id="entry-4-2-cookie"></a>

**`cookie <name> [ rewrite | insert | prefix ] [ indirect ] [ nocache ]`**

```haproxy
cookie <name> [ rewrite | insert | prefix ] [ indirect ] [ nocache ]
              [ postonly ] [ preserve ] [ httponly ] [ secure ]
              [ domain <domain> ]* [ maxidle <idle> ] [ maxlife <life> ]
              [ dynamic ] [ attr <value> ]*
```

Enable cookie-based persistence in a backend.

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<name>    is the name of the cookie which will be monitored, modified or
          inserted in order to bring persistence. This cookie is sent to
          the client via a "Set-Cookie" header in the response, and is
          brought back by the client in a "Cookie" header in all requests.
          Special care should be taken to choose a name which does not
          conflict with any likely application cookie. Also, if the same
          backends are subject to be used by the same clients (e.g.
          HTTP/HTTPS), care should be taken to use different cookie names
          between all backends if persistence between them is not desired.

rewrite   This keyword indicates that the cookie will be provided by the
          server and that HAProxy will have to modify its value to set the
          server's identifier in it. This mode is handy when the management
          of complex combinations of "Set-cookie" and "Cache-control"
          headers is left to the application. The application can then
          decide whether or not it is appropriate to emit a persistence
          cookie. Since all responses should be monitored, this mode
          doesn't work in HTTP tunnel mode. Unless the application
          behavior is very complex and/or broken, it is advised not to
          start with this mode for new deployments. This keyword is
          incompatible with "insert" and "prefix".

insert    This keyword indicates that the persistence cookie will have to
          be inserted by HAProxy in server responses if the client did not

          already have a cookie that would have permitted it to access this
          server. When used without the "preserve" option, if the server
          emits a cookie with the same name, it will be removed before
          processing. For this reason, this mode can be used to upgrade
          existing configurations running in the "rewrite" mode. The cookie
          will only be a session cookie and will not be stored on the
          client's disk. By default, unless the "indirect" option is added,
          the server will see the cookies emitted by the client. Due to
          caching effects, it is generally wise to add the "nocache" or
          "postonly" keywords (see below). The "insert" keyword is not
          compatible with "rewrite" and "prefix".

prefix    This keyword indicates that instead of relying on a dedicated
          cookie for the persistence, an existing one will be completed.
          This may be needed in some specific environments where the client
          does not support more than one single cookie and the application
          already needs it. In this case, whenever the server sets a cookie
          named <name>, it will be prefixed with the server's identifier
          and a delimiter. The prefix will be removed from all client
          requests so that the server still finds the cookie it emitted.
          Since all requests and responses are subject to being modified,
          this mode doesn't work with tunnel mode. The "prefix" keyword is
          not compatible with "rewrite" and "insert". Note: it is highly
          recommended not to use "indirect" with "prefix", otherwise server
          cookie updates would not be sent to clients.

indirect  When this option is specified, no cookie will be emitted to a
          client which already has a valid one for the server which has
          processed the request. If the server sets such a cookie itself,
          it will be removed, unless the "preserve" option is also set. In
          "insert" mode, this will additionally remove cookies from the
          requests transmitted to the server, making the persistence
          mechanism totally transparent from an application point of view.
          Note: it is highly recommended not to use "indirect" with
          "prefix", otherwise server cookie updates would not be sent to
          clients.

nocache   This option is recommended in conjunction with the insert mode
          when there is a cache between the client and HAProxy, as it
          ensures that a cacheable response will be tagged non-cacheable if
          a cookie needs to be inserted. This is important because if all
          persistence cookies are added on a cacheable home page for
          instance, then all customers will then fetch the page from an
          outer cache and will all share the same persistence cookie,
          leading to one server receiving much more traffic than others.
          See also the "insert" and "postonly" options.

postonly  This option ensures that cookie insertion will only be performed
          on responses to POST requests. It is an alternative to the
          "nocache" option, because POST responses are not cacheable, so
          this ensures that the persistence cookie will never get cached.
          Since most sites do not need any sort of persistence before the
          first POST which generally is a login request, this is a very
          efficient method to optimize caching without risking to find a
          persistence cookie in the cache.
          See also the "insert" and "nocache" options.

preserve  This option may only be used with "insert" and/or "indirect". It
          allows the server to emit the persistence cookie itself. In this
          case, if a cookie is found in the response, HAProxy will leave it
          untouched. This is useful in order to end persistence after a
          logout request for instance. For this, the server just has to
          emit a cookie with an invalid value (e.g. empty) or with a date in
          the past. By combining this mechanism with the "disable-on-404"
          check option, it is possible to perform a completely graceful
          shutdown because users will definitely leave the server after
          they logout.

httponly  This option tells HAProxy to add an "HttpOnly" cookie attribute
          when a cookie is inserted. This attribute is used so that a
          user agent doesn't share the cookie with non-HTTP components.
          Please check RFC6265 for more information on this attribute.

secure    This option tells HAProxy to add a "Secure" cookie attribute when
          a cookie is inserted. This attribute is used so that a user agent
          never emits this cookie over non-secure channels, which means
          that a cookie learned with this flag will be presented only over
          SSL/TLS connections. Please check RFC6265 for more information on
          this attribute.

domain    This option allows to specify the domain at which a cookie is
          inserted. It requires exactly one parameter: a valid domain
          name. If the domain begins with a dot, the browser is allowed to
          use it for any host ending with that name. It is also possible to
          specify several domain names by invoking this option multiple
          times. Some browsers might have small limits on the number of
          domains, so be careful when doing that. For the record, sending
          10 domains to MSIE 6 or Firefox 2 works as expected.

maxidle   This option allows inserted cookies to be ignored after some idle
          time. It only works with insert-mode cookies. When a cookie is
          sent to the client, the date this cookie was emitted is sent too.
          Upon further presentations of this cookie, if the date is older
          than the delay indicated by the parameter (in seconds), it will
          be ignored. Otherwise, it will be refreshed if needed when the
          response is sent to the client. This is particularly useful to
          prevent users who never close their browsers from remaining for
          too long on the same server (e.g. after a farm size change). When
          this option is set and a cookie has no date, it is always
          accepted, but gets refreshed in the response. This maintains the
          ability for admins to access their sites. Cookies that have a
          date in the future further than 24 hours are ignored. Doing so
          lets admins fix timezone issues without risking kicking users off
          the site.

maxlife   This option allows inserted cookies to be ignored after some life
          time, whether they're in use or not. It only works with insert
          mode cookies. When a cookie is first sent to the client, the date
          this cookie was emitted is sent too. Upon further presentations
          of this cookie, if the date is older than the delay indicated by
          the parameter (in seconds), it will be ignored. If the cookie in
          the request has no date, it is accepted and a date will be set.
          Cookies that have a date in the future further than 24 hours are
          ignored. Doing so lets admins fix timezone issues without risking
          kicking users off the site. Contrary to maxidle, this value is
          not refreshed, only the first visit date counts. Both maxidle and
          maxlife may be used at the time. This is particularly useful to
          prevent users who never close their browsers from remaining for
          too long on the same server (e.g. after a farm size change). This
          is stronger than the maxidle method in that it forces a
          redispatch after some absolute delay.

dynamic   Activate dynamic cookies. When used, a session cookie is
          dynamically created for each server, based on the IP and port
          of the server, and a secret key, specified in the
          "dynamic-cookie-key" backend directive.
          The cookie will be regenerated each time the IP address change,
          and is only generated for IPv4/IPv6.

attr      This option tells HAProxy to add an extra attribute when a
          cookie is inserted. The attribute value can contain any
          characters except control ones or ";". This option may be
          repeated.
```

There can be only one persistence cookie per HTTP backend, and it can be declared in a defaults
section. The value of the cookie will be the value indicated after the "cookie" keyword in a
"server" statement. If no cookie is declared for a given server, the cookie is not set.

Examples:

```text
cookie JSESSIONID prefix
cookie SRV insert indirect nocache
cookie SRV insert postonly indirect
cookie SRV insert indirect nocache maxidle 30m maxlife 8h
```

See also: "balance source", "capture cookie", "server" and "ignore-persist".

<a id="entry-4-2-declare-capture"></a>

**`declare capture [ request | response ] len <length>`**

```haproxy
declare capture [ request | response ] len <length>
```

Declares a capture slot.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend no \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments:

```text
<length> is the length allowed for the capture.
```

This declaration is only available in the frontend or listen section, but the reserved slot can be
used in the backends. The "request" keyword allocates a capture slot for use in the request, and
"response" allocates a capture slot for use in the response.

See also: "capture-req", "capture-res" (sample converters), "capture.req.hdr", "capture.res.hdr"
(sample fetches), "http-request capture" and "http-response capture".

<a id="entry-4-2-default-server"></a>

**`default-server [param*]`**

```haproxy
default-server [param*]
```

Change default options for a server in a backend

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<param*>  is a list of parameters for this server. The "default-server"
          keyword accepts an important number of options and has a complete
          section dedicated to it. Please refer to section 5 for more
          details.
```

Example:

```text
default-server inter 1000 weight 13
```

See also: "server" and [section 5](/docs/haproxy/bind-and-server-options/) about server options

<a id="entry-4-2-default-backend"></a>

**`default_backend <backend>`**

```haproxy
default_backend <backend>
```

Specify the backend to use when no "use_backend" rule has been matched.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments:

```text
<backend> is the name of the backend to use.
```

When doing content-switching between frontend and backends using the "use_backend" keyword, it is
often useful to indicate which backend will be used when no rule has matched. It generally is the
dynamic backend which will catch all undetermined requests.

If a backend is disabled or unpublished, default_backend rules targeting it will be ignored and
stream processing will remain on the original proxy.

Example:

```text
use_backend     dynamic  if  url_dyn
use_backend     static   if  url_css url_img extension_img
default_backend dynamic
```

See also: "use_backend"

<a id="entry-4-2-description"></a>

**`description <string>`**

```haproxy
description <string>
```

Describe a listen, frontend or backend.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend no \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments: string

Allows to add a sentence to describe the related object in the HAProxy HTML stats page. The
description will be printed on the right of the object name it describes. No need to backslash
spaces in the `<string>` arguments.

<a id="entry-4-2-disabled"></a>

**`disabled`**

```haproxy
disabled
```

Disable a proxy, frontend or backend.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

The "disabled" keyword is used to disable an instance, mainly in order to liberate a listening port
or to temporarily disable a service. The instance will still be created and its configuration will
be checked, but it will be created in the "stopped" state and will appear as such in the statistics.
It will not receive any traffic nor will it send any health-checks or logs. It is possible to
disable many instances at once by adding the "disabled" keyword in a "defaults" section.

By default, a disabled backend cannot be selected for content-switching. However, a portion of the
traffic can ignore this when "force-be-switch" is used.

See also: "enabled", "force-be-switch"

<a id="entry-4-2-dispatch"></a>

**`dispatch <address>:<port>   (deprecated)`**

```haproxy
dispatch <address>:<port>   (deprecated)
```

Set a default server address

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend no \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<address> is the IPv4 address of the default server. Alternatively, a
          resolvable hostname is supported, but this name will be resolved
          during start-up.

<ports>   is a mandatory port specification. All connections will be sent
          to this port, and it is not permitted to use port offsets as is
          possible with normal servers.
```

The "dispatch" keyword designates a default server for use when no other server can take the
connection. In the past it was used to forward non persistent connections to an auxiliary load
balancer. Due to its simple syntax, it has also been used for simple TCP relays. It is recommended
not to use it for more clarity, and to use the "server" directive instead.

This keyword has been deprecated in 3.3 and will be removed in 3.5 due to some internal limitations
(no support for SSL nor idle connections etc). Using it will emit a warning that may be silenced by
enabling directive "expose-deprecated-directives" in the global section.

The correct way to proceed without this directive is to simply declare a server with the same
address and port. If the "dispatch" directive was mixed with other servers, then these servers
should be configured with a weight of zero in order never to be elected by the load balancing
algorithm.

Example:

```text
backend deprecated_setup
    dispatch 192.168.100.100:80 # external load balancer's address
    server s1 192.168.100.1:80 cookie S1 check
    server s2 192.168.100.2:80 cookie S2 check

backend modern_setup
    server external_lb 192.168.100.100:80
    server s1 192.168.100.1:80 cookie S1 check weight 0
    server s2 192.168.100.2:80 cookie S2 check weight 0
```

See also: "server"

<a id="entry-4-2-dynamic-cookie-key"></a>

**`dynamic-cookie-key <string>`**

```haproxy
dynamic-cookie-key <string>
```

Set the dynamic cookie secret key for a backend.

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments: The secret key to be used.

When dynamic cookies are enabled (see the "dynamic" directive for cookie), a dynamic cookie is
created for each server (unless one is explicitly specified on the "server" line), using a hash of
the IP address of the server, the TCP port, and the secret key. That way, we can ensure session
persistence across multiple load-balancers, even if servers are dynamically added or removed.

<a id="entry-4-2-enabled"></a>

**`enabled`**

```haproxy
enabled
```

Enable a proxy, frontend or backend.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

The "enabled" keyword is used to explicitly enable an instance, when the defaults has been set to
"disabled". This is very rarely used.

See also: "disabled"

<a id="entry-4-2-errorfile"></a>

**`errorfile <code> <file>`**

```haproxy
errorfile <code> <file>
```

Return a file contents instead of errors generated by HAProxy

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<code>    is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
          generating codes 200, 400, 401, 403, 404, 405, 407, 408, 410,
          413, 414, 425, 429, 431, 500, 501, 502, 503, and 504.

<file>    designates a file containing the full HTTP response. It is
          recommended to follow the common practice of appending ".http" to
          the filename so that people do not confuse the response with HTML
          error pages, and to use absolute paths, since files are read
          before any chroot is performed.
```

It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite errors returned by the
server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy. This is why the list of supported errors is
limited to a small set.

Code 200 is emitted in response to requests matching a "monitor-uri" rule.

The files are parsed when HAProxy starts and must be valid according to the HTTP specification. They
should not exceed the configured buffer size (BUFSIZE), which generally is 16 kB, otherwise an
internal error will be returned. It is also wise not to put any reference to local contents (e.g.
images) in order to avoid loops between the client and HAProxy when all servers are down, causing an
error to be returned instead of an image. Finally, The response cannot exceed (tune.bufsize -
tune.maxrewrite) so that "http-after-response" rules still have room to operate (see
"tune.maxrewrite").

The files are read at the same time as the configuration and kept in memory. For this reason, the
errors continue to be returned even when the process is chrooted, and no file change is considered
while the process is running. A simple method for developing those files consists in associating
them to the 403 status code and interrogating a blocked URL.

See also: "http-error", "errorloc", "errorloc302", "errorloc303"

Example:

```text
errorfile 400 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/400badreq.http
errorfile 408 /dev/null  # work around Chrome pre-connect bug
errorfile 403 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/403forbid.http
errorfile 503 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/503sorry.http

```

<a id="entry-4-2-errorfiles"></a>

**`errorfiles <name> [<code> ...]`**

```haproxy
errorfiles <name> [<code> ...]
```

Import, fully or partially, the error files defined in the `<name>` http-errors section.

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<name>  is the name of an existing http-errors section.

<code>  is a HTTP status code. Several status code may be listed.
        Currently, HAProxy is capable of generating codes 200, 400, 401,
        403, 404, 405, 407, 408, 410, 413, 414, 425, 429, 431, 500, 501,
        502, 503, and 504.
```

Errors defined in the http-errors section with the name `<name>` are imported in the current proxy.
If no status code is specified, all error files of the http-errors section are imported. Otherwise,
only error files associated to the listed status code are imported. Those error files override the
already defined custom errors for the proxy. And they may be overridden by following ones.
Functionally, it is exactly the same as declaring all error files by hand using "errorfile"
directives.

See also: "http-error", "errorfile", "errorloc", "errorloc302" , "errorloc303" and [section 12.4](/docs/haproxy/other-sections/#section-12-4)
about http-errors.

Example:

```text
errorfiles generic
errorfiles site-1 403 404

```

<a id="entry-4-2-errorloc"></a>

**`errorloc <code> <url>`**

```haproxy
errorloc <code> <url>
errorloc302 <code> <url>
```

Return an HTTP redirection to a URL instead of errors generated by HAProxy

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<code>    is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
          generating codes 200, 400, 401, 403, 404, 405, 407, 408, 410,
          413, 414, 425, 429, 431, 500, 501, 502, 503, and 504.

<url>     it is the exact contents of the "Location" header. It may contain
          either a relative URI to an error page hosted on the same site,
          or an absolute URI designating an error page on another site.
          Special care should be given to relative URIs to avoid redirect
          loops if the URI itself may generate the same error (e.g. 500).
```

It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite errors returned by the
server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy. This is why the list of supported errors is
limited to a small set.

Code 200 is emitted in response to requests matching a "monitor-uri" rule.

Note that both keyword return the HTTP 302 status code, which tells the client to fetch the
designated URL using the same HTTP method. This can be quite problematic in case of non-GET methods
such as POST, because the URL sent to the client might not be allowed for something other than GET.
To work around this problem, please use "errorloc303" which send the HTTP 303 status code,
indicating to the client that the URL must be fetched with a GET request.

See also: "http-error", "errorfile", "errorloc303"

<a id="entry-4-2-errorloc303"></a>

**`errorloc303 <code> <url>`**

```haproxy
errorloc303 <code> <url>
```

Return an HTTP redirection to a URL instead of errors generated by HAProxy

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<code>    is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
          generating codes 200, 400, 401, 403, 404, 405, 407, 408, 410,
          413, 414, 425, 429, 431, 500, 501, 502, 503, and 504.

<url>     it is the exact contents of the "Location" header. It may contain
          either a relative URI to an error page hosted on the same site,
          or an absolute URI designating an error page on another site.
          Special care should be given to relative URIs to avoid redirect
          loops if the URI itself may generate the same error (e.g. 500).
```

It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite errors returned by the
server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy. This is why the list of supported errors is
limited to a small set.

Code 200 is emitted in response to requests matching a "monitor-uri" rule.

Note that both keyword return the HTTP 303 status code, which tells the client to fetch the
designated URL using the same HTTP GET method. This solves the usual problems associated with
"errorloc" and the 302 code. It is possible that some very old browsers designed before HTTP/1.1 do
not support it, but no such problem has been reported till now.

See also: "http-error", "errorfile", "errorloc", "errorloc302"

<a id="entry-4-2-email-alert-from"></a>

**`email-alert from <emailaddr>`**

```haproxy
email-alert from <emailaddr>
```

Declare the from email address to be used in both the envelope and header of email alerts. This is
the address that email alerts are sent from.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<emailaddr> is the from email address to use when sending email alerts
```

Also requires "email-alert mailers" and "email-alert to" to be set and if so sending email alerts is
enabled for the proxy.

See also: "email-alert level", "email-alert mailers", "email-alert myhostname", "email-alert to",
[section 12.3](/docs/haproxy/other-sections/#section-12-3) about mailers.

<a id="entry-4-2-email-alert-level"></a>

**`email-alert level <level>`**

```haproxy
email-alert level <level>
```

Declare the maximum log level of messages for which email alerts will be sent. This acts as a filter
on the sending of email alerts.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<level> One of the 8 syslog levels:
          emerg alert crit err warning notice info  debug
        The above syslog levels are ordered from lowest to highest.
```

By default level is alert

Also requires "email-alert from", "email-alert mailers" and "email-alert to" to be set and if so
sending email alerts is enabled for the proxy.

Alerts are sent when:

- An un-paused server is marked as down and `<level>` is alert or lower
- A paused server is marked as down and `<level>` is notice or lower
- A server is marked as up or enters the drain state and `<level>` is notice or lower
- "option log-health-checks" is enabled, `<level>` is info or lower, and a health check status
  update occurs

See also: "email-alert from", "email-alert mailers", "email-alert myhostname", "email-alert to",
[section 12.3](/docs/haproxy/other-sections/#section-12-3) about mailers.

<a id="entry-4-2-email-alert-mailers"></a>

**`email-alert mailers <mailersect>`**

```haproxy
email-alert mailers <mailersect>
```

Declare the mailers to be used when sending email alerts

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<mailersect> is the name of the mailers section to send email alerts.
```

Also requires "email-alert from" and "email-alert to" to be set and if so sending email alerts is
enabled for the proxy.

See also: "email-alert from", "email-alert level", "email-alert myhostname", "email-alert to",
[section 12.3](/docs/haproxy/other-sections/#section-12-3) about mailers.

<a id="entry-4-2-email-alert-myhostname"></a>

**`email-alert myhostname <hostname>`**

```haproxy
email-alert myhostname <hostname>
```

Declare the to hostname address to be used when communicating with mailers.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<hostname> is the hostname to use when communicating with mailers
```

By default the systems hostname is used.

Also requires "email-alert from", "email-alert mailers" and "email-alert to" to be set and if so
sending email alerts is enabled for the proxy.

See also: "email-alert from", "email-alert level", "email-alert mailers", "email-alert to", [section
12.3](/docs/haproxy/other-sections/#section-12-3) about mailers.

<a id="entry-4-2-email-alert-to"></a>

**`email-alert to <emailaddr>`**

```haproxy
email-alert to <emailaddr>
```

Declare both the recipient address in the envelope and to address in the header of email alerts.
This is the address that email alerts are sent to.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<emailaddr> is the to email address to use when sending email alerts
```

Also requires "email-alert mailers" and "email-alert to" to be set and if so sending email alerts is
enabled for the proxy.

See also: "email-alert from", "email-alert level", "email-alert mailers", "email-alert myhostname",
[section 12.3](/docs/haproxy/other-sections/#section-12-3) about mailers.

<a id="entry-4-2-error-log-format"></a>

**`error-log-format <fmt>`**

```haproxy
error-log-format <fmt>
```

Specifies the log format string to use in case of connection error on the frontend side.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

This directive specifies the log format string that will be used for logs containing information
related to errors, timeouts, retries redispatches or HTTP status code 5xx. This format will in short
be used for every log line that would be concerned by the "log-separate-errors" option, including
connection errors described in [section 8.2.5](/docs/haproxy/configuration-logging/#section-8-2-5).

If the directive is used in a defaults section, all subsequent frontends will use the same log
format. Please see [section 8.2.6](/docs/haproxy/configuration-logging/#section-8-2-6) which covers the custom log format string in depth.

"error-log-format" directive overrides previous "error-log-format" directives.

<a id="entry-4-2-force-persist"></a>

**`force-persist { if | unless } <condition>`**

```haproxy
force-persist { if | unless } <condition>
```

Declare a condition to force persistence on down servers

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend no \| no \| yes \| yes

By default, requests are not dispatched to down servers. It is possible to force this using "option
persist", but it is unconditional and redispatches to a valid server if "option redispatch" is set.
That leaves with very little possibilities to force some requests to reach a server which is
artificially marked down for maintenance operations.

The "force-persist" statement allows one to declare various ACL-based conditions which, when met,
will cause a request to ignore the down status of a server and still try to connect to it. That
makes it possible to start a server, still replying an error to the health checks, and run a
specially configured browser to test the service. Among the handy methods, one could use a specific
source IP address, or a specific cookie. The cookie also has the advantage that it can easily be
added/removed on the browser from a test page. Once the service is validated, it is then possible to
open the service to the world by returning a valid response to health checks.

The forced persistence is enabled when an "if" condition is met, or unless an "unless" condition is
met. The final redispatch is always disabled when this is used.

See also: "option redispatch", "ignore-persist", "persist", and [section 7](/docs/haproxy/acls-and-samples/) about ACL usage.

<a id="entry-4-2-external-check-command"></a>

**`external-check command <command>`**

```haproxy
external-check command <command>
```

Executable to run when performing an external-check

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<command> is the external command to run
```

The arguments passed to the command are:

`<proxy_address>` `<proxy_port>` `<server_address>` `<server_port>`

The `<proxy_address>` and `<proxy_port>` are derived from the first listener that is either IPv4,
IPv6 or a UNIX socket. In the case of a UNIX socket listener the proxy_address will be the path of
the socket and the `<proxy_port>` will be the string "NOT_USED". In a backend section, it's not
possible to determine a listener, and both `<proxy_address>` and `<proxy_port>` will have the string
value "NOT_USED".

Some values are also provided through environment variables.

Environment variables:

```text
HAPROXY_PROXY_ADDR      The first bind address if available (or empty if not
                        applicable, for example in a "backend" section).

HAPROXY_PROXY_ID        The backend id.

HAPROXY_PROXY_NAME      The backend name.

HAPROXY_PROXY_PORT      The first bind port if available (or empty if not
                        applicable, for example in a "backend" section or
                        for a UNIX socket).

HAPROXY_SERVER_ADDR     The server address.

HAPROXY_SERVER_CURCONN  The current number of connections on the server.

HAPROXY_SERVER_ID       The server id.

HAPROXY_SERVER_MAXCONN  The server max connections.

HAPROXY_SERVER_NAME     The server name.

HAPROXY_SERVER_PORT     The server port if available (or empty for a UNIX
                        socket).

HAPROXY_SERVER_SSL      "0" when SSL is not used, "1" when it is used

HAPROXY_SERVER_PROTO    The protocol used by this server, which can be one
                        of "cli" (the haproxy CLI), "syslog" (syslog TCP
                        server), "peers" (peers TCP server), "h1" (HTTP/1.x
                        server), "h2" (HTTP/2 server), or "tcp" (any other
                        TCP server).

PATH                    The PATH environment variable used when executing
                        the command may be set using "external-check path".
```

If the command executed and exits with a zero status then the check is considered to have passed,
otherwise the check is considered to have failed.

Example:

```text
external-check command /bin/true
```

See also: "external-check", "option external-check", "external-check path"

<a id="entry-4-2-external-check-path"></a>

**`external-check path <path>`**

```haproxy
external-check path <path>
```

The value of the PATH environment variable used when running an external-check

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<path> is the path used when executing external command to run
```

The default path is "".

Example:

```text
external-check path "/usr/bin:/bin"
```

See also: "external-check", "option external-check", "external-check command"

<a id="entry-4-2-force-be-switch"></a>

**`force-be-switch { if | unless } <condition>`**

```haproxy
force-be-switch { if | unless } <condition>
```

Allow content switching to select a backend instance even if it is disabled or unpublished. This
rule can be used by admins to test traffic to services prior to expose them to the outside world.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend no \| yes \| yes \| no

See also: "be-unpublished", "disabled"

<a id="entry-4-2-filter"></a>

**`filter <name> [param*]`**

```haproxy
filter <name> [param*]
```

Add the filter `<name>` in the filter list attached to the proxy.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend no \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<name>     is the name of the filter. Officially supported filters are
           referenced in section 9.

<param*>   is a list of parameters accepted by the filter <name>. The
           parsing of these parameters are the responsibility of the
           filter. Please refer to the documentation of the corresponding
           filter (section 9) for all details on the supported parameters.
```

Multiple occurrences of the filter line can be used for the same proxy. The same filter can be
referenced many times if needed.

Example:

```text
listen
  bind *:80

  filter trace name BEFORE-HTTP-COMP
  filter compression
  filter trace name AFTER-HTTP-COMP

  compression algo gzip
  compression offload

  server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
```

See also: [section 9](/docs/haproxy/filters/)., "filter-sequence"

filter-sequence { request \| response } `<filter_list>`

Specifies in which order filters declared on the proxy should be executed.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend no \| yes \| yes \| yes

Comma-separated list of filter names (`<filter_list>`) to specify in which order filters declared on
the proxy should be executed, for request or response path, respectively.

When filter-sequence is not specified for a given path (ie: request vs response), the order in which
filters are declared on the proxy is used.

If filter-sequence omits some filters that were declared on the proxy, they will not be executed.
This is an effective way of temporarily disabling a filter without removing it from the
configuration.

Example:

```text
global
   lua-load my-filter.lua # defines custom "lua.my-filter"
frontend myfront
   filter comp-req
   filter comp-res
   filter lua.my-filter

   filter-sequence request lua.my-filter,comp-req
   filter-sequence response lua.my-filter,comp-res
```

See also: "filter"

<a id="entry-4-2-fullconn"></a>

**`fullconn <conns>`**

```haproxy
fullconn <conns>
```

Specify at what backend load the servers will reach their maxconn

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<conns>   is the number of connections on the backend which will make the
          servers use the maximal number of connections.
```

When a server has a "maxconn" parameter specified, it means that its number of concurrent
connections will never go higher. Additionally, if it has a "minconn" parameter, it indicates a
dynamic limit following the backend's load. The server will then always accept at least `<minconn>`
connections, never more than `<maxconn>`, and the limit will be on the ramp between both values when
the backend has less than `<conns>` concurrent connections. This makes it possible to limit the load
on the servers during normal loads, but push it further for important loads without overloading the
servers during exceptional loads.

Since it's hard to get this value right, HAProxy automatically sets it to 10% of the sum of the
maxconns of all frontends that may branch to this backend (based on "use_backend" and
"default_backend" rules). That way it's safe to leave it unset. However, "use_backend" involving
dynamic names are not counted since there is no way to know if they could match or not.

Example:

```shell
# The servers will accept between 100 and 1000 concurrent connections each
# and the maximum of 1000 will be reached when the backend reaches 10000
# connections.
backend dynamic
   fullconn   10000
   server     srv1   dyn1:80 minconn 100 maxconn 1000
   server     srv2   dyn2:80 minconn 100 maxconn 1000
```

See also: "maxconn", "server"

<a id="entry-4-2-guid"></a>

**`guid <string>`**

```haproxy
guid <string>
```

Specify a case-sensitive global unique ID for this proxy.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend no \| yes \| yes \| yes

`<string>` must be unique across all haproxy configuration on every object types. Format is left
unspecified to allow the user to select its naming policy. The only restriction is its length which
cannot be greater than 127 characters. All alphanumerical values and '.', ':', '-' and '\_'
characters are valid. See also "shm-stats-file".

<a id="entry-4-2-hash-balance-factor"></a>

**`hash-balance-factor <factor>`**

```haproxy
hash-balance-factor <factor>
```

Specify the balancing factor for bounded-load consistent hashing

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| no \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<factor> is the control for the maximum number of concurrent requests to
         send to a server, expressed as a percentage of the average number
         of concurrent requests across all of the active servers.
```

Specifying a "hash-balance-factor" for a server with "hash-type consistent" enables an algorithm
that prevents any one server from getting too many requests at once, even if some hash buckets
receive many more requests than others. Setting `<factor>` to 0 (the default) disables the feature.
Otherwise, `<factor>` is a percentage greater than 100. For example, if `<factor>` is 150, then no
server will be allowed to have a load more than 1.5 times the average. If server weights are used,
they will be respected.

If the first-choice server is disqualified, the algorithm will choose another server based on the
request hash, until a server with additional capacity is found. A higher `<factor>` allows more
imbalance between the servers, while a lower `<factor>` means that more servers will be checked on
average, affecting performance. Reasonable values are from 125 to 200.

This setting is also used by "balance random" which internally relies on the consistent hashing
mechanism.

See also: "balance" and "hash-type".

<a id="entry-4-2-hash-preserve-affinity"></a>

**`hash-preserve-affinity { always | maxconn | maxqueue }`**

```haproxy
hash-preserve-affinity { always | maxconn | maxqueue }
```

Specify a method for assigning streams to servers with hash load balancing when servers are satured
or have a full queue.

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

The following values can be specified:

    - "always"  : this is the default strategy. A stream is assigned to a
                   server based on hashing irrespective of whether the server
                   is currently saturated.

    - "maxconn" : when selected, servers that have "maxconn" set and are
                   currently saturated will be skipped. Another server will be
                   picked by following the hashing ring. This has no effect on
                   servers that do not set "maxconn". If all servers are
                   saturated, the request is enqueued to the last server in the
                   hash ring before the initially selected server.

    - "maxqueue": when selected, servers that have "maxconn" set, "maxqueue"
                   set to a non-zero value (limited queue size) and currently
                   have a full queue will be skipped. Another server will be
                   picked by following the hashing ring. This has no effect on
                   servers that do not set both "maxconn" and "maxqueue".

See also: "maxconn", "maxqueue", "hash-balance-factor"

<a id="entry-4-2-hash-type"></a>

**`hash-type <method> <function> <modifier>`**

```haproxy
hash-type <method> <function> <modifier>
```

Specify a method to use for mapping hashes to servers

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<method> is the method used to select a server from the hash computed by
         the <function>:

  map-based   the hash table is a static array containing all alive servers.
              The hashes will be very smooth, will consider weights, but
              will be static in that weight changes while a server is up
              will be ignored. This means that there will be no slow start.
              Also, since a server is selected by its position in the array,
              most mappings are changed when the server count changes. This
              means that when a server goes up or down, or when a server is
              added to a farm, most connections will be redistributed to
              different servers. This can be inconvenient with caches for
              instance.

  consistent  the hash table is a tree filled with many occurrences of each
              server. The hash key is looked up in the tree and the closest
              server is chosen. This hash is dynamic, it supports changing
              weights while the servers are up, so it is compatible with the
              slow start feature. It has the advantage that when a server
              goes up or down, only its associations are moved. When a
              server is added to the farm, only a few part of the mappings
              are redistributed, making it an ideal method for caches.
              However, due to its principle, the distribution will never be
              very smooth and it may sometimes be necessary to adjust a
              server's weight or its ID to get a more balanced distribution.
              In order to get the same distribution on multiple load
              balancers, it is important that all servers have the exact
              same IDs. Note: consistent hash uses sdbm and avalanche if no
              hash function is specified.

<function> is the hash function to be used:

   sdbm   this function was created initially for sdbm (a public-domain
          reimplementation of ndbm) database library. It was found to do
          well in scrambling bits, causing better distribution of the keys
          and fewer splits. It also happens to be a good general hashing
          function with good distribution, unless the total server weight
          is a multiple of 64, in which case applying the avalanche
          modifier may help.

   djb2   this function was first proposed by Dan Bernstein many years ago
          on comp.lang.c. Studies have shown that for certain workload this
          function provides a better distribution than sdbm. It generally
          works well with text-based inputs though it can perform extremely
          poorly with numeric-only input or when the total server weight is
          a multiple of 33, unless the avalanche modifier is also used.

   wt6    this function was designed for HAProxy while testing other
          functions in the past. It is not as smooth as the other ones, but
          is much less sensible to the input data set or to the number of
          servers. It can make sense as an alternative to sdbm+avalanche or
          djb2+avalanche for consistent hashing or when hashing on numeric
          data such as a source IP address or a visitor identifier in a URL
          parameter.

   crc32  this is the most common CRC32 implementation as used in Ethernet,
          gzip, PNG, etc. It is slower than the other ones but may provide
          a better distribution or less predictable results especially when
          used on strings.

   none   don't hash the key, the key will be used as a hash, this can be
          useful to manually hash the key using a converter for that purpose
          and let haproxy use the result directly. The operation will
          convert the key to a string if it is not already, and parse it as
          an integer whose value will be used as the key. Some input key
          types might not be relevant here (e.g. IP addresses).

<modifier> indicates an optional method applied after hashing the key:

   avalanche   This directive indicates that the result from the hash
               function above should not be used in its raw form but that
               a 4-byte full avalanche hash must be applied first. The
               purpose of this step is to mix the resulting bits from the
               previous hash in order to avoid any undesired effect when
               the input contains some limited values or when the number of
               servers is a multiple of one of the hash's components (64
               for SDBM, 33 for DJB2). Enabling avalanche tends to make the
               result less predictable, but it's also not as smooth as when
               using the original function. Some testing might be needed
               with some workloads. This hash is one of the many proposed
               by Bob Jenkins.
```

The default hash type is "map-based" and is recommended for most usages. The default function is
"sdbm", the selection of a function should be based on the range of the values being hashed.

See also: "balance", "hash-balance-factor", "hash-preserve-affinity", "server"

<a id="entry-4-2-http-after-response"></a>

**`http-after-response <action> <options...> [ { if | unless } <condition> ]`**

```haproxy
http-after-response <action> <options...> [ { if | unless } <condition> ]
```

Access control for all Layer 7 responses (server, applet/service and internal ones).

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes(!) \| yes \| yes \| yes

The http-after-response statement defines a set of rules which apply to layer 7 processing. The
rules are evaluated in their declaration order when they are met in a frontend, listen or backend
section. Since these rules apply on responses, the backend rules are applied first, followed by the
frontend's rules. Any rule may optionally be followed by an ACL-based condition, in which case it
will only be evaluated if the condition evaluates true.

Unlike http-response rules, these ones are applied on all responses, the server ones but also to all
responses generated by HAProxy. These rules are evaluated at the end of the responses analysis,
before the data forwarding phase.

The condition is evaluated just before the action is executed, and the action is performed exactly
once. As such, there is no problem if an action changes an element which is checked as part of the
condition. This also means that multiple actions may rely on the same condition so that the first
action that changes the condition's evaluation is sufficient to implicitly disable the remaining
actions. This is used for example when trying to assign a value to a variable from various sources
when it's empty. There is no limit to the number of "http-after-response" statements per instance.

The first keyword after "http-after-response" in the syntax is the rule's action, optionally
followed by a varying number of arguments for the action. The supported actions and their respective
syntaxes are enumerated in [section 4.3](/docs/haproxy/proxies/#section-4-3) "Actions" (look for actions which tick "HTTP Aft").

This directive is only available from named defaults sections, not anonymous ones. Rules defined in
the defaults section are evaluated before ones in the associated proxy section. To avoid
ambiguities, in this case the same defaults section cannot be used by proxies with the frontend
capability and by proxies with the backend capability. It means a listen section cannot use a
defaults section defining such rules.

Note: Errors emitted in early stage of the request parsing are handled by the multiplexer at a lower
level, before any http analysis. Thus no http-after-response ruleset is evaluated on these errors.

Example:

```text
http-after-response set-header Strict-Transport-Security "max-age=31536000"
http-after-response set-header Cache-Control "no-store,no-cache,private"
http-after-response set-header Pragma "no-cache"

```

<a id="entry-4-2-http-check-comment"></a>

**`http-check comment <string>`**

```haproxy
http-check comment <string>
```

Defines a comment for the following the http-check rule, reported in logs if it fails.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<string>  is the comment message to add in logs if the following http-check
          rule fails.
```

It only works for connect, send and expect rules. It is useful to make user-friendly error
reporting.

See also: "option httpchk", "http-check connect", "http-check send" and "http-check expect".

<a id="entry-4-2-http-check-connect"></a>

**`http-check connect [default] [port <expr>] [addr <ip>] [send-proxy]`**

```haproxy
http-check connect [default] [port <expr>] [addr <ip>] [send-proxy]
                   [via-socks4] [ssl] [sni <sni>] [alpn <alpn>] [linger]
                   [proto <name>] [comment <msg>]
```

Opens a new connection to perform an HTTP health check

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
comment <msg>  defines a message to report if the rule evaluation fails.

default      Use default options of the server line to do the health
             checks. The server options are used only if not redefined.

port <expr>  if not set, check port or server port is used.
             It tells HAProxy where to open the connection to.
             <port> must be a valid TCP port source integer, from 1 to
             65535 or an sample-fetch expression.

addr <ip>    defines the IP address to do the health check.

send-proxy   send a PROXY protocol string

via-socks4   enables outgoing health checks using upstream socks4 proxy.

ssl          opens a ciphered connection

sni <sni>    specifies the SNI to use to do health checks over SSL.

alpn <alpn>  defines which protocols to advertise with ALPN. The protocol
             list consists in a comma-delimited list of protocol names,
             for instance: "h2,http/1.1". If it is not set, the server ALPN
             is used.

proto <name> forces the multiplexer's protocol to use for this connection.
             It must be an HTTP mux protocol and it must be usable on the
             backend side. The list of available protocols is reported in
             haproxy -vv.

linger       cleanly close the connection instead of using a single RST.
```

Just like tcp-check health checks, it is possible to configure the connection to use to perform HTTP
health check. This directive should also be used to describe a scenario involving several
request/response exchanges, possibly on different ports or with different servers.

When there are no TCP port configured on the server line neither server port directive, then the
first step of the http-check sequence must be to specify the port with a "http-check connect".

In an http-check ruleset a 'connect' is required, it is also mandatory to start the ruleset with a
'connect' rule. Purpose is to ensure admin know what they do.

When a connect must start the ruleset, if may still be preceded by set-var, unset-var or comment
rules.

Examples:

```shell
# check HTTP and HTTPs services on a server.
# first open port 80 thanks to server line port directive, then
# tcp-check opens port 443, ciphered and run a request on it:
option httpchk

http-check connect
http-check send meth GET uri / ver HTTP/1.1 hdr host haproxy.1wt.eu
http-check expect status 200-399
http-check connect port 443 ssl sni haproxy.1wt.eu
http-check send meth GET uri / ver HTTP/1.1 hdr host haproxy.1wt.eu
http-check expect status 200-399

server www 10.0.0.1 check port 80
```

See also: "option httpchk", "http-check send", "http-check expect"

<a id="entry-4-2-http-check-disable-on-404"></a>

**`http-check disable-on-404`**

```haproxy
http-check disable-on-404
```

Enable a maintenance mode upon HTTP/404 response to health-checks

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

When this option is set, a server which returns an HTTP code 404 will be excluded from further
load-balancing, but will still receive persistent connections. This provides a very convenient
method for Web administrators to perform a graceful shutdown of their servers. It is also important
to note that a server which is detected as failed while it was in this mode will not generate an
alert, just a notice. If the server responds 2xx or 3xx again, it will immediately be reinserted
into the farm. The status on the stats page reports "NOLB" for a server in this mode. It is
important to note that this option only works in conjunction with the "httpchk" option. If this
option is used with "http-check expect", then it has precedence over it so that 404 responses will
still be considered as soft-stop. Note also that a stopped server will stay stopped even if it
replies 404s. This option is only evaluated for running servers.

See also: "option httpchk" and "http-check expect".

<a id="entry-4-2-http-check-expect"></a>

**`http-check expect [min-recv <int>] [comment <msg>]`**

```haproxy
http-check expect [min-recv <int>] [comment <msg>]
                  [ok-status <st>] [error-status <st>] [tout-status <st>]
                  [on-success <fmt>] [on-error <fmt>] [status-code <expr>]
                  [!] <match> <pattern>
```

Make HTTP health checks consider response contents or specific status codes

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
comment <msg>  defines a message to report if the rule evaluation fails.

min-recv  is optional and can define the minimum amount of data required to
          evaluate the current expect rule. If the number of received bytes
          is under this limit, the check will wait for more data. This
          option can be used to resolve some ambiguous matching rules or to
          avoid executing costly regex matches on content known to be still
          incomplete. If an exact string is used, the minimum between the
          string length and this parameter is used. This parameter is
          ignored if it is set to -1. If the expect rule does not match,
          the check will wait for more data. If set to 0, the evaluation
          result is always conclusive.

ok-status <st>     is optional and can be used to set the check status if
                   the expect rule is successfully evaluated and if it is
                   the last rule in the tcp-check ruleset. "L7OK", "L7OKC",
                   "L6OK" and "L4OK" are supported:
                     - L7OK : check passed on layer 7
                     - L7OKC: check conditionally passed on layer 7, set
                               server to NOLB state.
                     - L6OK : check passed on layer 6
                     - L4OK : check passed on layer 4
                   By default "L7OK" is used.

error-status <st>  is optional and can be used to set the check status if
                   an error occurred during the expect rule evaluation.
                   "L7OKC", "L7RSP", "L7STS", "L6RSP" and "L4CON" are
                   supported:
                     - L7OKC: check conditionally passed on layer 7, set
                               server to NOLB state.
                     - L7RSP: layer 7 invalid response - protocol error
                     - L7STS: layer 7 response error, for example HTTP 5xx
                     - L6RSP: layer 6 invalid response - protocol error
                     - L4CON: layer 1-4 connection problem
                   By default "L7RSP" is used.

tout-status <st>   is optional and can be used to set the check status if
                   a timeout occurred during the expect rule evaluation.
                   "L7TOUT", "L6TOUT", and "L4TOUT" are supported:
                     - L7TOUT: layer 7 (HTTP/SMTP) timeout
                     - L6TOUT: layer 6 (SSL) timeout
                     - L4TOUT: layer 1-4 timeout
                   By default "L7TOUT" is used.

on-success <fmt>   is optional and can be used to customize the
                   informational message reported in logs if the expect
                   rule is successfully evaluated and if it is the last rule
                   in the tcp-check ruleset. <fmt> is a Custom log format
                   string (see section 8.2.6).

on-error <fmt>     is optional and can be used to customize the
                   informational message reported in logs if an error
                   occurred during the expect rule evaluation. <fmt> is a
                   Custom log format string (see section 8.2.6).

status-code <expr> is optional and can be used to set the check status code
                   reported in logs, on success or on error. <expr> is a
                   standard HAProxy expression formed by a sample-fetch
                   followed by some converters.

<match>   is a keyword indicating how to look for a specific pattern in the
          response. The keyword may be one of "status", "rstatus", "hdr",
          "fhdr", "string", or "rstring". The keyword may be preceded by an
          exclamation mark ("!") to negate the match. Spaces are allowed
          between the exclamation mark and the keyword. See below for more
          details on the supported keywords.

<pattern> is the pattern to look for. It may be a string, a regular
          expression or a more complex pattern with several arguments. If
          the string pattern contains spaces, they must be escaped with the
          usual backslash ('\').
```

By default, "option httpchk" considers that response statuses 2xx and 3xx are valid, and that others
are invalid. When "http-check expect" is used, it defines what is considered valid or invalid. Only
one "http-check" statement is supported in a backend. If a server fails to respond or times out, the
check obviously fails. The available matches are:

```text
status <codes>:  test the status codes found parsing <codes> string. it
                  must be a comma-separated list of status codes or range
                  codes. A health check response will be considered as
                  valid if the response's status code matches any status
                  code or is inside any range of the list. If the "status"
                  keyword is prefixed with "!", then the response will be
                  considered invalid if the status code matches.

rstatus <regex>: test a regular expression for the HTTP status code.
                  A health check response will be considered valid if the
                  response's status code matches the expression. If the
                  "rstatus" keyword is prefixed with "!", then the response
                  will be considered invalid if the status code matches.
                  This is mostly used to check for multiple codes.

hdr  { name | name-lf } [ -m <meth> ] <name>
     [ { value | value-lf } [ -m <meth> ] <value>:
                  test the specified header pattern on the HTTP response
                  headers. The name pattern is mandatory but the value
                  pattern is optional. If not specified, only the header
                  presence is verified. <meth> is the matching method,
                  applied on the header name or the header value. Supported
                  matching methods are "str" (exact match), "beg" (prefix
                  match), "end" (suffix match), "sub" (substring match) or
                  "reg" (regex match). If not specified, exact matching
                  method is used. If the "name-lf" parameter is used,
                  <name> is evaluated as a Custom log format string (see
                  section 8.2.6). If "value-lf" parameter is used, <value>
                  is evaluated as a log-format string. These parameters
                  cannot be used with the regex matching method. Finally,
                  the header value is considered as comma-separated
                  list. Note that matchings are case insensitive on the
                  header names.

fhdr { name | name-lf } [ -m <meth> ] <name>
     [ { value | value-lf } [ -m <meth> ] <value>:
                  test the specified full header pattern on the HTTP
                  response headers. It does exactly the same as the "hdr"
                  keyword, except the full header value is tested, commas
                  are not considered as delimiters.

string <string>: test the exact string match in the HTTP response body.
                  A health check response will be considered valid if the
                  response's body contains this exact string. If the
                  "string" keyword is prefixed with "!", then the response
                  will be considered invalid if the body contains this
                  string. This can be used to look for a mandatory word at
                  the end of a dynamic page, or to detect a failure when a
                  specific error appears on the check page (e.g. a stack
                  trace).

rstring <regex>: test a regular expression on the HTTP response body.
                  A health check response will be considered valid if the
                  response's body matches this expression. If the "rstring"
                  keyword is prefixed with "!", then the response will be
                  considered invalid if the body matches the expression.
                  This can be used to look for a mandatory word at the end
                  of a dynamic page, or to detect a failure when a specific
                  error appears on the check page (e.g. a stack trace).

string-lf <fmt>: test a Custom log format string (see section 8.2.6) match
                  in the HTTP response body. A health check response will
                  be considered valid if the response's body contains the
                  string resulting of the evaluation of <fmt>, which
                  follows the log-format rules. If prefixed with "!", then
                  the response will be considered invalid if the body
                  contains the string.
```

It is important to note that the responses will be limited to a certain size defined by the global
"tune.bufsize" option, which defaults to 16384 bytes. Thus, too large responses may not contain the
mandatory pattern when using "string" or "rstring". If a large response is absolutely required, it
is possible to change the default max size by setting the global variable. However, it is worth
keeping in mind that parsing very large responses can waste some CPU cycles, especially when regular
expressions are used, and that it is always better to focus the checks on smaller resources.

In an http-check ruleset, the last expect rule may be implicit. If no expect rule is specified after
the last "http-check send", an implicit expect rule is defined to match on 2xx or 3xx status codes.
It means this rule is also defined if there is no "http-check" rule at all, when only "option
httpchk" is set.

Last, if "http-check expect" is combined with "http-check disable-on-404", then this last one has
precedence when the server responds with 404.

Examples:

```shell
# only accept status 200 as valid
http-check expect status 200,201,300-310

# be sure a sessid coookie is set
http-check expect hdr name "set-cookie" value -m beg "sessid="

# consider SQL errors as errors
http-check expect ! string SQL\ Error

# consider status 5xx only as errors
http-check expect ! rstatus ^5

# check that we have a correct hexadecimal tag before /html
http-check expect rstring <!--tag:[0-9a-f]*--></html>
```

See also: "option httpchk", "http-check connect", "http-check disable-on-404" and "http-check send".

<a id="entry-4-2-http-check-send"></a>

**`http-check send [meth <method>] [{ uri <uri> | uri-lf <fmt> }>] [ver <version>]`**

```haproxy
http-check send [meth <method>] [{ uri <uri> | uri-lf <fmt> }>] [ver <version>]
                [hdr <name> <fmt>]* [{ body <string> | body-lf <fmt> }]
                [comment <msg>]
```

Add a possible list of headers and/or a body to the request sent during HTTP health checks.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
comment <msg>  defines a message to report if the rule evaluation fails.

meth <method>  is the optional HTTP method used with the requests. When not
               set, the "OPTIONS" method is used, as it generally requires
               low server processing and is easy to filter out from the
               logs. Any method may be used, though it is not recommended
               to invent non-standard ones.

uri <uri>      is optional and set the URI referenced in the HTTP requests
               to the string <uri>. It defaults to "/" which is accessible
               by default on almost any server, but may be changed to any
               other URI. Query strings are permitted.

uri-lf <fmt>   is optional and set the URI referenced in the HTTP requests
               using the Custom log format <fmt> (see section 8.2.6). It
               defaults to "/" which is accessible by default on almost any
               server, but may be changed to any other URI. Query strings
               are permitted.

ver <version>  is the optional HTTP version string. It defaults to
               "HTTP/1.0" but some servers might behave incorrectly in HTTP
               1.0, so turning it to HTTP/1.1 may sometimes help. Note that
               the Host field is mandatory in HTTP/1.1, use "hdr" argument
               to add it.

hdr <name> <fmt>  adds the HTTP header field whose name is specified in
                  <name> and whose value is defined by <fmt>, which follows
                  the Custom log format rules described in section 8.2.6.

body <string>  add the body defined by <string> to the request sent during
               HTTP health checks. If defined, the "Content-Length" header
               is thus automatically added to the request.

body-lf <fmt>  add the body defined by the Custom log format <fmt> (see
               section 8.2.6) to the request sent during HTTP health
               checks. If defined, the "Content-Length" header is thus
               automatically added to the request.
```

In addition to the request line defined by the "option httpchk" directive, this one is the valid way
to add some headers and optionally a body to the request sent during HTTP health checks. If a body
is defined, the associate "Content-Length" header is automatically added. Thus, this header or
"Transfer-encoding" header should not be present in the request provided by "http-check send". If
so, it will be ignored. The old trick consisting to add headers after the version string on the
"option httpchk" line is now deprecated.

Also "http-check send" doesn't support HTTP keep-alive. Keep in mind that it will automatically
append a "Connection: close" header, unless a Connection header has already already been configured
via a hdr entry.

Note that the Host header and the request authority, when both defined, are automatically
synchronized. It means when the HTTP request is sent, when a Host is inserted in the request, the
request authority is accordingly updated. Thus, don't be surprised if the Host header value
overwrites the configured request authority.

Note also for now, no Host header is automatically added in HTTP/1.1 or above requests. You should
add it explicitly.

See also: "option httpchk", "http-check send-state" and "http-check expect".

<a id="entry-4-2-http-check-send-state"></a>

**`http-check send-state`**

```haproxy
http-check send-state
```

Enable emission of a state header with HTTP health checks

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

When this option is set, HAProxy will systematically send a special header "X-Haproxy-Server-State"
with a list of parameters indicating to each server how they are seen by HAProxy. This can be used
for instance when a server is manipulated without access to HAProxy and the operator needs to know
whether HAProxy still sees it up or not, or if the server is the last one in a farm.

The header is composed of fields delimited by semi-colons, the first of which is a word ("UP",
"DOWN", "NOLB"), possibly followed by a number of valid checks on the total number before
transition, just as appears in the stats interface. Next headers are in the form
"`<variable>`=`<value>`", indicating in no specific order some values available in the stats
interface: - a variable "address", containing the address of the backend server. This corresponds to
the `<address>` field in the server declaration. For unix domain sockets, it will read "unix".

    - a variable "port", containing the port of the backend server. This
      corresponds to the `<port>` field in the server declaration. For unix
      domain sockets, it will read "unix".

    - a variable "name", containing the name of the backend followed by a slash
      ("/") then the name of the server. This can be used when a server is
      checked in multiple backends.

    - a variable "node" containing the name of the HAProxy node, as set in the
      global "node" variable, otherwise the system's hostname if unspecified.

    - a variable "weight" indicating the weight of the server, a slash ("/")
      and the total weight of the farm (just counting usable servers). This
      helps to know if other servers are available to handle the load when this
      one fails.

    - a variable "scur" indicating the current number of concurrent connections
      on the server, followed by a slash ("/") then the total number of
      connections on all servers of the same backend.

    - a variable "qcur" indicating the current number of requests in the
      server's queue.

Example of a header received by the application server:

```shell
>>>  X-Haproxy-Server-State: UP 2/3; name=bck/srv2; node=lb1; weight=1/2; \
       scur=13/22; qcur=0
```

See also: "option httpchk", "http-check disable-on-404" and "http-check send".

<a id="entry-4-2-http-check-set-var"></a>

**`http-check set-var(<var-name>[,<cond>...]) <expr>`**

```haproxy
http-check set-var(<var-name>[,<cond>...]) <expr>
http-check set-var-fmt(<var-name>[,<cond>...]) <fmt>
```

This operation sets the content of a variable. The variable is declared inline.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<var-name>   The name of the variable. Only "proc", "sess" and "check"
             scopes can be used. See section 2.8 about variables for details.

 <cond>      A set of conditions that must all be true for the variable to
             actually be set (such as "ifnotempty", "ifgt" ...). See the
             set-var converter's description for a full list of possible
             conditions.

 <expr>      Is a sample-fetch expression potentially followed by converters.

 <fmt>       This is the value expressed using Custom log format (see Custom
             Log Format in section 8.2.6).
```

Examples:

```text
http-check set-var(check.port) int(1234)
http-check set-var-fmt(check.port) "name=%H"

```

<a id="entry-4-2-http-check-unset-var"></a>

**`http-check unset-var(<var-name>)`**

```haproxy
http-check unset-var(<var-name>)
```

Free a reference to a variable within its scope.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<var-name>   The name of the variable. Only "proc", "sess" and "check"
             scopes can be used. See section 2.8 about variables for details.
```

Examples:

```text
http-check unset-var(check.port)

```

<a id="entry-4-2-http-error-status"></a>

**`http-error status <code> [content-type <type>]`**

```haproxy
http-error status <code> [content-type <type>]
           [ { default-errorfiles | errorfile <file> | errorfiles <name> |
```

               file `<file>` | lf-file `<file>` | string `<str>` | lf-string `<fmt>` } ]
           [ hdr `<name>` `<fmt>` ]*

Defines a custom error message to use instead of errors generated by HAProxy.

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
status <code>        is the HTTP status code. It must be specified.
                     Currently, HAProxy is capable of generating codes
                     200, 400, 401, 403, 404, 405, 407, 408, 410, 413,
                     414, 425, 429, 431, 500, 501, 502, 503, and 504.

content-type <type>  is the response content type, for instance
                     "text/plain". This parameter is ignored and should be
                     omitted when an errorfile is configured or when the
                     payload is empty. Otherwise, it must be defined.

default-errorfiles   Reset the previously defined error message for current
                     proxy for the status <code>. If used on a backend, the
                     frontend error message is used, if defined. If used on
                     a frontend, the default error message is used.

errorfile <file>     designates a file containing the full HTTP response.
                     It is recommended to follow the common practice of
                     appending ".http" to the filename so that people do
                     not confuse the response with HTML error pages, and to
                     use absolute paths, since files are read before any
                     chroot is performed.

errorfiles <name>    designates the http-errors section to use to import
                     the error message with the status code <code>. If no
                     such message is found, the proxy's error messages are
                     considered.

file <file>          specifies the file to use as response payload. If the
                     file is not empty, its content-type must be set as
                     argument to "content-type", otherwise, any
                     "content-type" argument is ignored. <file> is
                     considered as a raw string.

string <str>         specifies the raw string to use as response payload.
                     The content-type must always be set as argument to
                     "content-type".

lf-file <file>       specifies the file to use as response payload. If the
                     file is not empty, its content-type must be set as
                     argument to "content-type", otherwise, any
                     "content-type" argument is ignored. <file> is
                     evaluated as a Custom log format (see section 8.2.6).

lf-string <str>      specifies the log-format string to use as response
                     payload. The content-type must always be set as
                     argument to "content-type".

hdr <name> <fmt>     adds to the response the HTTP header field whose name
                     is specified in <name> and whose value is defined by
                     <fmt>, which follows the Custom log format rules (see
                     section 8.2.6). This parameter is ignored if an
                     errorfile is used.
```

This directive may be used instead of "errorfile", to define a custom error message. As "errorfile"
directive, it is used for errors detected and returned by HAProxy. If an errorfile is defined, it is
parsed when HAProxy starts and must be valid according to the HTTP standards. The generated response
must not exceed the configured buffer size (BUFFSIZE), otherwise an internal error will be returned.
Finally, if you consider to use some http-after-response rules to rewrite these errors, the reserved
buffer space should be available (see "tune.maxrewrite").

The files are read at the same time as the configuration and kept in memory. For this reason, the
errors continue to be returned even when the process is chrooted, and no file change is considered
while the process is running.

Note: 400/408/500 errors emitted in early stage of the request parsing are handled by the
multiplexer at a lower level. No custom formatting is supported at this level. Thus only static
error messages, defined with "errorfile" directive, are supported. However, this limitation only
exists during the request headers parsing or between two transactions.

See also: "errorfile", "errorfiles", "errorloc", "errorloc302", "errorloc303" and [section 12.4](/docs/haproxy/other-sections/#section-12-4) about
http-errors.

<a id="entry-4-2-http-request"></a>

**`http-request <action> [options...] [ { if | unless } <condition> ]`**

```haproxy
http-request <action> [options...] [ { if | unless } <condition> ]
```

Access control for Layer 7 requests

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes(!) \| yes \| yes \| yes

The http-request statement defines a set of rules which apply to layer 7 processing. The rules are
evaluated in their declaration order when they are met in a frontend, listen or backend section. Any
rule may optionally be followed by an ACL-based condition, in which case it will only be evaluated
if the condition evaluates to true.

The condition is evaluated just before the action is executed, and the action is performed exactly
once. As such, there is no problem if an action changes an element which is checked as part of the
condition. This also means that multiple actions may rely on the same condition so that the first
action that changes the condition's evaluation is sufficient to implicitly disable the remaining
actions. This is used for example when trying to assign a value to a variable from various sources
when it's empty. There is no limit to the number of "http-request" statements per instance.

The first keyword after "http-request" in the syntax is the rule's action, optionally followed by a
varying number of arguments for the action. The supported actions and their respective syntaxes are
enumerated in [section 4.3](/docs/haproxy/proxies/#section-4-3) "Actions" (look for actions which tick "HTTP Req").

This directive is only available from named defaults sections, not anonymous ones. Rules defined in
the defaults section are evaluated before ones in the associated proxy section. To avoid
ambiguities, in this case the same defaults section cannot be used by proxies with the frontend
capability and by proxies with the backend capability. It means a listen section cannot use a
defaults section defining such rules.

Example:

```text
acl nagios src 192.168.129.3
acl local_net src 192.168.0.0/16
acl auth_ok http_auth(L1)

http-request allow if nagios
http-request allow if local_net auth_ok
http-request auth realm Gimme if local_net auth_ok
http-request deny
```

Example:

```text
acl key req.hdr(X-Add-Acl-Key) -m found
acl add path /addacl
acl del path /delacl

acl myhost hdr(Host) -f myhost.lst

http-request add-acl(myhost.lst) %[req.hdr(X-Add-Acl-Key)] if key add
http-request del-acl(myhost.lst) %[req.hdr(X-Add-Acl-Key)] if key del
```

Example:

```text
acl value  req.hdr(X-Value) -m found
acl setmap path /setmap
acl delmap path /delmap

use_backend bk_appli if { hdr(Host),map_str(map.lst) -m found }

http-request set-map(map.lst) %[src] %[req.hdr(X-Value)] if setmap value
http-request del-map(map.lst) %[src]                     if delmap
```

See also: "stats http-request", [section 12.2](/docs/haproxy/other-sections/#section-12-2) about userlists and [section 7](/docs/haproxy/acls-and-samples/) about ACL usage.

<a id="entry-4-2-http-response"></a>

**`http-response <action> <options...> [ { if | unless } <condition> ]`**

```haproxy
http-response <action> <options...> [ { if | unless } <condition> ]
```

Access control for Layer 7 responses

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes(!) \| yes \| yes \| yes

The http-response statement defines a set of rules which apply to layer 7 processing. The rules are
evaluated in their declaration order when they are met in a frontend, listen or backend section.
Since these rules apply on responses, the backend rules are applied first, followed by the
frontend's rules. Any rule may optionally be followed by an ACL-based condition, in which case it
will only be evaluated if the condition evaluates to true.

The condition is evaluated just before the action is executed, and the action is performed exactly
once. As such, there is no problem if an action changes an element which is checked as part of the
condition. This also means that multiple actions may rely on the same condition so that the first
action that changes the condition's evaluation is sufficient to implicitly disable the remaining
actions. This is used for example when trying to assign a value to a variable from various sources
when it's empty. There is no limit to the number of "http-response" statements per instance.

The first keyword after "http-response" in the syntax is the rule's action, optionally followed by a
varying number of arguments for the action. The supported actions and their respective syntaxes are
enumerated in [section 4.3](/docs/haproxy/proxies/#section-4-3) "Actions" (look for actions which tick "HTTP Res").

This directive is only available from named defaults sections, not anonymous ones. Rules defined in
the defaults section are evaluated before ones in the associated proxy section. To avoid
ambiguities, in this case the same defaults section cannot be used by proxies with the frontend
capability and by proxies with the backend capability. It means a listen section cannot use a
defaults section defining such rules.

Example:

```text
acl key_acl res.hdr(X-Acl-Key) -m found

acl myhost hdr(Host) -f myhost.lst

http-response add-acl(myhost.lst) %[res.hdr(X-Acl-Key)] if key_acl
http-response del-acl(myhost.lst) %[res.hdr(X-Acl-Key)] if key_acl
```

Example:

```text
acl value  res.hdr(X-Value) -m found

use_backend bk_appli if { hdr(Host),map_str(map.lst) -m found }

http-response set-map(map.lst) %[src] %[res.hdr(X-Value)] if value
http-response del-map(map.lst) %[src]                     if ! value
```

See also: "http-request", [section 12.2](/docs/haproxy/other-sections/#section-12-2) about userlists and [section 7](/docs/haproxy/acls-and-samples/) about ACL usage.

<a id="entry-4-2-http-reuse"></a>

**`http-reuse { never | safe | aggressive | always }`**

```haproxy
http-reuse { never | safe | aggressive | always }
```

Declare how idle HTTP connections may be shared between requests

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

In order to avoid the cost of setting up new connections to backend servers for each HTTP request,
HAProxy tries to keep such idle connections opened after being used. These connections are specific
to a server and are stored in a list called a pool, and are grouped together by a set of common key
properties. Subsequent HTTP requests will cause a lookup of a compatible connection sharing
identical properties in the associated pool and result in this connection being reused instead of
establishing a new one.

A limit on the number of idle connections to keep on a server can be specified via the
"pool-max-conn" server keyword. Unused connections are periodically purged according to the
"pool-purge-delay" interval.

The following connection properties are used to determine if an idle connection is eligible for
reuse on a given request:

- source and destination addresses
- proxy protocol
- TOS and mark socket options
- connection name, determined either by the result of the evaluation of the "pool-conn-name"
  expression if present, otherwise by the "sni" expression, which defaults to
  "req.hdr(host),field(1,:)", i.e. uses the incoming request's "Host" header field without the colon
  nor the port number.

In some occasions, connection lookup or reuse is not performed due to extra restrictions. This is
determined by the reuse strategy specified via the keyword argument:

    - "never" : idle connections are never shared between sessions. This mode
                 may be enforced to cancel a different strategy inherited from
                 a defaults section or for troubleshooting. For example, if an
                 old bogus application considers that multiple requests over
                 the same connection come from the same client and it is not
                 possible to fix the application, it may be desirable to
                 disable connection sharing in a single backend. An example of
                 such an application could be an old HAProxy using cookie
                 insertion in tunnel mode and not checking any request past the
                 first one.

    - "safe"  : this is the default and the recommended strategy. The first
                 request of a session is always sent over its own connection,
                 and only subsequent requests may be dispatched over other
                 existing connections. This ensures that in case the server
                 closes the connection when the request is being sent, the
                 browser can decide to silently retry it. Since it is exactly
                 equivalent to regular keep-alive, there should be no side
                 effects. There is also a special handling for the connections
                 using protocols subject to Head-of-line blocking (backend with
                 h2 or fcgi). In this case, when at least one stream is
                 processed, the used connection is reserved to handle streams
                 of the same session. When no more streams are processed, the
                 connection is released and can be reused.

    - "aggressive": this mode may be useful in webservices environments where
                 all servers are not necessarily known and where it would be
                 appreciable to deliver most first requests over existing
                 connections. In this case, first requests are only delivered
                 over existing connections that have been reused at least once,
                 proving that the server correctly supports connection reuse.
                 It should only be used when it's sure that the client can
                 retry a failed request once in a while and where the benefit
                 of aggressive connection reuse significantly outweighs the
                 downsides of rare connection failures.

    - "always": this mode is only recommended when the path to the server is
                 known for never breaking existing connections quickly after
                 releasing them. It allows the first request of a session to be
                 sent to an existing connection. This can provide a significant
                 performance increase over the "safe" strategy when the backend
                 is a cache farm, since such components tend to show a
                 consistent behavior and will benefit from the connection
                 sharing. It is recommended that the "http-keep-alive" timeout
                 remains low in this mode so that no dead connections remain
                 usable. In most cases, this will lead to the same performance
                 gains as "aggressive" but with more risks. It should only be
                 used when it improves the situation over "aggressive".

Also note that connections with certain bogus authentication schemes (relying on the connection)
like NTLM are marked private if possible and never shared. This won't be the case however when using
a protocol with multiplexing abilities and using reuse mode level value greater than the default
"safe" strategy as in this case nothing prevents the connection from being already shared.

The rules to decide to keep an idle connection opened or to close it after processing are also
governed by the "tune.pool-low-fd-ratio" (default: 20%) and "tune.pool-high-fd-ratio" (default:
25%). These correspond to the percentage of total file descriptors spent in idle connections above
which haproxy will respectively refrain from keeping a connection opened after a response, and
actively kill idle connections. Some setups using a very high ratio of idle connections, either
because of too low a global "maxconn", or due to a lot of HTTP/2 or HTTP/3 traffic on the frontend
(few connections) but HTTP/1 connections on the backend, may observe a lower reuse rate because too
few connections are kept open. It may be desirable in this case to adjust such thresholds or simply
to increase the global "maxconn" value.

In some rare cases, when the host name is used to distinguish outgoing TLS connections (e.g. forward
proxy), where most request target different hosts, the reuse rate will be very low, and the
automatic eviction of rarely used connections will kick in before connections have a chance to be
reused, because the mechanism continuously measures the average number of connections needed to
deliver the service without exhausting resources. In such situations, setting "pool-low-conn" to a
value close to the average expected number of idle connections may help preserve more connections by
encouraging threads to setup their own instead of trying to pick other threads' and shrinking the
pool of available connections.

If a locally hosted server uses a single certificate (with multiple host names or wildcards) and
operates multiple sites, it may be more effective to just use "no-sni-auto" on the "server" line to
avoid reserving a connection to a single Host name. This will significantly increase the reuse rate.
Some servers might perform excessive checks between Host and SNI though, resulting in rejecting
subsequent requests, so this option requires preliminary validation. The default behavior
("sni-auto") is to be safe even with such servers.

When thread groups are explicitly enabled, it is important to understand that idle connections are
only usable between threads from a same group. As such it may happen that unfair load between groups
leads to more idle connections being needed, causing a lower reuse rate. The same solution may then
be applied (increase global "maxconn" or increase pool ratios).

See also: "option http-keep-alive", "pool-conn-name", "pool-max-conn", "pool-purge-delay", "server
maxconn", "sni", "thread-groups", "tune.pool-high-fd-ratio", "tune.pool-low-fd-ratio"

<a id="entry-4-2-http-send-name-header"></a>

**`http-send-name-header [<header>]`**

```haproxy
http-send-name-header [<header>]
```

Add the server name to a request. Use the header string given by `<header>`

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<header>  The header string to use to send the server name
```

The "http-send-name-header" statement causes the header field named `<header>` to be set to the name
of the target server at the moment the request is about to be sent on the wire. Any existing
occurrences of this header are removed. Upon retries and redispatches, the header field is updated
to always reflect the server being attempted to connect to. Given that this header is modified very
late in the connection setup, it may have unexpected effects on already modified headers. For
example using it with transport-level header such as connection, content-length, transfer-encoding
and so on will likely result in invalid requests being sent to the server. This is why following
header names are forbidden: host, content-length, transfer-encoding and connection.

See also: "server"

<a id="entry-4-2-id"></a>

**`id <value>`**

```haproxy
id <value>
```

Set a persistent ID to a proxy.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend no \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

Set a persistent ID for the proxy. This ID must be unique and positive. An unused ID will
automatically be assigned if unset. Due to an historical behavior, value 1 is not used unless
explicitly set. Thus, the lowest value automatically assigned will be 2. This ID is currently only
returned in statistics.

<a id="entry-4-2-ignore-persist"></a>

**`ignore-persist { if | unless } <condition>`**

```haproxy
ignore-persist { if | unless } <condition>
```

Declare a condition to ignore persistence

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend no \| no \| yes \| yes

By default, when cookie persistence is enabled, every requests containing the cookie are
unconditionally persistent (assuming the target server is up and running).

The "ignore-persist" statement allows one to declare various ACL-based conditions which, when met,
will cause a request to ignore persistence. This is sometimes useful to load balance requests for
static files, which often don't require persistence. This can also be used to fully disable
persistence for a specific User-Agent (for example, some web crawler bots).

The persistence is ignored when an "if" condition is met, or unless an "unless" condition is met.

Example:

```text
acl url_static  path_beg         /static /images /img /css
acl url_static  path_end         .gif .png .jpg .css .js
ignore-persist  if url_static
```

See also: "force-persist", "cookie", and [section 7](/docs/haproxy/acls-and-samples/) about ACL usage.

<a id="entry-4-2-load-server-state-from-file"></a>

**`load-server-state-from-file { global | local | none }`**

```haproxy
load-server-state-from-file { global | local | none }
```

Allow seamless reload of HAProxy

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

This directive points HAProxy to a file where server state from previous running process has been
saved. That way, when starting up, before handling traffic, the new process can apply old states to
servers exactly has if no reload occurred. The purpose of the "load-server-state-from-file"
directive is to tell HAProxy which file to use. For now, only 2 arguments to either prevent loading
state or load states from a file containing all backends and servers. The state file can be
generated by running the command "show servers state" over the stats socket and redirect output.

The format of the file is versioned and is very specific. To understand it, please read the
documentation of the "show servers state" command (chapter 9.3 of Management Guide).

Arguments:

```text
global     load the content of the file pointed by the global directive
           named "server-state-file".

local      load the content of the file pointed by the directive
           "server-state-file-name" if set. If not set, then the backend
           name is used as a file name.

none       don't load any stat for this backend
```

Notes: - server's IP address is preserved across reloads by default, but the order can be changed
thanks to the server's "init-addr" setting. This means that an IP address change performed on the
CLI at run time will be preserved, and that any change to the local resolver (e.g. /etc/hosts) will
possibly not have any effect if the state file is in use.

    - server's weight is applied from previous running process unless it has
      has changed between previous and new configuration files.

Example: Minimal configuration

      global
       stats socket /tmp/socket
       server-state-file /tmp/server_state

      defaults
       load-server-state-from-file global

      backend bk
       server s1 127.0.0.1:22 check weight 11
       server s2 127.0.0.1:22 check weight 12

Then one can run:

```text
socat /tmp/socket - <<< "show servers state" > /tmp/server_state
```

Content of the file /tmp/server_state would be like this:

```shell
1
# <field names skipped for the doc example>
1 bk 1 s1 127.0.0.1 2 0 11 11 4 6 3 4 6 0 0
1 bk 2 s2 127.0.0.1 2 0 12 12 4 6 3 4 6 0 0
```

Example: Minimal configuration

    global
     stats socket /tmp/socket
     server-state-base /etc/haproxy/states

    defaults
     load-server-state-from-file local

    backend bk
     server s1 127.0.0.1:22 check weight 11
     server s2 127.0.0.1:22 check weight 12

Then one can run:

```text
socat /tmp/socket - <<< "show servers state bk" > /etc/haproxy/states/bk
```

Content of the file /etc/haproxy/states/bk would be like this:

```shell
1
# <field names skipped for the doc example>
1 bk 1 s1 127.0.0.1 2 0 11 11 4 6 3 4 6 0 0
1 bk 2 s2 127.0.0.1 2 0 12 12 4 6 3 4 6 0 0
```

See also: "server-state-file", "server-state-file-name", and "show servers state"

<a id="entry-4-2-log-global"></a>

**`log global`**

```haproxy
log global
log <target> [len <length>] [format <format>] [sample <ranges>:<sample_size>]
    [profile <prof>] <facility> [<level> [<minlevel>]]
no log
```

Enable per-instance logging of events and traffic.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Prefix:

```text
no         should be used when the logger list must be flushed. For example,
           if you don't want to inherit from the default logger list. This
           prefix does not allow arguments.
```

Arguments:

```text
global     should be used when the instance's logging parameters are the
           same as the global ones. This is the most common usage. "global"
           replaces all log arguments with those of the log entries found
           in the "global" section. Only one "log global" statement may be
           used per instance, and this form takes no other parameter.

<target>   indicates where to send the logs. It takes the same format as
           for the "global" section's logs, and can be one of:

           - An IPv4 address optionally followed by a colon (':') and a UDP
             port. If no port is specified, 514 is used by default (the
             standard syslog port).

           - An IPv6 address followed by a colon (':') and optionally a UDP
             port. If no port is specified, 514 is used by default (the
             standard syslog port).

           - A filesystem path to a UNIX domain socket, keeping in mind
             considerations for chroot (be sure the path is accessible
             inside the chroot) and uid/gid (be sure the path is
             appropriately writable).

           - A file descriptor number in the form "fd@<number>", which may
             point to a pipe, terminal, or socket. In this case unbuffered
             logs are used and one writev() call per log is performed. This
             is a bit expensive but acceptable for most workloads. Messages
             sent this way will not be truncated but may be dropped, in
             which case the DroppedLogs counter will be incremented. The
             writev() call is atomic even on pipes for messages up to
             PIPE_BUF size, which POSIX recommends to be at least 512 and
             which is 4096 bytes on most modern operating systems. Any
             larger message may be interleaved with messages from other
             processes.  Exceptionally for debugging purposes the file
             descriptor may also be directed to a file, but doing so will
             significantly slow HAProxy down as non-blocking calls will be
             ignored. Also there will be no way to purge nor rotate this
             file without restarting the process. Note that the configured
             syslog format is preserved, so the output is suitable for use
             with a TCP syslog server. See also the "short" and "raw"
             formats below.

           - "stdout" / "stderr", which are respectively aliases for "fd@1"
             and "fd@2", see above.

           - A ring buffer in the form "ring@<name>", which will correspond
             to an in-memory ring buffer accessible over the CLI using the
             "show events" command, which will also list existing rings and
             their sizes. Such buffers are lost on reload or restart but
             when used as a complement this can help troubleshooting by
             having the logs instantly available. See section 12.5 about
             rings.

           - A log backend in the form "backend@<name>", which will send
             log messages to the corresponding log backend responsible for
             sending the message to the proper server according to the
             backend's lb settings. A log backend is a backend section with
             "mode log" set (see "mode" for more information).

           - An explicit stream address prefix such as "tcp@","tcp6@",
             "tcp4@" or "uxst@" will allocate an implicit ring buffer with
             a stream forward server targeting the given address.

           You may want to reference some environment variables in the
           address parameter, see section 2.3 about environment variables.

<length>   is an optional maximum line length. Log lines larger than this
           value will be truncated before being sent. The reason is that
           syslog servers act differently on log line length. All servers
           support the default value of 1024, but some servers simply drop
           larger lines while others do log them. If a server supports long
           lines, it may make sense to set this value here in order to avoid
           truncating long lines. Similarly, if a server drops long lines,
           it is preferable to truncate them before sending them. Accepted
           values are 80 to 65535 inclusive. The default value of 1024 is
           generally fine for all standard usages. Some specific cases of
           long captures or JSON-formatted logs may require larger values.
           You may also need to increase "tune.http.logurilen" if your
           request URIs are truncated.

<ranges>   A list of comma-separated ranges to identify the logs to sample.
           This is used to balance the load of the logs to send to the log
           server. The limits of the ranges cannot be null. They are numbered
           from 1. The size or period (in number of logs) of the sample must
           be set with <sample_size> parameter.

<sample_size>
           The size of the sample in number of logs to consider when balancing
           their logging loads. It is used to balance the load of the logs to
           send to the syslog server. This size must be greater or equal to the
           maximum of the high limits of the ranges.
           (see also <ranges> parameter).

<format> is the log format used when generating syslog messages. It may be
         one of the following:

  local     Analog to rfc3164 syslog message format except that hostname
            field is stripped. This is the default.
            Note: option "log-send-hostname" switches the default to
            rfc3164.

  rfc3164   The RFC3164 syslog message format.
            (https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3164)

  rfc5424   The RFC5424 syslog message format.
            (https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5424)

  priority  A message containing only a level plus syslog facility between
            angle brackets such as '<63>', followed by the text. The PID,
            date, time, process name and system name are omitted. This is
            designed to be used with a local log server.

  short     A message containing only a level between angle brackets such as
            '<3>', followed by the text. The PID, date, time, process name
            and system name are omitted. This is designed to be used with a
            local log server. This format is compatible with what the
            systemd logger consumes.

  timed     A message containing only a level between angle brackets such as
            '<3>', followed by ISO date and by the text. The PID, process
            name and system name are omitted. This is designed to be
            used with a local log server.

  iso       A message containing only the ISO date, followed by the text.
            The PID, process name and system name are omitted. This is
            designed to be used with a local log server.

  raw       A message containing only the text. The level, PID, date, time,
            process name and system name are omitted. This is designed to
            be used in containers or during development, where the severity
            only depends on the file descriptor used (stdout/stderr).

<prof>     name of the optional "log-profile" section that will be
           considered during the log building process to override some
           log options. Check out "8.3.5. Log profiles" for more info.

<facility> must be one of the 24 standard syslog facilities:

               kern   user   mail   daemon auth   syslog lpr    news
               uucp   cron   auth2  ftp    ntp    audit  alert  cron2
               local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7

           Note that the facility is ignored for the "short" and "raw"
           formats, but still required as a positional field. It is
           recommended to use "daemon" in this case to make it clear that
           it's only supposed to be used locally.

<level>    is optional and can be specified to filter outgoing messages. By
           default, all messages are sent. If a level is specified, only
           messages with a severity at least as important as this level
           will be sent. An optional minimum level can be specified. If it
           is set, logs emitted with a more severe level than this one will
           be capped to this level. This is used to avoid sending "emerg"
           messages on all terminals on some default syslog configurations.
           Eight levels are known:

             emerg  alert  crit   err    warning notice info  debug
```

It is important to keep in mind that it is the frontend which decides what to log from a connection,
and that in case of content switching, the log entries from the backend will be ignored. Connections
are logged at level "info".

However, backend log declaration define how and where servers status changes will be logged. Level
"notice" will be used to indicate a server going up, "warning" will be used for termination signals
and definitive service termination, and "alert" will be used for when a server goes down.

Note: According to RFC3164, messages are truncated to 1024 bytes before being emitted.

Example:

```text
log global
log stdout format short daemon          # send log to systemd
log stdout format raw daemon            # send everything to stdout
log stderr format raw daemon notice     # send important events to stderr
log 127.0.0.1:514 local0 notice         # only send important events
log tcp@127.0.0.1:514 local0 notice notice  # same but limit output
                                            # level and send in tcp
log "${LOCAL_SYSLOG}:514" local0 notice   # send to local server
```

<a id="entry-4-2-log-format"></a>

**`log-format <fmt>`**

```haproxy
log-format <fmt>
```

Specifies the custom log format string to use for traffic logs

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

This directive specifies the log format string that will be used for all logs resulting from traffic
passing through the frontend using this line. If the directive is used in a defaults section, all
subsequent frontends will use the same log format. Please see [section 8.2.6](/docs/haproxy/configuration-logging/#section-8-2-6) which covers the custom
log format string in depth.

A specific log-format used only in case of connection error can also be defined, see the
"error-log-format" option.

"log-format" directive overrides previous "option tcplog", "log-format", "option httplog" and
"option httpslog" directives.

<a id="entry-4-2-log-format-sd"></a>

**`log-format-sd <fmt>`**

```haproxy
log-format-sd <fmt>
```

Specifies the Custom log format string used to produce RFC5424 structured-data

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

This directive specifies the RFC5424 structured-data log format string that will be used for all
logs resulting from traffic passing through the frontend using this line. If the directive is used
in a defaults section, all subsequent frontends will use the same log format. Please see [section
8.2.6](/docs/haproxy/configuration-logging/#section-8-2-6) which covers the log format string in depth.

See <https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5424#section-6.3> for more information about the RFC5424
structured-data part.

Note: This log format string will be used only for loggers that have set log format to "rfc5424".

Example:

```text
log-format-sd [exampleSDID@1234\ bytes=\"%B\"\ status=\"%ST\"]
```

<a id="entry-4-2-log-steps"></a>

**`log-steps <steps>`**

```haproxy
log-steps <steps>
```

Specifies at which steps during transaction processing logs should be generated.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

During tcp/http transaction processing, haproxy may produce logs at different steps during the
processing (ie: accept, connect, request, response, close).

By default, HAProxy emits a single log per transaction, once all of the items used in the logformat
expression could be satisfied, which means that in practice the log is usually emitted at the end of
the transaction (after the end of the response for HTTP or end of connection for TCP), unless
"option logasap" is used.

The "log-steps" directive allows to refine the precise instants where logs will be emitted, and even
permits to emit multiple logs for a same transaction. Special value 'all' may be used to enable all
available log origins, making it possible to track a transaction from accept to close. Individual
log origins may also be specified using their names separated by commas to selectively enable when
logs should be produced.

Common log origins are: accept, connect, request, response, close.

Example:

```text
frontend myfront
    option httplog
    log-steps accept,close         #only log accept and close for the txn
```

Log origins specified as "logging steps" (such as accept, close) can be used as-is in log-profiles
(after 'on' directive). Combining "log-steps" with log-profiles is really interesting to have
fine-grained control over logs automatically generated by haproxy during transaction processing.

This setting is only relevant on frontends, it is ignored on backends.

See also: "log-profile"

<a id="entry-4-2-log-tag"></a>

**`log-tag <string>`**

```haproxy
log-tag <string>
```

Specifies the log tag to use for all outgoing logs

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Sets the tag field in the syslog header to this string. It defaults to the log-tag set in the global
section, otherwise the program name as launched from the command line, which usually is "HAProxy".
Sometimes it can be useful to differentiate between multiple processes running on the same host, or
to differentiate customer instances running in the same process. In the backend, logs about servers
up/down will use this tag. As a hint, it can be convenient to set a log-tag related to a hosted
customer in a defaults section then put all the frontends and backends for that customer, then start
another customer in a new defaults section. See also the global "log-tag" directive.

<a id="entry-4-2-max-keep-alive-queue"></a>

**`max-keep-alive-queue <value>`**

```haproxy
max-keep-alive-queue <value>
```

Set the maximum server queue size for maintaining keep-alive connections

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

HTTP keep-alive tries to reuse the same server connection whenever possible, but sometimes it can be
counter-productive, for example if a server has a lot of connections while other ones are idle. This
is especially true for static servers.

The purpose of this setting is to set a threshold on the number of queued connections at which
HAProxy stops trying to reuse the same server and prefers to find another one. The default value,
-1, means there is no limit. A value of zero means that keep-alive requests will never be queued.
For very close servers which can be reached with a low latency and which are not sensible to
breaking keep-alive, a low value is recommended (e.g. local static server can use a value of 10 or
less). For remote servers suffering from a high latency, higher values might be needed to cover for
the latency and/or the cost of picking a different server.

Note that this has no impact on responses which are maintained to the same server consecutively to a
401 response. They will still go to the same server even if they have to be queued.

See also: "option http-server-close", "option prefer-last-server", server "maxconn" and cookie
persistence.

<a id="entry-4-2-max-session-srv-conns"></a>

**`max-session-srv-conns <nb>`**

```haproxy
max-session-srv-conns <nb>
```

Set the maximum number of outgoing connections we can keep idling for a given client session. The
default is 5 (it precisely equals MAX_SRV_LIST which is defined at build time).

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

<a id="entry-4-2-maxconn"></a>

**`maxconn <conns>`**

```haproxy
maxconn <conns>
```

Fix the maximum number of concurrent connections on a frontend

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments:

```text
<conns>   is the maximum number of concurrent connections the frontend will
          accept to serve. Excess connections will be queued by the system
          in the socket's listen queue and will be served once a connection
          closes.
```

If the system supports it, it can be useful on big sites to raise this limit very high so that
HAProxy manages connection queues, instead of leaving the clients with unanswered connection
attempts. This value should not exceed the global maxconn. Also, keep in mind that a connection
contains two buffers of tune.bufsize (16kB by default) each, as well as some other data resulting in
about 33 kB of RAM being consumed per established connection. That means that a medium system
equipped with 1GB of RAM can withstand around 20000-25000 concurrent connections if properly tuned.

Also, when `<conns>` is set to large values, it is possible that the servers are not sized to accept
such loads, and for this reason it is generally wise to assign them some reasonable connection
limits.

When this value is set to zero, which is the default, the global "maxconn" value is used.

See also: "server", global section's "maxconn", "fullconn"

<a id="entry-4-2-mode"></a>

**`mode { tcp|http|log|spop }`**

```haproxy
mode { tcp|http|log|spop }
```

Set the running mode or protocol of the instance May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \|
listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes Arguments:

```text
tcp       The instance will work in pure TCP mode. A full-duplex connection
          will be established between clients and servers, and no layer 7
          examination will be performed. This is the default mode. It
          should be used for SSL, SSH, SMTP, ...

http      The instance will work in HTTP mode. The client request will be
          analyzed in depth before connecting to any server. Any request
          which is not RFC-compliant will be rejected. Layer 7 filtering,
          processing and switching will be possible. This is the mode which
          brings HAProxy most of its value.

haterm    The frontend will work in haterm HTTP benchmark mode. This is
          not supported by backends. See doc/haterm.txt for details.

log       When used in a backend section, it will turn the backend into a
          log backend. Such backend can be used as a log destination for
          any "log" directive by using the "backend@<name>" syntax. Log
          messages will be distributed to the servers from the backend
          according to the lb settings which can be configured using the
          "balance" keyword. Log backends support UDP servers by prefixing
          the server's address with the "udp@" prefix. Common backend and
          server features are supported, but not TCP or HTTP specific ones.

spop      When used in a backend section, it will turn the backend into a
          spop backend. This mode is mandatory if the backend contains
          SPOA servers, but when mode is tcp, it will automatically be
          converted to mode spop if such servers are detected.

```

When doing content switching, it is mandatory that the frontend and the backend are in the same mode
(generally HTTP), otherwise the configuration will be refused.

Example:

```text
defaults http_instances
    mode http

```

<a id="entry-4-2-monitor-fail"></a>

**`monitor fail { if | unless } <condition>`**

```haproxy
monitor fail { if | unless } <condition>
```

Add a condition to report a failure to a monitor HTTP request.

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend no \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments:

```text
if <cond>     the monitor request will fail if the condition is satisfied,
              and will succeed otherwise. The condition should describe a
              combined test which must induce a failure if all conditions
              are met, for instance a low number of servers both in a
              backend and its backup.

unless <cond> the monitor request will succeed only if the condition is
              satisfied, and will fail otherwise. Such a condition may be
              based on a test on the presence of a minimum number of active
              servers in a list of backends.
```

This statement adds a condition which can force the response to a monitor request to report a
failure. By default, when an external component queries the URI dedicated to monitoring, a 200
response is returned. When one of the conditions above is met, HAProxy will return 503 instead of
200. This is very useful to report a site failure to an external component which may base routing
advertisements between multiple sites on the availability reported by HAProxy. In this case, one
would rely on an ACL involving the "nbsrv" criterion. Note that "monitor fail" only works in HTTP
mode. Both status messages may be tweaked using "errorfile" or "errorloc" if needed.

Example:

```text
frontend www
   mode http
   acl site_dead nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2
   acl site_dead nbsrv(static)  lt 2
   monitor-uri   /site_alive
   monitor fail  if site_dead
```

See also: "monitor-uri", "errorfile", "errorloc"

<a id="entry-4-2-monitor-uri"></a>

**`monitor-uri <uri>`**

```haproxy
monitor-uri <uri>
```

Intercept a URI used by external components' monitor requests

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments:

```text
<uri>     is the exact URI which we want to intercept to return HAProxy's
          health status instead of forwarding the request.
```

When an HTTP request referencing `<uri>` will be received on a frontend, HAProxy will not forward it
nor log it, but instead will return either "HTTP/1.0 200 OK" or "HTTP/1.0 503 Service unavailable",
depending on failure conditions defined with "monitor fail". This is normally enough for any
front-end HTTP probe to detect that the service is UP and running without forwarding the request to
a backend server. Note that the HTTP method, the version and all headers are ignored, but the
request must at least be valid at the HTTP level. This keyword may only be used with an HTTP-mode
frontend.

Monitor requests are processed very early, just after the request is parsed and even before any
"http-request". The only rulesets applied before are the tcp-request ones. They cannot be logged
either, and it is the intended purpose. Only one URI may be configured for monitoring; when multiple
"monitor-uri" statements are present, the last one will define the URI to be used. They are only
used to report HAProxy's health to an upper component, nothing more. However, it is possible to add
any number of conditions using "monitor fail" and ACLs so that the result can be adjusted to
whatever check can be imagined (most often the number of available servers in a backend).

Note: if `<uri>` starts by a slash ('/'), the matching is performed against the request's path
instead of the request's uri. It is a workaround to let the HTTP/2 requests match the monitor-uri.
Indeed, in HTTP/2, clients are encouraged to send absolute URIs only.

Example:

```shell
# Use /haproxy_test to report HAProxy's status
frontend www
    mode http
    monitor-uri /haproxy_test
```

See also: "monitor fail"

<a id="entry-4-2-option-abortonclose"></a>

**`option abortonclose`**

```haproxy
option abortonclose
no option abortonclose
```

Enable or disable early abortion of not started processing when client closes

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

TCP connections support being closed independently in each direction, and a connection with only one
direction closed is often said to be "half-closed". Originally when the HTTP ecosystem was mostly
made of the "close mode", with only one request and one response per connection before closing, it
was pretty frequent to see scripted clients send their request, close the sending side, wait for the
response, receive the close indication and be done with this. But with the arrival of keep-alive and
more advanced protocols, this practice has practically disappeared and the only cases where a client
closes before receiving its response is essentially when the user wants to abort a transfer, or when
a timeout strikes and the connection is closed.

These two situations (half-closed vs abort) are undistinguishable from the server side (here the
HAProxy listener). This is a problem because leaving the connection alive and continuing to process
a request when clients abort can cost a lot of resources, particularly if the closure is the result
of a user hitting the "reload" button, as it means new requests are queued without the previous ones
being aborted. And conversely, systematically aborting when facing such a half-close situation would
break a number of TCP applications and even some HTTP ones on internal networks interacting with
legacy agents.

The "abortonclose" option permits to choose the desired behavior: - when present in a frontend, it
will avoid processing TLS handshakes which are pending on a half-closed connection. This can be the
result of a user hitting "reload" during an HTTPS request under high load such as a VRRP fail-over
between an active HAProxy node and the backup one: all clients reconnect at the same time to the new
node, and all have to perform a costly, full TLS handshake. If it takes more than a few seconds,
it's likely that some users will give up, and it's pointless to waste CPU cycles on their
handshakes. Given the CPU cost of TLS handshakes, it is recommended to leave this option enabled on
internet-facing frontends. This is the default for incoming TLS connections.

    - when present in a backend, it will cause half-closed connections to try
      to abort a request that was not yet sent to a server (i.e. when it's
      pending in the queue or when trying to connect). If the request is
      already being served by a server, then the connection to the server is
      in turn switched to half-close to indicate the same condition to the
      server, which will then decide how to proceed. This is the default for
      HTTP-mode backends.

The recommendation is to enable this option on internet-facing TLS endpoints and HTTP services, and
to disable it for pure TCP ones as well as unexposed legacy environments. It is enabled by default
in HTTP backends, and may be forcefully disabled by prepending the "no" keyword before it, either in
the backend section itself, or in the "defaults" section it inherits from. It is also enabled by
default for TLS listeners and may be forcefully disabled as well by specifying "no option
abortonclose" in the frontend or in the "defaults" section it inherits from.

If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled in a specific instance
by prepending the "no" keyword before it.

See also: "timeout queue" and server's "maxconn" and "maxqueue" parameters

<a id="entry-4-2-option-accept-invalid-http-request"></a>

**`option accept-invalid-http-request     (deprecated)`**

```haproxy
option accept-invalid-http-request     (deprecated)
no option accept-invalid-http-request  (deprecated)
```

Enable or disable relaxing of HTTP request parsing

The "accept-invalid-http-request" keyword is deprecated, use "option
accept-unsafe-violations-in-http-request" instead.

<a id="entry-4-2-option-accept-invalid-http-response"></a>

**`option accept-invalid-http-response     (deprecated)`**

```haproxy
option accept-invalid-http-response     (deprecated)
no option accept-invalid-http-response  (deprecated)
```

Enable or disable relaxing of HTTP response parsing

The "accept-invalid-http-response" keyword is deprecated, use "option
accept-unsafe-violations-in-http-response" instead.

<a id="entry-4-2-option-accept-unsafe-violations-in-http-request"></a>

**`option accept-unsafe-violations-in-http-request`**

```haproxy
option accept-unsafe-violations-in-http-request
no option accept-unsafe-violations-in-http-request
```

Enable or disable relaxing of HTTP request parsing

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments: none

By default, HAProxy complies with the different HTTP RFCs in terms of message parsing. This means
the message parsing is quite strict and causes an error to be returned to the client for malformed
messages. This is the desired behavior as such malformed messages are essentially used to build
attacks exploiting server weaknesses, and bypass security filtering. Sometimes, a buggy browser will
not respect these RCFs for whatever reason (configuration, implementation...) and the issue will not
be immediately fixed. In such case, it is possible to relax HAProxy's parser to accept some invalid
requests by specifying this option. Most of rules concern the H1 parsing for historical reason.
Newer HTTP versions tends to be cleaner and applications follow more stickly these protocols.

When this option is set, the following rules are observed:

    * In H1 only, invalid characters, including NULL character, in header name
      will not be rejected; however the header will be dropped.

    * In H1 only, NULL character in header value will be accepted;

    * In H1 only, characters above 127 in the URI will be accepted. The list of
      characters allowed to appear in a URI is well defined by RFC3986, and
      chars 0-31, 32 (space), 34 ('"'), 60 ('<'), 62 ('>'), 92 ('&#92;'), 94 ('^'),
      96 ('`'), 123 ('{'), 124 ('|'), 125 ('}'), 127 (delete) and anything
      above are normally not allowed. In H1, all character between (0..32) and
      127 will always be blocked. All characters above 127 (excluded) will also
      be blocked, except when this option is enabled. Other characters
      (33..126) will not be checked at all.

    * In H1 and H2, URLs containing fragment references ('#' after the path)
      will be accepted;

    * In H1 only, no check will be performed on the authority for CONNECT
      requests;

    * In H1 only, no check will be performed against the authority and the Host
      header value.

    * In H1 only, tests on the HTTP version will be relaxed. It will allow
      HTTP/0.9 GET requests to pass through (no version specified), as well as
      different protocol names (e.g. RTSP), and multiple digits for both the
      major and the minor version.

    * In H1 only, WebSocket (RFC6455) requests failing to present a valid
      "Sec-Websocket-Key" header field will be accepted.

This option should never be enabled by default as it hides application bugs and open security
breaches. It should only be deployed after a problem has been confirmed.

When this option is enabled, invalid but accepted H1 requests will be captured in order to permit
later analysis using the "show errors" request on the UNIX stats socket.Doing this also helps
confirming that the issue has been solved.

If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled in a specific instance
by prepending the "no" keyword before it.

See also: "option accept-unsafe-violations-in-http-response" and "show errors" on the stats socket.

<a id="entry-4-2-option-accept-unsafe-violations-in-http-response"></a>

**`option accept-unsafe-violations-in-http-response`**

```haproxy
option accept-unsafe-violations-in-http-response
no option accept-unsafe-violations-in-http-response
```

Enable or disable relaxing of HTTP response parsing

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

Similarly to "option accept-unsafe-violations-in-http-request", this option may be used to relax
parsing rules of HTTP responses. It should only be enabled for trusted legacy servers to accept some
invalid responses. Most of rules concern the H1 parsing for historical reason. Newer HTTP versions
tends to be cleaner and applications follow more stickly these protocols.

When this option is set, the following rules are observed:

    * In H1 only, status codes longer than 3 digits but whose value fits in 16
      bits are not rejected.

    * In H1 only, invalid characters, including NULL character, in header name
      will not be rejected; however the header will be dropped.

    * In H1 only, NULL character in header value will be accepted;

    * In H1 only, empty values or several "chunked" value occurrences for
      Transfer-Encoding header will be accepted;

    * In H1 only, no check will be performed against the authority and the Host
      header value.

    * In H1 only, tests on the HTTP version will be relaxed. It will allow
      different protocol names (e.g. RTSP), and multiple digits for both the
      major and the minor version.

    * In H1 only, WebSocket (RFC6455) responses failing to present a valid
      "Sec-Websocket-Accept" header field will be accepted.

This option should never be enabled by default as it hides application bugs and open security
breaches. It should only be deployed after a problem has been confirmed.

When this option is enabled, erroneous header names will still be accepted in responses, but the
complete response will be captured in order to permit later analysis using the "show errors" request
on the UNIX stats socket. Doing this also helps confirming that the issue has been solved.

If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled in a specific instance
by prepending the "no" keyword before it.

See also: "option accept-unsafe-violations-in-http-request" and "show errors" on the stats socket.

<a id="entry-4-2-option-allbackups"></a>

**`option allbackups`**

```haproxy
option allbackups
no option allbackups
```

Use either all backup servers at a time or only the first one

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

By default, the first operational backup server gets all traffic when normal servers are all down.
Sometimes, it may be preferred to use multiple backups at once, because one will not be enough. When
"option allbackups" is enabled, the load balancing will be performed among all backup servers when
all normal ones are unavailable. The same load balancing algorithm will be used and the servers'
weights will be respected. Thus, there will not be any priority order between the backup servers
anymore.

This option is mostly used with static server farms dedicated to return a "sorry" page when an
application is completely offline.

If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled in a specific instance
by prepending the "no" keyword before it.

<a id="entry-4-2-option-checkcache"></a>

**`option checkcache`**

```haproxy
option checkcache
no option checkcache
```

Analyze all server responses and block responses with cacheable cookies

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

Some high-level frameworks set application cookies everywhere and do not always let enough control
to the developer to manage how the responses should be cached. When a session cookie is returned on
a cacheable object, there is a high risk of session crossing or stealing between users traversing
the same caches. In some situations, it is better to block the response than to let some sensitive
session information go in the wild.

The option "checkcache" enables deep inspection of all server responses for strict compliance with
HTTP specification in terms of cacheability. It carefully checks "Cache-control", "Pragma" and
"Set-cookie" headers in server response to check if there's a risk of caching a cookie on a
client-side proxy. When this option is enabled, the only responses which can be delivered to the
client are: - all those without "Set-Cookie" header; - all those with a return code other than 200,
203, 204, 206, 300, 301, 404, 405, 410, 414, 501, provided that the server has not set a
"Cache-control: public" header field; - all those that result from a request using a method other
than GET, HEAD, OPTIONS, TRACE, provided that the server has not set a 'Cache-Control: public'
header field; - those with a 'Pragma: no-cache' header - those with a 'Cache-control: private'
header - those with a 'Cache-control: no-store' header - those with a 'Cache-control: max-age=0'
header - those with a 'Cache-control: s-maxage=0' header - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache'
header - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache="set-cookie"' header - those with a 'Cache-control:
no-cache="set-cookie,' header (allowing other fields after set-cookie)

If a response doesn't respect these requirements, then it will be blocked just as if it was from an
"http-response deny" rule, with an "HTTP 502 bad gateway". The session state shows "PH--" meaning
that the proxy blocked the response during headers processing. Additionally, an alert will be sent
in the logs so that admins are informed that there's something to be fixed.

Due to the high impact on the application, the application should be tested in depth with the option
enabled before going to production. It is also a good practice to always activate it during tests,
even if it is not used in production, as it will report potentially dangerous application behaviors.

If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled in a specific instance
by prepending the "no" keyword before it.

<a id="entry-4-2-option-clitcpka"></a>

**`option clitcpka`**

```haproxy
option clitcpka
no option clitcpka
```

Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on the client side

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments: none

When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and a server, and when the
protocol involves very long sessions with long idle periods (e.g. remote desktops), there is a risk
that one of the intermediate components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too
long.

Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets to the other end of
the connection, leaving it active. The delay between keep-alive probes is controlled by the system
only and depends both on the operating system and its tuning parameters.

It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor received at the
application level. It is only the network stacks which sees them. For this reason, even if one side
of the proxy already uses keep-alives to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets
will not be forwarded to the other side of the proxy.

Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.

Using option "clitcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on the client side of a
connection, which should help when session expirations are noticed between HAProxy and a client.

If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled in a specific instance
by prepending the "no" keyword before it.

See also: "option srvtcpka", "option tcpka"

<a id="entry-4-2-option-contstats"></a>

**`option contstats`**

```haproxy
option contstats
```

Enable continuous traffic statistics updates

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments: none

By default, counters used for statistics calculation are incremented only when a stream finishes. It
works quite well when serving small objects, but with big ones (for example large images or
archives) or with A/V streaming, a graph generated from HAProxy counters looks like a hedgehog. With
this option enabled counters get incremented frequently along the stream, typically every 5 seconds,
which is often enough to produce clean graphs. Recounting touches a hotpath directly so it is not
not enabled by default, as it can cause a lot of wakeups for very large session counts and cause a
small performance drop.

<a id="entry-4-2-option-disable-h2-upgrade"></a>

**`option disable-h2-upgrade`**

```haproxy
option disable-h2-upgrade
no option disable-h2-upgrade
```

Enable or disable the implicit HTTP/2 upgrade from an HTTP/1.x client connection.

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments: none

By default, HAProxy is able to implicitly upgrade an HTTP/1.x client connection to an HTTP/2
connection if the first request it receives from a given HTTP connection matches the HTTP/2
connection preface (i.e. the string "PRI \*
HTTP/2.0&#92;r&#92;n&#92;r&#92;nSM&#92;r&#92;n&#92;r&#92;n").
This way, it is possible to support HTTP/1.x and HTTP/2 clients on a non-SSL connections. This
option must be used to disable the implicit upgrade. Note this implicit upgrade is only supported
for HTTP proxies, thus this option too. Note also it is possible to force the HTTP/2 on clear
connections by specifying "proto h2" on the bind line. Finally, this option is applied on all bind
lines. To disable implicit HTTP/2 upgrades for a specific bind line, it is possible to use "proto
h1".

If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled in a specific instance
by prepending the "no" keyword before it.

<a id="entry-4-2-option-dontlog-normal"></a>

**`option dontlog-normal`**

```haproxy
option dontlog-normal
no option dontlog-normal
```

Enable or disable logging of normal, successful connections

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments: none

There are large sites dealing with several thousand connections per second and for which logging is
a major pain. Some of them are even forced to turn logs off and cannot debug production issues.
Setting this option ensures that normal connections, those which experience no error, no timeout, no
retry nor redispatch, will not be logged. This leaves disk space for anomalies. In HTTP mode, the
response status code is checked and return codes 5xx will still be logged.

It is strongly discouraged to use this option as most of the time, the key to complex issues is in
the normal logs which will not be logged here. If you need to separate logs, see the
"log-separate-errors" option instead.

See also: "log", "dontlognull", "log-separate-errors" and [section 8](/docs/haproxy/configuration-logging/) about logging.

<a id="entry-4-2-option-dontlognull"></a>

**`option dontlognull`**

```haproxy
option dontlognull
no option dontlognull
```

Enable or disable logging of null connections

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments: none

In certain environments, there are components which will regularly connect to various systems to
ensure that they are still alive. It can be the case from another load balancer as well as from
monitoring systems. By default, even a simple port probe or scan will produce a log. If those
connections pollute the logs too much, it is possible to enable option "dontlognull" to indicate
that a connection on which no data has been transferred will not be logged, which typically
corresponds to those probes. Note that errors will still be returned to the client and accounted for
in the stats. If this is not what is desired, option http-ignore-probes can be used instead.

It is generally recommended not to use this option in uncontrolled environments (e.g. internet),
otherwise scans and other malicious activities would not be logged.

If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled in a specific instance
by prepending the "no" keyword before it.

See also: "log", "http-ignore-probes", "monitor-uri", and [section 8](/docs/haproxy/configuration-logging/) about logging.

<a id="entry-4-2-option-external-check"></a>

**`option external-check`**

```haproxy
option external-check
```

Use external processes for server health checks

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

It is possible to test the health of a server using an external command. This is achieved by running
the executable set using "external-check command".

Requires the "external-check" global to be set.

See also: "external-check", "external-check command", "external-check path"

<a id="entry-4-2-option-forwarded"></a>

**`option forwarded [ proto ]`**

```haproxy
option forwarded [ proto ]
                 [ host | host-expr <host_expr> ]
                 [ by | by-expr <by_expr> ] [ by_port | by_port-expr <by_port_expr>]
                 [ for | for-expr <for_expr> ] [ for_port | for_port-expr <for_port_expr>]
no option forwarded
```

Enable insertion of the rfc 7239 forwarded header in requests sent to servers

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<host_expr>     optional argument to specify a custom sample expression
                those result will be used as 'host' parameter value

<by_expr>       optional argument to specify a custom sample expression
                those result will be used as 'by' parameter nodename value

<for_expr>      optional argument to specify a custom sample expression
                those result will be used as 'for' parameter nodename value

<by_port_expr>  optional argument to specify a custom sample expression
                those result will be used as 'by' parameter nodeport value

<for_port_expr> optional argument to specify a custom sample expression
                those result will be used as 'for' parameter nodeport value

```

Since HAProxy works in reverse-proxy mode, servers are losing some request context (request origin:
client ip address, protocol used...)

A common way to address this limitation is to use the well known x-forward-for and x-forward-\*
friends to expose some of this context to the underlying servers/applications. While this use to
work and is widely deployed, it is not officially supported by the IETF and can be the root of some
interoperability as well as security issues.

To solve this, a new HTTP extension has been described by the IETF: forwarded header (RFC7239). More
information here: <https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc7239.html>

The use of this single header allow to convey numerous details within the same header, and most
importantly, fixes the proxy chaining issue. (the rfc allows for multiple chained proxies to append
their own values to an already existing header).

This option may be specified in defaults, listen or backend section, but it will be ignored for
frontend sections.

Setting option forwarded without arguments results in using default implicit behavior. Default
behavior enables proto parameter and injects original client ip.

The equivalent explicit/manual configuration would be:

```text
option forwarded proto for
```

The keyword 'by' is used to enable 'by' parameter ("nodename") in forwarded header. It allows to
embed request proxy information. 'by' value will be set to proxy ip (destination address) If not
available (ie: UNIX listener), 'by' will be set to "unknown".

The keyword 'by-expr' is used to enable 'by' parameter ("nodename") in forwarded header. It allows
to embed request proxy information. 'by' value will be set to the result of the sample expression
`<by_expr>`, if valid, otherwise it will be set to "unknown".

The keyword 'for' is used to enable 'for' parameter ("nodename") in forwarded header. It allows to
embed request client information. 'for' value will be set to client ip (source address) If not
available (ie: UNIX listener), 'for' will be set to "unknown".

The keyword 'for-expr' is used to enable 'for' parameter ("nodename") in forwarded header. It allows
to embed request client information. 'for' value will be set to the result of the sample expression
`<for_expr>`, if valid, otherwise it will be set to "unknown".

The keyword 'by_port' is used to provide "nodeport" info to 'by' parameter. 'by_port' requires 'by'
or 'by-expr' to be set or it will be ignored. "nodeport" will be set to proxy (destination) port if
available, otherwise it will be ignored.

The keyword 'by_port-expr' is used to provide "nodeport" info to 'by' parameter. 'by_port-expr'
requires 'by' or 'by-expr' to be set or it will be ignored. "nodeport" will be set to the result of
the sample expression `<by_port_expr>`, if valid, otherwise it will be ignored.

The keyword 'for_port' is used to provide "nodeport" info to 'for' parameter. 'for_port' requires
'for' or 'for-expr' to be set or it will be ignored. "nodeport" will be set to client (source) port
if available, otherwise it will be ignored.

The keyword 'for_port-expr' is used to provide "nodeport" info to 'for' parameter. 'for_port-expr'
requires 'for' or 'for-expr' to be set or it will be ignored. "nodeport" will be set to the result
of the sample expression `<for_port_expr>`, if valid, otherwise it will be ignored.

Examples:

```shell
# Those servers want the ip address and protocol of the client request
# Resulting header would look like this:
#   forwarded: proto=http;for=127.0.0.1
backend www_default
    mode http
    option forwarded
    #equivalent to: option forwarded proto for

# Those servers want the requested host and hashed client ip address
# as well as client source port (you should use seed for xxh32 if ensuring
# ip privacy is a concern)
# Resulting header would look like this:
#   forwarded: host="haproxy.org";for="_000000007F2F367E:60138"
backend www_host
    mode http
    option forwarded host for-expr src,xxh32,hex for_port

# Those servers want custom data in host, for and by parameters
# Resulting header would look like this:
#   forwarded: host="host.com";by=_haproxy;for="[::1]:10"
backend www_custom
    mode http
    option forwarded host-expr str(host.com) by-expr str(_haproxy) for for_port-expr int(10)

# Those servers want random 'for' obfuscated identifiers for request
# tracing purposes while protecting sensitive IP information
# Resulting header would look like this:
#   forwarded: for=_000000002B1F4D63
backend www_for_hide
    mode http
    option forwarded for-expr rand,hex
```

See also: "option forwardfor", "option originalto"

<a id="entry-4-2-option-forwardfor"></a>

**`option forwardfor [ except <network> ] [ header <name> ] [ if-none ]`**

```haproxy
option forwardfor [ except <network> ] [ header <name> ] [ if-none ]
```

Enable insertion of the X-Forwarded-For header to requests sent to servers

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<network> is an optional argument used to disable this option for sources
          matching <network>
<name>    an optional argument to specify a different "X-Forwarded-For"
          header name.
```

Since HAProxy works in reverse-proxy mode, the servers see its IP address as their client address.
This is sometimes annoying when the client's IP address is expected in server logs. To solve this
problem, the well-known HTTP header "X-Forwarded-For" may be added by HAProxy to all requests sent
to the server. This header contains a value representing the client's IP address. Since this header
is always appended at the end of the existing header list, the server must be configured to always
use the last occurrence of this header only. See the server's manual to find how to enable use of
this standard header. Note that only the last occurrence of the header must be used, since it is
really possible that the client has already brought one.

The keyword "header" may be used to supply a different header name to replace the default
"X-Forwarded-For". This can be useful where you might already have a "X-Forwarded-For" header from a
different application (e.g. stunnel), and you need preserve it. Also if your backend server doesn't
use the "X-Forwarded-For" header and requires different one (e.g. Zeus Web Servers require
"X-Cluster-Client-IP").

Sometimes, a same HAProxy instance may be shared between a direct client access and a reverse-proxy
access (for instance when an SSL reverse-proxy is used to decrypt HTTPS traffic). It is possible to
disable the addition of the header for a known source address or network by adding the "except"
keyword followed by the network address. In this case, any source IP matching the network will not
cause an addition of this header. Most common uses are with private networks or 127.0.0.1. IPv4 and
IPv6 are both supported.

Alternatively, the keyword "if-none" states that the header will only be added if it is not present.
This should only be used in perfectly trusted environment, as this might cause a security issue if
headers reaching HAProxy are under the control of the end-user.

This option may be specified either in the frontend or in the backend. If at least one of them uses
it, the header will be added. Note that the backend's setting of the header subargument takes
precedence over the frontend's if both are defined. In the case of the "if-none" argument, if at
least one of the frontend or the backend does not specify it, it wants the addition to be mandatory,
so it wins.

Example:

```shell
# Public HTTP address also used by stunnel on the same machine
frontend www
    mode http
    option forwardfor except 127.0.0.1  # stunnel already adds the header

# Those servers want the IP Address in X-Client
backend www
    mode http
    option forwardfor header X-Client
```

See also: "option httpclose", "option http-server-close", "option http-keep-alive"

<a id="entry-4-2-option-h1-case-adjust-bogus-client"></a>

**`option h1-case-adjust-bogus-client`**

```haproxy
option h1-case-adjust-bogus-client
no option h1-case-adjust-bogus-client
```

Enable or disable the case adjustment of HTTP/1 headers sent to bogus clients

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments: none

There is no standard case for header names because, as stated in RFC7230, they are case-insensitive.
So applications must handle them in a case-insensitive manner. But some bogus applications violate
the standards and erroneously rely on the cases most commonly used by browsers. This problem becomes
critical with HTTP/2 because all header names must be exchanged in lower case, and HAProxy follows
the same convention. All header names are sent in lower case to clients and servers, regardless of
the HTTP version.

When HAProxy receives an HTTP/1 response, its header names are converted to lower case and
manipulated and sent this way to the clients. If a client is known to violate the HTTP standards and
to fail to process a response coming from HAProxy, it is possible to transform the lower case header
names to a different format when the response is formatted and sent to the client, by enabling this
option and specifying the list of headers to be reformatted using the global directives
"h1-case-adjust" or "h1-case-adjust-file". This must only be a temporary workaround for the time it
takes the client to be fixed, because clients which require such workarounds might be vulnerable to
content smuggling attacks and must absolutely be fixed.

Please note that this option will not affect standards-compliant clients.

If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled in a specific instance
by prepending the "no" keyword before it.

See also: "option h1-case-adjust-bogus-server", "h1-case-adjust", "h1-case-adjust-file".

<a id="entry-4-2-option-h1-case-adjust-bogus-server"></a>

**`option h1-case-adjust-bogus-server`**

```haproxy
option h1-case-adjust-bogus-server
no option h1-case-adjust-bogus-server
```

Enable or disable the case adjustment of HTTP/1 headers sent to bogus servers

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

There is no standard case for header names because, as stated in RFC7230, they are case-insensitive.
So applications must handle them in a case-insensitive manner. But some bogus applications violate
the standards and erroneously rely on the cases most commonly used by browsers. This problem becomes
critical with HTTP/2 because all header names must be exchanged in lower case, and HAProxy follows
the same convention. All header names are sent in lower case to clients and servers, regardless of
the HTTP version.

When HAProxy receives an HTTP/1 request, its header names are converted to lower case and
manipulated and sent this way to the servers. If a server is known to violate the HTTP standards and
to fail to process a request coming from HAProxy, it is possible to transform the lower case header
names to a different format when the request is formatted and sent to the server, by enabling this
option and specifying the list of headers to be reformatted using the global directives
"h1-case-adjust" or "h1-case-adjust-file". This must only be a temporary workaround for the time it
takes the server to be fixed, because servers which require such workarounds might be vulnerable to
content smuggling attacks and must absolutely be fixed.

Please note that this option will not affect standards-compliant servers.

If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled in a specific instance
by prepending the "no" keyword before it.

See also: "option h1-case-adjust-bogus-client", "h1-case-adjust", "h1-case-adjust-file".

<a id="entry-4-2-option-http-buffer-request"></a>

**`option http-buffer-request`**

```haproxy
option http-buffer-request
no option http-buffer-request
```

Enable or disable waiting for whole HTTP request body before proceeding

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

It is sometimes desirable to wait for the body of an HTTP request before taking a decision. This is
what is being done by "balance url_param" for example. The first use case is to buffer requests from
slow clients before connecting to the server. Another use case consists in taking the routing
decision based on the request body's contents. This option placed in a frontend or backend forces
the HTTP processing to wait until either the whole body is received or the request buffer is full.
It can have undesired side effects with some applications abusing HTTP by expecting unbuffered
transmissions between the frontend and the backend, so this should definitely not be used by
default.

See also: "option http-no-delay", "timeout http-request", "http-request wait-for-body"

<a id="entry-4-2-option-http-drop-request-trailers"></a>

**`option http-drop-request-trailers`**

```haproxy
option http-drop-request-trailers
no option http-drop-request-trailers
```

Drop the HTTP trailers from the request when sent to the server

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| no \| yes

Arguments: none

When this option is enabled, any HTTP trailers found in a request will be dropped before sending it
to the server.

RFC9110#section-6.5.1 stated that trailer fields could be merged into the header fields. It should
be done on purpose, but it may be a problem for some applications, especially if malicious clients
hide sensitive header fields in the trailers part and some intermediaries merge them with headers
with no specific checks. In that case, this option can be enabled on the backend to drop any trailer
fields found in requests before sending them to the server.

If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled in a specific instance
by prepending the "no" keyword before it.

See also: "option http-drop-response-trailers"

<a id="entry-4-2-option-http-drop-response-trailers"></a>

**`option http-drop-response-trailers`**

```haproxy
option http-drop-response-trailers
no option http-drop-response-trailers
```

Drop the HTTP trailers from the response when sent to the client

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments: none

This option is similar to "option http-drop-request-trailers" but it must be used to drop trailer
fields from responses before sending them to clients.

If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled in a specific instance
by prepending the "no" keyword before it.

See also: "option http-drop-request-trailers"

<a id="entry-4-2-option-http-ignore-probes"></a>

**`option http-ignore-probes`**

```haproxy
option http-ignore-probes
no option http-ignore-probes
```

Enable or disable logging of null connections and request timeouts

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments: none

Recently some browsers started to implement a "pre-connect" feature consisting in speculatively
connecting to some recently visited web sites just in case the user would like to visit them. This
results in many connections being established to web sites, which end up in 408 Request Timeout if
the timeout strikes first, or 400 Bad Request when the browser decides to close them first. These
ones pollute the log and feed the error counters. There was already "option dontlognull" but it's
insufficient in this case. Instead, this option does the following things: - prevent any 400/408
message from being sent to the client if nothing was received over a connection before it was
closed; - prevent any log from being emitted in this situation; - prevent any error counter from
being incremented

That way the empty connection is silently ignored. Note that it is better not to use this unless it
is clear that it is needed, because it will hide real problems. The most common reason for not
receiving a request and seeing a 408 is due to an MTU inconsistency between the client and an
intermediary element such as a VPN, which blocks too large packets. These issues are generally seen
with POST requests as well as GET with large cookies. The logs are often the only way to detect
them.

If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled in a specific instance
by prepending the "no" keyword before it.

See also: "log", "dontlognull", "errorfile", and [section 8](/docs/haproxy/configuration-logging/) about logging.

<a id="entry-4-2-option-http-keep-alive"></a>

**`option http-keep-alive`**

```haproxy
option http-keep-alive
no option http-keep-alive
```

Enable or disable HTTP keep-alive from client to server for HTTP/1.x connections

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

By default HAProxy operates in keep-alive mode with regards to persistent HTTP/1.x connections: for
each connection it processes each request and response, and leaves the connection idle on both
sides. This mode may be changed by several options such as "option http-server-close" or "option
httpclose". This option allows to set back the keep-alive mode, which can be useful when another
mode was used in a defaults section.

Setting "option http-keep-alive" enables HTTP keep-alive mode on the client-and server- sides. This
provides the lowest latency on the client side (slow network) and the fastest session reuse on the
server side at the expense of maintaining idle connections to the servers. In general, it is
possible with this option to achieve approximately twice the request rate that the
"http-server-close" option achieves on small objects. There are mainly two situations where this
option may be useful:

    - when the server is non-HTTP compliant and authenticates the connection
      instead of requests (e.g. NTLM authentication)

    - when the cost of establishing the connection to the server is significant
      compared to the cost of retrieving the associated object from the server.

This last case can happen when the server is a fast static server of cache.

At the moment, logs will not indicate whether requests came from the same session or not. The accept
date reported in the logs corresponds to the end of the previous request, and the request time
corresponds to the time spent waiting for a new request. The keep-alive request time is still bound
to the timeout defined by "timeout http-keep-alive" or "timeout http-request" if not set.

This option disables and replaces any previous "option httpclose" or "option http-server-close".

See also: "option httpclose",, "option http-server-close", "option prefer-last-server" and "option
http-pretend-keepalive".

<a id="entry-4-2-option-http-no-delay"></a>

**`option http-no-delay`**

```haproxy
option http-no-delay
no option http-no-delay
```

Instruct the system to favor low interactive delays over performance in HTTP

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

In HTTP, each payload is unidirectional and has no notion of interactivity. Any agent is expected to
queue data somewhat for a reasonably low delay. There are some very rare server-to-server
applications that abuse the HTTP protocol and expect the payload phase to be highly interactive,
with many interleaved data chunks in both directions within a single request. This is absolutely not
supported by the HTTP specification and will not work across most proxies or servers. When such
applications attempt to do this through HAProxy, it works but they will experience high delays due
to the network optimizations which favor performance by instructing the system to wait for enough
data to be available in order to only send full packets. Typical delays are around 200 ms per round
trip. Note that this only happens with abnormal uses. Normal uses such as CONNECT requests nor
WebSockets are not affected.

When "option http-no-delay" is present in either the frontend or the backend used by a connection,
all such optimizations will be disabled in order to make the exchanges as fast as possible. Of
course this offers no guarantee on the functionality, as it may break at any other place. But if it
works via HAProxy, it will work as fast as possible. This option should never be used by default,
and should never be used at all unless such a buggy application is discovered. The impact of using
this option is an increase of bandwidth usage and CPU usage, which may significantly lower
performance in high latency environments.

See also: "option http-buffer-request"

<a id="entry-4-2-option-http-pretend-keepalive"></a>

**`option http-pretend-keepalive`**

```haproxy
option http-pretend-keepalive
no option http-pretend-keepalive
```

Define whether HAProxy will announce keepalive for HTTP/1.x connection to the server or not

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

When running with "option http-server-close" or "option httpclose", HAProxy adds a "Connection:
close" header to the HTTP/1.x request forwarded to the server. Unfortunately, when some servers see
this header, they automatically refrain from using the chunked encoding for responses of unknown
length, while this is totally unrelated. The effect is that a client or a cache could receive an
incomplete response without being aware of it, and consider the response complete.

By setting "option http-pretend-keepalive", HAProxy will make the server believe it will keep the
connection alive. The server will then not fall back to the abnormal undesired above. When HAProxy
gets the whole response, it will close the connection with the server just as it would do with the
"option httpclose". That way the client gets a normal response and the connection is correctly
closed on the server side.

It is recommended not to enable this option by default, because most servers will more efficiently
close the connection themselves after the last packet, and release its buffers slightly earlier.
Also, the added packet on the network could slightly reduce the overall peak performance. However it
is worth noting that when this option is enabled, HAProxy will have slightly less work to do. So if
HAProxy is the bottleneck on the whole architecture, enabling this option might save a few CPU
cycles.

This option may be set in backend and listen sections. Using it in a frontend section will be
ignored and a warning will be reported during startup. It is a backend related option, so there is
no real reason to set it on a frontend.

If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled in a specific instance
by prepending the "no" keyword before it.

See also: "option httpclose", "option http-server-close", and "option http-keep-alive"

<a id="entry-4-2-option-http-restrict-req-hdr-names"></a>

**`option http-restrict-req-hdr-names { preserve | delete | reject }`**

```haproxy
option http-restrict-req-hdr-names { preserve | delete | reject }
```

Set HAProxy policy about HTTP request header names containing characters outside the
"[a-zA-Z0-9-]" charset

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
preserve  disable the filtering. It is the default mode for HTTP proxies
          with no FastCGI application configured.

delete    remove request headers with a name containing a character
          outside the "[a-zA-Z0-9-]" charset. It is the default mode for
          HTTP backends with a configured FastCGI application.

reject    reject the request with a 403-Forbidden response if it contains a
          header name with a character outside the "[a-zA-Z0-9-]" charset.
```

This option may be used to restrict the request header names to alphanumeric and hyphen characters
([A-Za-z0-9-]). This may be mandatory to interoperate with non-HTTP compliant servers that fail to
handle some characters in header names. It may also be mandatory for FastCGI applications because
all non-alphanumeric characters in header names are replaced by an underscore ('\_'). Thus, it is
easily possible to mix up header names and bypass some rules. For instance, "X-Forwarded-For" and
"X_Forwarded-For" headers are both converted to "HTTP_X_FORWARDED_FOR" in FastCGI.

Note this option is evaluated per proxy and after the http-request rules evaluation.

<a id="entry-4-2-option-http-server-close"></a>

**`option http-server-close`**

```haproxy
option http-server-close
no option http-server-close
```

Enable or disable HTTP/1.x connection closing on the server side

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

By default HAProxy operates in keep-alive mode with regards to persistent HTTP/1.x connections: for
each connection it processes each request and response, and leaves the connection idle on both
sides. This mode may be changed by several options such as "option http-server-close" or "option
httpclose". Setting "option http-server-close" enables HTTP connection-close mode on the server side
while keeping the ability to support HTTP keep-alive and pipelining on the client side. This
provides the lowest latency on the client side (slow network) and the fastest session reuse on the
server side to save server resources, similarly to "option httpclose". It also permits non-keepalive
capable servers to be served in keep-alive mode to the clients if they conform to the requirements
of RFC7230. Please note that some servers do not always conform to those requirements when they see
"Connection: close" in the request. The effect will be that keep-alive will never be used. A
workaround consists in enabling "option http-pretend-keepalive".

At the moment, logs will not indicate whether requests came from the same session or not. The accept
date reported in the logs corresponds to the end of the previous request, and the request time
corresponds to the time spent waiting for a new request. The keep-alive request time is still bound
to the timeout defined by "timeout http-keep-alive" or "timeout http-request" if not set.

This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if at least one of the
frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled. It disables and replaces any previous
"option httpclose" or "option http-keep-alive". Please check [section 4](/docs/haproxy/proxies/) ("Proxies") to see how this
option combines with others when frontend and backend options differ.

If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled in a specific instance
by prepending the "no" keyword before it.

See also: "option httpclose", "option http-pretend-keepalive" and "option http-keep-alive".

<a id="entry-4-2-option-http-use-proxy-header"></a>

**`option http-use-proxy-header`**

```haproxy
option http-use-proxy-header
no option http-use-proxy-header
```

Make use of non-standard Proxy-Connection header instead of Connection

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments: none

While RFC7230 explicitly states that HTTP/1.1 agents must use the Connection header to indicate
their wish of persistent or non-persistent connections, both browsers and proxies ignore this header
for proxied connections and make use of the undocumented, non-standard Proxy-Connection header
instead. The issue begins when trying to put a load balancer between browsers and such proxies,
because there will be a difference between what HAProxy understands and what the client and the
proxy agree on.

By setting this option in a frontend, HAProxy can automatically switch to use that non-standard
header if it sees proxied requests. A proxied request is defined here as one where the URI begins
with neither a '/' nor a '\*'. This is incompatible with the HTTP tunnel mode. Note that this option
can only be specified in a frontend and will affect the request along its whole life.

Also, when this option is set, a request which requires authentication will automatically switch to
use proxy authentication headers if it is itself a proxied request. That makes it possible to check
or enforce authentication in front of an existing proxy.

This option should normally never be used, except in front of a proxy.

See also: "option httpclose", and "option http-server-close".

<a id="entry-4-2-option-httpchk"></a>

**`option httpchk`**

```haproxy
option httpchk
option httpchk <uri>
option httpchk <method> <uri>
option httpchk <method> <uri> <version>
option httpchk <method> <uri> <version> <host>
```

Enables HTTP protocol to check on the servers health

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<method>  is the optional HTTP method used with the requests. When not set,
          the "OPTIONS" method is used, as it generally requires low server
          processing and is easy to filter out from the logs. Any method
          may be used, though it is not recommended to invent non-standard
          ones.

<uri>     is the URI referenced in the HTTP requests. It defaults to " / "
          which is accessible by default on almost any server, but may be
          changed to any other URI. Query strings are permitted.

<version> is the optional HTTP version string. It defaults to "HTTP/1.0"
          but some servers might behave incorrectly in HTTP 1.0, so turning
          it to HTTP/1.1 may sometimes help. Note that the Host field is
          mandatory in HTTP/1.1.

<host>    is the optional HTTP Host header value. It is not set by default.
          It is a log-format string.
```

By default, server health checks only consist in trying to establish a TCP connection. When "option
httpchk" is specified, a complete HTTP request is sent once the TCP connection is established, and
responses 2xx and 3xx are considered valid, while all other ones indicate a server failure,
including the lack of any response.

Combined with "http-check" directives, it is possible to customize the request sent during the HTTP
health checks or the matching rules on the response. It is also possible to configure a send/expect
sequence, just like with the directive "tcp-check" for TCP health checks.

The server configuration is used by default to open connections to perform HTTP health checks. By it
is also possible to overwrite server parameters using "http-check connect" rules.

"httpchk" option does not necessarily require an HTTP backend, it also works with plain TCP
backends. This is particularly useful to check simple scripts bound to some dedicated ports using
the inetd daemon. However, it will always internally relies on an HTX multiplexer. Thus, it means
the request formatting and the response parsing will be strict.

Examples:

```shell
# Relay HTTPS traffic to Apache instance and check service availability
# using HTTP request "OPTIONS * HTTP/1.1" on port 80.
backend https_relay
    mode tcp
    option httpchk OPTIONS * HTTP/1.1
    http-check send hdr Host www
    server apache1 192.168.1.1:443 check port 80
```

See also: "option ssl-hello-chk", "option smtpchk", "option mysql-check", "option pgsql-check",
"http-check" and the "check", "port" and "inter" server options.

<a id="entry-4-2-option-httpclose"></a>

**`option httpclose`**

```haproxy
option httpclose
no option httpclose
```

Enable or disable HTTP/1.x connection closing

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

By default HAProxy operates in keep-alive mode with regards to persistent HTTP/1.x connections: for
each connection it processes each request and response, and leaves the connection idle on both
sides. This mode may be changed by several options such as "option http-server-close" or "option
httpclose".

If "option httpclose" is set, HAProxy will close the client or the server connection, depending
where the option is set. The frontend is considered for client connections while the backend is
considered for server ones. If the option is set on a listener, it is applied both on client and
server connections. It will check if a "Connection: close" header is already set in each direction,
and will add one if missing.

This option may also be combined with "option http-pretend-keepalive", which will disable sending of
the "Connection: close" request header, but will still cause the connection to be closed once the
whole response is received.

It disables and replaces any previous "option http-server-close" or "option http-keep-alive".

If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled in a specific instance
by prepending the "no" keyword before it.

See also: "option http-server-close".

<a id="entry-4-2-option-httplog"></a>

**`option httplog [ clf ]`**

```haproxy
option httplog [ clf ]
```

Enable logging of HTTP request, stream state and timers

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments:

```text
clf       if the "clf" argument is added, then the output format will be
          the CLF format instead of HAProxy's default HTTP format. You can
          use this when you need to feed HAProxy's logs through a specific
          log analyzer which only support the CLF format and which is not
          extensible.
```

By default, the log output format is very poor, as it only contains the source and destination
addresses, and the instance name. By specifying "option httplog", each log line turns into a much
richer format including, but not limited to, the HTTP request, the connection timers, the stream
status, the connections numbers, the captured headers and cookies, the frontend, backend and server
name, and of course the source address and ports.

Specifying only "option httplog" will automatically clear the 'clf' mode if it was set by default.

"option httplog" overrides any previous "log-format" directive.

See also: [section 8](/docs/haproxy/configuration-logging/) about logging.

<a id="entry-4-2-option-httpslog"></a>

**`option httpslog`**

```haproxy
option httpslog
```

Enable logging of HTTPS request, stream state and timers

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

By default, the log output format is very poor, as it only contains the source and destination
addresses, and the instance name. By specifying "option httpslog", each log line turns into a much
richer format including, but not limited to, the HTTP request, the connection timers, the stream
status, the connections numbers, the captured headers and cookies, the frontend, backend and server
name, the SSL certificate verification and SSL handshake statuses, and of course the source address
and ports.

"option httpslog" overrides any previous "log-format" directive.

See also: [section 8](/docs/haproxy/configuration-logging/) about logging.

<a id="entry-4-2-option-idle-close-on-response"></a>

**`option idle-close-on-response`**

```haproxy
option idle-close-on-response
no option idle-close-on-response
```

Avoid closing idle frontend connections if a soft stop is in progress

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments: none

By default, idle connections will be closed during a soft stop. In some environments, a client
talking to the proxy may have prepared some idle connections in order to send requests later. If
there is no proper retry on write errors, this can result in errors while haproxy is reloading. Even
though a proper implementation should retry on connection/write errors, this option was introduced
to support backwards compatibility with haproxy prior to version 2.4. Indeed before v2.4, haproxy
used to wait for a last request and response to add a "connection: close" header before closing,
thus notifying the client that the connection would not be reusable.

In a real life example, this behavior was seen in AWS using the ALB in front of a haproxy. The end
result was ALB sending 502 during haproxy reloads.

Users are warned that using this option may increase the number of old processes if connections
remain idle for too long. Adjusting the client timeouts and/or the "hard-stop-after" parameter
accordingly might be needed in case of frequent reloads.

See also: "timeout client", "timeout client-fin", "timeout http-request", "hard-stop-after"

<a id="entry-4-2-option-independent-streams"></a>

**`option independent-streams`**

```haproxy
option independent-streams
no option independent-streams
```

Enable or disable independent timeout processing for both directions

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

By default, when data is sent over a socket, both the write timeout and the read timeout for that
socket are refreshed, because we consider that there is activity on that socket, and we have no
other means of guessing if we should receive data or not.

While this default behavior is desirable for almost all applications, there exists a situation where
it is desirable to disable it, and only refresh the read timeout if there are incoming data. This
happens on streams with large timeouts and low amounts of exchanged data such as telnet session. If
the server suddenly disappears, the output data accumulates in the system's socket buffers, both
timeouts are correctly refreshed, and there is no way to know the server does not receive them, so
we don't timeout. However, when the underlying protocol always echoes sent data, it would be enough
by itself to detect the issue using the read timeout. Note that this problem does not happen with
more verbose protocols because data won't accumulate long in the socket buffers.

When this option is set on the frontend, it will disable read timeout updates on data sent to the
client. There probably is little use of this case. When the option is set on the backend, it will
disable read timeout updates on data sent to the server. Doing so will typically break large HTTP
posts from slow lines, so use it with caution.

See also: "timeout client", "timeout server" and "timeout tunnel"

<a id="entry-4-2-option-ldap-check"></a>

**`option ldap-check`**

```haproxy
option ldap-check
```

Use LDAPv3 health checks for server testing

May be used in the following contexts: tcp

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

It is possible to test that the server correctly talks LDAPv3 instead of just testing that it
accepts the TCP connection. When this option is set, an LDAPv3 anonymous simple bind message is sent
to the server, and the response is analyzed to find an LDAPv3 bind response message.

The server is considered valid only when the LDAP response contains success resultCode
(<http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc4511#section-4.1.9>).

Logging of bind requests is server dependent see your documentation how to configure it.

Example:

```text
option ldap-check
```

See also: "option httpchk"

<a id="entry-4-2-option-log-health-checks"></a>

**`option log-health-checks`**

```haproxy
option log-health-checks
no option log-health-checks
```

Enable or disable logging of health checks status updates

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

By default, failed health check are logged if server is UP and successful health checks are logged
if server is DOWN, so the amount of additional information is limited.

When this option is enabled, any change of the health check status or to the server's health will be
logged, so that it becomes possible to know that a server was failing occasional checks before
crashing, or exactly when it failed to respond a valid HTTP status, then when the port started to
reject connections, then when the server stopped responding at all.

Note that status changes not caused by health checks (e.g. enable/disable on the CLI) are
intentionally not logged by this option.

See also: "option httpchk", "option ldap-check", "option mysql-check", "option pgsql-check", "option
redis-check", "option smtpchk", "option tcp-check", "log" and [section 8](/docs/haproxy/configuration-logging/) about logging.

<a id="entry-4-2-option-log-separate-errors"></a>

**`option log-separate-errors`**

```haproxy
option log-separate-errors
no option log-separate-errors
```

Change log level for non-completely successful connections

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments: none

Sometimes looking for errors in logs is not easy. This option makes HAProxy raise the level of logs
containing potentially interesting information such as errors, timeouts, retries, redispatches, or
HTTP status codes 5xx. The level changes from "info" to "err". This makes it possible to log them
separately to a different file with most syslog daemons. Be careful not to remove them from the
original file, otherwise you would lose ordering which provides very important information.

Using this option, large sites dealing with several thousand connections per second may log normal
traffic to a rotating buffer and only archive smaller error logs.

See also: "log", "dontlognull", "dontlog-normal" and [section 8](/docs/haproxy/configuration-logging/) about logging.

<a id="entry-4-2-option-logasap"></a>

**`option logasap`**

```haproxy
option logasap
no option logasap
```

Enable or disable early logging.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments: none

By default, logs are emitted when all the log format aliases and sample fetches used in the
definition of the log-format string return a value, or when the stream is terminated. This allows
the built in log-format strings to account for the transfer time, or the number of bytes in log
messages.

When handling long lived connections such as large file transfers or RDP, it may take a while for
the request or connection to appear in the logs. Using "option logasap", the log message is created
as soon as the server connection is established in mode tcp, or as soon as the server sends the
complete headers in mode http. Missing information in the logs will be the total number of bytes
which will only indicate the amount of data transferred before the message was created and the total
time which will not take the remainder of the connection life or transfer time into account. For the
case of HTTP, it is good practice to capture the Content-Length response header so that the logs at
least indicate how many bytes are expected to be transferred.

Examples:

```text
listen http_proxy 0.0.0.0:80
    mode http
    option httplog
    option logasap
    log 192.168.2.200 local3
```

```text
    >>> Feb  6 12:14:14 localhost \
          haproxy[14389]: 10.0.1.2:33317 [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655] http-in \
          static/srv1 9/10/7/14/+30 200 +243 - - ---- 3/1/1/1/0 1/0 \
          "GET /image.iso HTTP/1.0"
```

See also: "option httplog", "capture response header", and [section 8](/docs/haproxy/configuration-logging/) about logging.

<a id="entry-4-2-option-mysql-check"></a>

**`option mysql-check [ user <username> [ { post-41 | pre-41 | post-80 } ] ]`**

```haproxy
option mysql-check [ user <username> [ { post-41 | pre-41 | post-80 } ] ]
```

Use MySQL health checks for server testing

May be used in the following contexts: tcp

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<username> This is the username which will be used when connecting to MySQL
           server.
post-41    Send post v4.1 client compatible checks (the default)
pre-41     Send pre v4.1 client compatible checks
post-80    Send post v8.0 client compatible checks with CLIENT_PLUGIN_AUTH
           capability set and mysql_native_password as the authentication
           plugin. Use this option when connecting to MySQL 8.0+ servers
           where the health check user is created with mysql_native_password
           authentication. Example:
             CREATE USER 'haproxy'@'%' IDENTIFIED WITH mysql_native_password BY '';
```

If you specify a username, the check consists of sending two MySQL packet, one Client Authentication
packet, and one QUIT packet, to correctly close MySQL session. We then parse the MySQL Handshake
Initialization packet and/or Error packet. It is a basic but useful test which does not produce
error nor aborted connect on the server. However, it requires an unlocked authorised user without a
password. To create a basic limited user in MySQL with optional resource limits:

```text
CREATE USER '<username>'@'<ip_of_haproxy|network_of_haproxy/netmask>'
/*!50701 WITH MAX_QUERIES_PER_HOUR 1 MAX_UPDATES_PER_HOUR 0 */
/*M!100201 MAX_STATEMENT_TIME 0.0001 */;
```

If you don't specify a username (it is deprecated and not recommended), the check only consists in
parsing the Mysql Handshake Initialization packet or Error packet, we don't send anything in this
mode. It was reported that it can generate lockout if check is too frequent and/or if there is not
enough traffic. In fact, you need in this case to check MySQL "max_connect_errors" value as if a
connection is established successfully within fewer than MySQL "max_connect_errors" attempts after a
previous connection was interrupted, the error count for the host is cleared to zero. If HAProxy's
server get blocked, the "FLUSH HOSTS" statement is the only way to unblock it.

Remember that this does not check database presence nor database consistency. To do this, you can
use an external check with xinetd for example.

The check requires MySQL \>=3.22, for older version, please use TCP check.

Most often, an incoming MySQL server needs to see the client's IP address for various purposes,
including IP privilege matching and connection logging. When possible, it is often wise to
masquerade the client's IP address when connecting to the server using the "usesrc" argument of the
"source" keyword, which requires the transparent proxy feature to be compiled in, and the MySQL
server to route the client via the machine hosting HAProxy.

See also: "option httpchk"

<a id="entry-4-2-option-nolinger"></a>

**`option nolinger`**

```haproxy
option nolinger
no option nolinger
```

Enable or disable immediate session resource cleaning after close

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

When clients or servers abort connections in a dirty way (e.g. they are physically disconnected),
the session timeouts triggers and the session is closed. But it will remain in FIN_WAIT1 state for
some time in the system, using some resources and possibly limiting the ability to establish newer
connections.

When this happens, it is possible to activate "option nolinger" which forces the system to
immediately remove any socket's pending data on close. Thus, a TCP RST is emitted, any pending data
are truncated, and the session is instantly purged from the system's tables. The generally visible
effect for a client is that responses are truncated if the close happens with a last block of data
(e.g. on a redirect or error response). On the server side, it may help release the source ports
immediately when forwarding a client aborts in tunnels. In both cases, TCP resets are emitted and
given that the session is instantly destroyed, there will be no retransmit. On a lossy network this
can increase problems, especially when there is a firewall on the lossy side, because the firewall
might see and process the reset (hence purge its session) and block any further traffic for this
session,, including retransmits from the other side. So if the other side doesn't receive it, it
will never receive any RST again, and the firewall might log many blocked packets.

For all these reasons, it is strongly recommended NOT to use this option, unless absolutely needed
as a last resort. In most situations, using the "client-fin" or "server-fin" timeouts achieves
similar results with a more reliable behavior. On Linux it's also possible to use the "tcp-ut" bind
or server setting.

This option may be used both on frontends and backends, depending on the side where it is required.
Use it on the frontend for clients, and on the backend for servers. While this option is technically
supported in "defaults" sections, it must really not be used there as it risks to accidentally
propagate to sections that must no use it and to cause problems there.

If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled in a specific instance
by prepending the "no" keyword before it.

See also: "timeout client-fin", "timeout server-fin", "tcp-ut" bind or server keywords.

<a id="entry-4-2-option-originalto"></a>

**`option originalto [ except <network> ] [ header <name> ]`**

```haproxy
option originalto [ except <network> ] [ header <name> ]
```

Enable insertion of the X-Original-To header to requests sent to servers

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<network> is an optional argument used to disable this option for sources
          matching <network>
<name>    an optional argument to specify a different "X-Original-To"
          header name.
```

Since HAProxy can work in transparent mode, every request from a client can be redirected to the
proxy and HAProxy itself can proxy every request to a complex SQUID environment and the destination
host from SO_ORIGINAL_DST will be lost. This is annoying when you want access rules based on
destination ip addresses. To solve this problem, a new HTTP header "X-Original-To" may be added by
HAProxy to all requests sent to the server. This header contains a value representing the original
destination IP address. Since this must be configured to always use the last occurrence of this
header only. Note that only the last occurrence of the header must be used, since it is really
possible that the client has already brought one.

The keyword "header" may be used to supply a different header name to replace the default
"X-Original-To". This can be useful where you might already have a "X-Original-To" header from a
different application, and you need preserve it. Also if your backend server doesn't use the
"X-Original-To" header and requires different one.

Sometimes, a same HAProxy instance may be shared between a direct client access and a reverse-proxy
access (for instance when an SSL reverse-proxy is used to decrypt HTTPS traffic). It is possible to
disable the addition of the header for a known destination address or network by adding the "except"
keyword followed by the network address. In this case, any destination IP matching the network will
not cause an addition of this header. Most common uses are with private networks or 127.0.0.1. IPv4
and IPv6 are both supported.

This option may be specified either in the frontend or in the backend. If at least one of them uses
it, the header will be added. Note that the backend's setting of the header subargument takes
precedence over the frontend's if both are defined.

Examples:

```shell
# Original Destination address
frontend www
    mode http
    option originalto except 127.0.0.1

# Those servers want the IP Address in X-Client-Dst
backend www
    mode http
    option originalto header X-Client-Dst
```

See also: "option httpclose", "option http-server-close".

<a id="entry-4-2-option-persist"></a>

**`option persist`**

```haproxy
option persist
no option persist
```

Enable or disable forced persistence on down servers

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

When an HTTP request reaches a backend with a cookie which references a dead server, by default it
is redispatched to another server. It is possible to force the request to be sent to the dead server
first using "option persist" if absolutely needed. A common use case is when servers are under
extreme load and spend their time flapping. In this case, the users would still be directed to the
server they opened the session on, in the hope they would be correctly served. It is recommended to
use "option redispatch" in conjunction with this option so that in the event it would not be
possible to connect to the server at all (server definitely dead), the client would finally be
redirected to another valid server.

If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled in a specific instance
by prepending the "no" keyword before it.

See also: "option redispatch", "retries", "force-persist"

<a id="entry-4-2-option-pgsql-check-user"></a>

**`option pgsql-check user <username>`**

```haproxy
option pgsql-check user <username>
```

Use PostgreSQL health checks for server testing

May be used in the following contexts: tcp

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<username> This is the username which will be used when connecting to
           PostgreSQL server.
```

The check sends a PostgreSQL StartupMessage and waits for either Authentication request or
ErrorResponse message. It is a basic but useful test which does not produce error nor aborted
connect on the server. This check is identical with the "mysql-check".

See also: "option httpchk"

<a id="entry-4-2-option-prefer-last-server"></a>

**`option prefer-last-server`**

```haproxy
option prefer-last-server
no option prefer-last-server
```

Allow multiple load balanced requests to remain on the same server

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

When the load balancing algorithm in use is not deterministic, and a previous request was sent to a
server to which HAProxy still holds a connection, it is sometimes desirable that subsequent requests
on a same session go to the same server as much as possible. Note that this is different from
persistence, as we only indicate a preference which HAProxy tries to apply without any form of
warranty. The real use is for keep-alive connections sent to servers. When this option is used,
HAProxy will try to reuse the same connection that is attached to the server instead of rebalancing
to another server, causing a close of the connection. This can make sense for static file servers.
It does not make much sense to use this in combination with hashing algorithms. Note, HAProxy
already automatically tries to stick to a server which sends a 401 or to a proxy which sends a 407
(authentication required), when the load balancing algorithm is not deterministic. This is mandatory
for use with the broken NTLM authentication challenge, and significantly helps in troubleshooting
some faulty applications. Option prefer-last-server might be desirable in these environments as
well, to avoid redistributing the traffic after every other response.

It may be useful to precise here, which load balancing algorithms are considered deterministic.
Deterministic algorithms will always select the same server for a given client data, assuming the
set of available servers has not changed. In general, deterministic algorithms involve hashing or
lookups on the incoming requests to choose the target server. However, this is not always the case;
"static-rr", for example, can be also considered as deterministic because the server choice is based
on the server's static weight, making the selection predictable. "sticky" algorithm provides
deterministic routing for the returning clients.

As for non-deterministic algorithms, these algorithms select a server based on dynamic server state
or simple rotation, so two consecutive requests are not guaranteed to land on the same server.
option prefer-last-server is designed specifically for these. roundrobin, leastconn are examples of
such algorithms.

If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled in a specific instance
by prepending the "no" keyword before it.

See also: "option http-keep-alive"

<a id="entry-4-2-option-redispatch"></a>

**`option redispatch`**

```haproxy
option redispatch
option redispatch <interval>
no option redispatch
```

Enable or disable session redistribution in case of connection failure

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<interval> The optional integer value that controls how often redispatches
           occur when retrying connections. Positive value P indicates a
           redispatch is desired on every Pth retry, and negative value
           N indicate a redispatch is desired on the Nth retry prior to the
           last retry. For example, the default of -1 preserves the
           historical behavior of redispatching on the last retry, a
           positive value of 1 would indicate a redispatch on every retry,
           and a positive value of 3 would indicate a redispatch on every
           third retry. You can disable redispatches with a value of 0.

```

In HTTP mode, if a server designated by a cookie is down, clients may definitely stick to it, for
example when using "option persist" or "force-persist", because they cannot flush the cookie, so
they will not be able to access the service anymore.

Specifying "option redispatch" will allow the proxy to break cookie or consistent hash based
persistence and redistribute them to a working server.

Active servers are selected from a subset of the list of available servers. Active servers that are
not down or in maintenance (i.e., whose health is not checked or that have been checked as "up"),
are selected in the following order:

```text
1. Any active, non-backup server, if any, or,

2. If the "allbackups" option is not set, the first backup server in the
   list, or

3. If the "allbackups" option is set, any backup server.
```

When a retry occurs, HAProxy tries to select another server than the last one. The new server is
selected from the current list of servers.

Sometimes, if the list is updated between retries (e.g., if numerous retries occur and last longer
than the time needed to check that a server is down, remove it from the list and fall back on the
list of backup servers), connections may be redirected to a backup server, though.

It also allows to retry connections to another server in case of multiple connection failures. Of
course, it requires having "retries" set to a nonzero value.

If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled in a specific instance
by prepending the "no" keyword before it.

See also: "option persist", "force-persist", "retries"

<a id="entry-4-2-option-redis-check"></a>

**`option redis-check`**

```haproxy
option redis-check
```

Use redis health checks for server testing

May be used in the following contexts: tcp

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

It is possible to test that the server correctly talks REDIS protocol instead of just testing that
it accepts the TCP connection. When this option is set, a PING redis command is sent to the server,
and the response is analyzed to find the "+PONG" response message.

Example:

```text
option redis-check
```

See also: "option httpchk", "option tcp-check", "tcp-check expect"

<a id="entry-4-2-option-smtpchk"></a>

**`option smtpchk`**

```haproxy
option smtpchk
option smtpchk <hello> <domain>
```

Use SMTP health checks for server testing

May be used in the following contexts: tcp

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<hello>   is an optional argument. It is the "hello" command to use. It can
          be either "HELO" (for SMTP) or "EHLO" (for ESMTP). All other
          values will be turned into the default command ("HELO").

<domain>  is the domain name to present to the server. It may only be
          specified (and is mandatory) if the hello command has been
          specified. By default, "localhost" is used.
```

When "option smtpchk" is set, the health checks will consist in TCP connections followed by an SMTP
command. By default, this command is "HELO localhost". The server's return code is analyzed and only
return codes starting with a "2" will be considered as valid. All other responses, including a lack
of response will constitute an error and will indicate a dead server.

This test is meant to be used with SMTP servers or relays. Depending on the request, it is possible
that some servers do not log each connection attempt, so you may want to experiment to improve the
behavior. Using telnet on port 25 is often easier than adjusting the configuration.

Most often, an incoming SMTP server needs to see the client's IP address for various purposes,
including spam filtering, anti-spoofing and logging. When possible, it is often wise to masquerade
the client's IP address when connecting to the server using the "usesrc" argument of the "source"
keyword, which requires the transparent proxy feature to be compiled in.

Example:

```text
option smtpchk HELO mydomain.org
```

See also: "option httpchk", "source"

option socket-stats no option socket-stats

Enable or disable collecting & providing separate statistics for each socket.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments: none

<a id="entry-4-2-option-splice-auto"></a>

**`option splice-auto`**

```haproxy
option splice-auto
no option splice-auto
```

Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets in both directions

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, HAProxy will automatically
evaluate the opportunity to use kernel tcp splicing to forward data between the client and the
server, in either direction. HAProxy uses heuristics to estimate if kernel splicing might improve
performance or not. Both directions are handled independently. Note that the heuristics used are not
much aggressive in order to limit excessive use of splicing. This option requires splicing to be
enabled at compile time, and may be globally disabled with the global option "nosplice". Since
splice uses pipes, using it requires that there are enough spare pipes.

Important note: kernel-based TCP splicing is a Linux-specific feature which first appeared in kernel
2.6.25. It offers kernel-based acceleration to transfer data between sockets without copying these
data to user-space, thus providing noticeable performance gains and CPU cycles savings. Since many
early implementations are buggy, corrupt data and/or are inefficient, this feature is not enabled by
default, and it should be used with extreme care. While it is not possible to detect the correctness
of an implementation, 2.6.29 is the first version offering a properly working implementation. In
case of doubt, splicing may be globally disabled using the global "nosplice" keyword.

Example:

```text
option splice-auto
```

If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled in a specific instance
by prepending the "no" keyword before it.

See also: "option splice-request", "option splice-response", and global options "nosplice" and
"maxpipes"

<a id="entry-4-2-option-splice-request"></a>

**`option splice-request`**

```haproxy
option splice-request
no option splice-request
```

Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets for requests

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, HAProxy will use kernel tcp
splicing whenever possible to forward data going from the client to the server. It might still use
the recv/send scheme if there are no spare pipes left. This option requires splicing to be enabled
at compile time, and may be globally disabled with the global option "nosplice". Since splice uses
pipes, using it requires that there are enough spare pipes.

Important note: see "option splice-auto" for usage limitations.

Example:

```text
option splice-request
```

If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled in a specific instance
by prepending the "no" keyword before it.

See also: "option splice-auto", "option splice-response", and global options "nosplice" and
"maxpipes"

<a id="entry-4-2-option-splice-response"></a>

**`option splice-response`**

```haproxy
option splice-response
no option splice-response
```

Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets for responses

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, HAProxy will use kernel tcp
splicing whenever possible to forward data going from the server to the client. It might still use
the recv/send scheme if there are no spare pipes left. This option requires splicing to be enabled
at compile time, and may be globally disabled with the global option "nosplice". Since splice uses
pipes, using it requires that there are enough spare pipes.

Important note: see "option splice-auto" for usage limitations.

Example:

```text
option splice-response
```

If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled in a specific instance
by prepending the "no" keyword before it.

See also: "option splice-auto", "option splice-request", and global options "nosplice" and
"maxpipes"

<a id="entry-4-2-option-spop-check"></a>

**`option spop-check`**

```haproxy
option spop-check
```

Use SPOP health checks for server testing

May be used in the following contexts: tcp

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

It is possible to test that the server correctly talks SPOP protocol instead of just testing that it
accepts the TCP connection. When this option is set, a HELLO handshake is performed between HAProxy
and the server, and the response is analyzed to check no error is reported.

Example:

```text
option spop-check
```

See also: "option httpchk"

<a id="entry-4-2-option-srvtcpka"></a>

**`option srvtcpka`**

```haproxy
option srvtcpka
no option srvtcpka
```

Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on the server side

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and a server, and when the
protocol involves very long sessions with long idle periods (e.g. remote desktops), there is a risk
that one of the intermediate components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too
long.

Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets to the other end of
the connection, leaving it active. The delay between keep-alive probes is controlled by the system
only and depends both on the operating system and its tuning parameters.

It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor received at the
application level. It is only the network stacks which sees them. For this reason, even if one side
of the proxy already uses keep-alives to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets
will not be forwarded to the other side of the proxy.

Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.

Using option "srvtcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on the server side of a
connection, which should help when session expirations are noticed between HAProxy and a server.

If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled in a specific instance
by prepending the "no" keyword before it.

See also: "option clitcpka", "option tcpka"

<a id="entry-4-2-option-ssl-hello-chk"></a>

**`option ssl-hello-chk`**

```haproxy
option ssl-hello-chk
```

Use SSLv3 client hello health checks for server testing

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

When some SSL-based protocols are relayed in TCP mode through HAProxy, it is possible to test that
the server correctly talks SSL instead of just testing that it accepts the TCP connection. When
"option ssl-hello-chk" is set, pure SSLv3 client hello messages are sent once the connection is
established to the server, and the response is analyzed to find an SSL server hello message. The
server is considered valid only when the response contains this server hello message.

All servers tested till there correctly reply to SSLv3 client hello messages, and most servers
tested do not even log the requests containing only hello messages, which is appreciable.

Note that this check works even when SSL support was not built into HAProxy because it forges the
SSL message. When SSL support is available, it is best to use native SSL health checks instead of
this one.

See also: "option httpchk", "check-ssl"

<a id="entry-4-2-option-tcp-check"></a>

**`option tcp-check`**

```haproxy
option tcp-check
```

Perform health checks using tcp-check send/expect sequences

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

This health check method is intended to be combined with "tcp-check" command lists in order to
support send/expect types of health check sequences.

TCP checks currently support 4 modes of operations: - no "tcp-check" directive: the health check
only consists in a connection attempt, which remains the default mode.

    - "tcp-check send" or "tcp-check send-binary" only is mentioned: this is
      used to send a string along with a connection opening. With some
      protocols, it helps sending a "QUIT" message for example that prevents
      the server from logging a connection error for each health check. The
      check result will still be based on the ability to open the connection
      only.

    - "tcp-check expect" only is mentioned: this is used to test a banner.
      The connection is opened and HAProxy waits for the server to present some
      contents which must validate some rules. The check result will be based
      on the matching between the contents and the rules. This is suited for
      POP, IMAP, SMTP, FTP, SSH, TELNET.

    - both "tcp-check send" and "tcp-check expect" are mentioned: this is
      used to test a hello-type protocol. HAProxy sends a message, the server
      responds and its response is analyzed. the check result will be based on
      the matching between the response contents and the rules. This is often
      suited for protocols which require a binding or a request/response model.
      LDAP, MySQL, Redis and SSL are example of such protocols, though they
      already all have their dedicated checks with a deeper understanding of
      the respective protocols.
      In this mode, many questions may be sent and many answers may be
      analyzed.

A fifth mode can be used to insert comments in different steps of the script.

For each tcp-check rule you create, you can add a "comment" directive, followed by a string. This
string will be reported in the log and stderr in debug mode. It is useful to make user-friendly
error reporting. The "comment" is of course optional.

During the execution of a health check, a variable scope is made available to store data samples,
using the "tcp-check set-var" operation. Freeing those variable is possible using "tcp-check
unset-var".

Examples:

```shell
# perform a POP check (analyze only server's banner)
option tcp-check
tcp-check expect string +OK\ POP3\ ready comment POP\ protocol

# perform an IMAP check (analyze only server's banner)
option tcp-check
tcp-check expect string *\ OK\ IMAP4\ ready comment IMAP\ protocol

# look for the redis master server after ensuring it speaks well
# redis protocol, then it exits properly.
# (send a command then analyze the response 3 times)
option tcp-check
tcp-check comment PING\ phase
tcp-check send PING\r\n
tcp-check expect string +PONG
tcp-check comment role\ check
tcp-check send info\ replication\r\n
tcp-check expect string role:master
tcp-check comment QUIT\ phase
tcp-check send QUIT\r\n
tcp-check expect string +OK

forge a HTTP request, then analyze the response
(send many headers before analyzing)
option tcp-check
tcp-check comment forge\ and\ send\ HTTP\ request
tcp-check send HEAD\ /\ HTTP/1.1\r\n
tcp-check send Host:\ www.mydomain.com\r\n
tcp-check send User-Agent:\ HAProxy\ tcpcheck\r\n
tcp-check send \r\n
tcp-check expect rstring HTTP/1\..\ (2..|3..) comment check\ HTTP\ response

```

See also: "tcp-check connect", "tcp-check expect" and "tcp-check send".

<a id="entry-4-2-option-tcp-smart-accept"></a>

**`option tcp-smart-accept`**

```haproxy
option tcp-smart-accept
no option tcp-smart-accept
```

Enable or disable the saving of one ACK packet during the accept sequence

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments: none

When an HTTP connection request comes in, the system acknowledges it on behalf of HAProxy, then the
client immediately sends its request, and the system acknowledges it too while it is notifying
HAProxy about the new connection. HAProxy then reads the request and responds. This means that we
have one TCP ACK sent by the system for nothing, because the request could very well be acknowledged
by HAProxy when it sends its response.

For this reason, in HTTP mode, HAProxy automatically asks the system to avoid sending this useless
ACK on platforms which support it (currently at least Linux). It must not cause any problem, because
the system will send it anyway after 40 ms if the response takes more time than expected to come.

During complex network debugging sessions, it may be desirable to disable this optimization because
delayed ACKs can make troubleshooting more complex when trying to identify where packets are
delayed. It is then possible to fall back to normal behavior by specifying "no option
tcp-smart-accept".

It is also possible to force it for non-HTTP proxies by simply specifying "option tcp-smart-accept".
For instance, it can make sense with some services such as SMTP where the server speaks first.

It is recommended to avoid forcing this option in a defaults section. In case of doubt, consider
setting it back to automatic values by prepending the "default" keyword before it, or disabling it
using the "no" keyword.

See also: "option tcp-smart-connect"

<a id="entry-4-2-option-tcp-smart-connect"></a>

**`option tcp-smart-connect`**

```haproxy
option tcp-smart-connect
no option tcp-smart-connect
```

Enable or disable the saving of one ACK packet during the connect sequence

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

On certain systems (at least Linux), HAProxy can ask the kernel not to immediately send an empty ACK
upon a connection request, but to directly send the buffer request instead. This saves one packet on
the network and thus boosts performance. It can also be useful for some servers, because they
immediately get the request along with the incoming connection.

This feature is enabled when "option tcp-smart-connect" is set in a backend. It is not enabled by
default because it makes network troubleshooting more complex.

It only makes sense to enable it with protocols where the client speaks first such as HTTP. In other
situations, if there is no data to send in place of the ACK, a normal ACK is sent.

If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled in a specific instance
by prepending the "no" keyword before it.

See also: "option tcp-smart-accept"

<a id="entry-4-2-option-tcpka"></a>

**`option tcpka`**

```haproxy
option tcpka
```

Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on both sides

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and a server, and when the
protocol involves very long sessions with long idle periods (e.g. remote desktops), there is a risk
that one of the intermediate components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too
long.

Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets to the other end of
the connection, leaving it active. The delay between keep-alive probes is controlled by the system
only and depends both on the operating system and its tuning parameters.

It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor received at the
application level. It is only the network stacks which sees them. For this reason, even if one side
of the proxy already uses keep-alives to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets
will not be forwarded to the other side of the proxy.

Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.

Using option "tcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on both the client and server
sides of a connection. Note that this is meaningful only in "defaults" or "listen" sections. If this
option is used in a frontend, only the client side will get keep-alives, and if this option is used
in a backend, only the server side will get keep-alives. For this reason, it is strongly recommended
to explicitly use "option clitcpka" and "option srvtcpka" when the configuration is split between
frontends and backends.

See also: "option clitcpka", "option srvtcpka"

<a id="entry-4-2-option-tcplog"></a>

**`option tcplog [clf]`**

```haproxy
option tcplog [clf]
```

Enable advanced logging of TCP connections with stream state and timers

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments:

```text
clf       if the "clf" argument is added, then the output format will be
          the CLF format instead of HAProxy's default TCP format. You can
          use this when you need to feed HAProxy's logs through a specific
          log analyzer which only support the CLF format and which is not
          extensible.  Since this expects an HTTP format some of the
          values have been pre set. The http request will show as TCP and
          the response code will show as 000.
```

By default, the log output format is very poor, as it only contains the source and destination
addresses, and the instance name. By specifying "option tcplog", each log line turns into a much
richer format including, but not limited to, the connection timers, the stream status, the
connections numbers, the frontend, backend and server name, and of course the source address and
ports. This option is useful for pure TCP proxies in order to find which of the client or server
disconnects or times out. For normal HTTP proxies, it's better to use "option httplog" which is even
more complete.

"option tcplog" overrides any previous "log-format" directive.

See also: "option httplog", and [section 8](/docs/haproxy/configuration-logging/) about logging.

<a id="entry-4-2-option-transparent"></a>

**`option transparent        (deprecated)`**

```haproxy
option transparent        (deprecated)
no option transparent     (deprecated)
```

Enable client-side transparent proxying

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

This option was introduced in order to provide layer 7 persistence to layer 3 load balancers. The
idea is to use the OS's ability to redirect an incoming connection for a remote address to a local
process (here HAProxy), and let this process know what address was initially requested. When this
option is used, sessions without cookies will be forwarded to the original destination IP address of
the incoming request (which should match that of another equipment), while requests with cookies
will still be forwarded to the appropriate server.

Note that contrary to a common belief, this option does NOT make HAProxy present the client's IP to
the server when establishing the connection.

As of 3.3, this option is now deprecated because it used to suffer from a number of internal
technical limitations. Using it will emit a warning, which can be avoided if really needed via the
"expose-deprecated-directives" global keyword.

The correct approach is to declare a server on address 0.0.0.0, which will take care of connecting
to the expected destination address. A server will also properly handle idle connections to the
target servers.

Example:

```shell
# option transparent  ## before 3.3
server transparent 0.0.0.0
```

See also: the "usesrc" argument of the "source" keyword, and the "transparent" option of the "bind"
keyword.

option use-small-buffers [ queue \| l7-retries \| check ]\*

Enable support for small buffers for the given categories.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

This option can be used to enable the small buffers support at different places to save memory. By
default, with no parameter, small buffers are used as far as possible at all possible places.
Otherwise, it is possible to limit it to following the places:

- queue: When set, small buffers will be used to store the requests, if small enough, when the
  connection is queued.
- l7-retries: When set, small buffers will be used to save the requests when L7 retries are enabled.
- check: When set, small buffers will be used for the health-checks requests.

When enabled, small buffers are used, but only if it is possible. Otherwise, when data are too
large, a regular buffer is automatically used. The size of small buffers is configurable via the
"tune.bufsize.small" global setting.

If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled in a specific instance
by prepending the "no" keyword before it.

See also: tune.bufsize.small

<a id="entry-4-2-persist-rdp-cookie"></a>

**`persist rdp-cookie`**

```haproxy
persist rdp-cookie
persist rdp-cookie(<name>)
```

Enable RDP cookie-based persistence

May be used in the following contexts: tcp

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<name>    is the optional name of the RDP cookie to check. If omitted, the
          default cookie name "msts" will be used. There currently is no
          valid reason to change this name.
```

This statement enables persistence based on an RDP cookie. The RDP cookie contains all information
required to find the server in the list of known servers. So when this option is set in the backend,
the request is analyzed and if an RDP cookie is found, it is decoded. If it matches a known server
which is still UP (or if "option persist" is set), then the connection is forwarded to this server.

Note that this only makes sense in a TCP backend, but for this to work, the frontend must have
waited long enough to ensure that an RDP cookie is present in the request buffer. This is the same
requirement as with the "rdp-cookie" load-balancing method. Thus it is highly recommended to put all
statements in a single "listen" section.

Also, it is important to understand that the terminal server will emit this RDP cookie only if it is
configured for "token redirection mode", which means that the "IP address redirection" option is
disabled.

Example:

```text
listen tse-farm
    bind:3389
    # wait up to 5s for an RDP cookie in the request
    tcp-request inspect-delay 5s
    tcp-request content accept if RDP_COOKIE
    # apply RDP cookie persistence
    persist rdp-cookie
    # if server is unknown, let's balance on the same cookie.
    # alternatively, "balance leastconn" may be useful too.
    balance rdp-cookie
    server srv1 1.1.1.1:3389
    server srv2 1.1.1.2:3389
```

See also: "balance rdp-cookie", "tcp-request" and the "req.rdp_cookie" ACL.

<a id="entry-4-2-quic-initial"></a>

**`quic-initial <action> [ { if | unless } <condition> ]`**

```haproxy
quic-initial <action> [ { if | unless } <condition> ]
```

Perform an action on an incoming QUIC Initial packet. Contrary to "tcp-request connection", this is
executed prior to any connection element instantiation and starting and completion of the SSL
handshake, which is more efficient when wanting to reject connections attempts.

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes(!) \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments:

```text
<action>    defines the action to perform if the condition applies. See
            below.

<condition> is a standard layer4-only ACL-based condition (see section 7).
            However, QUIC initial rules are executed too early even for
            some layer4 sample fetch methods despite no configuration
            warning and may result in unspecified runtime behavior,
            although they will not crash. Consider that only internal
            samples and layer4 "src*" and "dst*" are considered as
            supported for now.

```

This action is executed early during QUIC packet parsing. As such, only a minimal list of actions is
supported: - accept - dgram-drop - reject - send-retry

<a id="entry-4-2-rate-limit-sessions"></a>

**`rate-limit sessions <rate>`**

```haproxy
rate-limit sessions <rate>
```

Set a limit on the number of new sessions accepted per second on a frontend

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments:

```text
<rate>    The <rate> parameter is an integer designating the maximum number
          of new sessions per second to accept on the frontend.
```

When the frontend reaches the specified number of new sessions per second, it stops accepting new
connections until the rate drops below the limit again. During this time, the pending sessions will
be kept in the socket's backlog (in system buffers) and HAProxy will not even be aware that sessions
are pending. When applying very low limit on a highly loaded service, it may make sense to increase
the socket's backlog using the "backlog" keyword.

This feature is particularly efficient at blocking connection-based attacks or service abuse on
fragile servers. Since the session rate is measured every millisecond, it is extremely accurate.
Also, the limit applies immediately, no delay is needed at all to detect the threshold.

Example: limit the connection rate on SMTP to 10 per second max listen smtp mode tcp bind:25
rate-limit sessions 10 server smtp1 127.0.0.1:1025

Note: when the maximum rate is reached, the frontend's status is not changed but its sockets appear
as "WAITING" in the statistics if the "socket-stats" option is enabled.

See also: the "backlog" keyword and the "fe_sess_rate" ACL criterion.

<a id="entry-4-2-redirect-location"></a>

**`redirect location <loc> [code <code>] <option> [{if | unless} <condition>]`**

```haproxy
redirect location <loc> [code <code>] <option> [{if | unless} <condition>]
redirect prefix   <pfx> [code <code>] <option> [{if | unless} <condition>]
redirect scheme   <sch> [code <code>] <option> [{if | unless} <condition>]
```

Return an HTTP redirection if/unless a condition is matched

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend no \| yes \| yes \| yes

If/unless the condition is matched, the HTTP request will lead to a redirect response. If no
condition is specified, the redirect applies unconditionally.

Arguments:

```text
<loc>     With "redirect location", the exact value in <loc> is placed into
          the HTTP "Location" header. When used in an "http-request" rule,
          <loc> value follows the Custom log format rules and can include
          some dynamic values (see Custom log format in section 8.2.6).

<pfx>     With "redirect prefix", the "Location" header is built from the
          concatenation of <pfx> and the complete URI path, including the
          query string, unless the "drop-query" option is specified (see
          below). As a special case, if <pfx> equals exactly "/", then
          nothing is inserted before the original URI. It allows one to
          redirect to the same URL (for instance, to insert a cookie). When
          used in an "http-request" rule, <pfx> value follows the Custom
          Log Format rules and can include some dynamic values (see Custom
          Log Format in section 8.2.6).

<sch>     With "redirect scheme", then the "Location" header is built by
          concatenating <sch> with "://" then the first occurrence of the
          "Host" header, and then the URI path, including the query string
          unless the "drop-query" option is specified (see below). If no
          path is found or if the path is "*", then "/" is used instead. If
          no "Host" header is found, then an empty host component will be
          returned, which most recent browsers interpret as redirecting to
          the same host. This directive is mostly used to redirect HTTP to
          HTTPS. When used in an "http-request" rule, <sch> value follows
          the Custom log format rules and can include some dynamic values
          (see Custom log format in section 8.2.6).

<code>    The code is optional. It indicates which type of HTTP redirection
          is desired. Only codes 301, 302, 303, 307 and 308 are supported,
          with 302 used by default if no code is specified. 301 means
          "Moved permanently", and a browser may cache the Location. 302
          means "Moved temporarily" and means that the browser should not
          cache the redirection. 303 is equivalent to 302 except that the
          browser will fetch the location with a GET method. 307 is just
          like 302 but makes it clear that the same method must be reused.
          Likewise, 308 replaces 301 if the same method must be used.

<option>  There are several options which can be specified to adjust the
          expected behavior of a redirection:

  - "drop-query"
    When this keyword is used in a prefix-based redirection, then the
    location will be set without any possible query-string, which is useful
    for directing users to a non-secure page for instance. It has no effect
    with a location-type redirect.

  - "append-slash"
    This keyword may be used in conjunction with "drop-query" to redirect
    users who use a URL not ending with a '/' to the same one with the '/'.
    It can be useful to ensure that search engines will only see one URL.
    For this, a return code 301 is preferred.

  - "ignore-empty"
    This keyword only has effect when a location is produced using a log
    format expression (i.e. when used in http-request or http-response).
    It indicates that if the result of the expression is empty, the rule
    should silently be skipped. The main use is to allow mass-redirects
    of known paths using a simple map.

  - "set-cookie NAME[=value]"
    A "Set-Cookie" header will be added with NAME (and optionally "=value")
    to the response. This is sometimes used to indicate that a user has
    been seen, for instance to protect against some types of DoS. No other
    cookie option is added, so the cookie will be a session cookie. Note
    that for a browser, a sole cookie name without an equal sign is
    different from a cookie with an equal sign.

  - "set-cookie-fmt <fmt>"
    It is equivaliant to the option above, except the "Set-Cookie" header
    will be filled with the result of the log-format string <fmt>
    evaluation. Be careful to respect the "NAME[=value]" format because no
    special check are performed during the configuration parsing.

  - "clear-cookie NAME[=]"
    A "Set-Cookie" header will be added with NAME (and optionally "="), but
    with the "Max-Age" attribute set to zero. This will tell the browser to
    delete this cookie. It is useful for instance on logout pages. It is
    important to note that clearing the cookie "NAME" will not remove a
    cookie set with "NAME=value". You have to clear the cookie "NAME=" for
    that, because the browser makes the difference.

  - "keep-query"
    When this keyword is used in a location-based redirection, then the
    query-string of the original URI, if any, will be appended to the
    location. If no query-string is found, nothing is added. If the
    location already contains a query-string, the original one will be
    appended with the '&' delimiter.

```

Example: move the login URL only to HTTPS. acl clear dst_port 80 acl secure dst_port 8080 acl
login_page url_beg /login acl logout url_beg /logout acl uid_given url_reg /login?userid=[^&]+ acl
cookie_set hdr_sub(cookie) SEEN=1

        redirect prefix   https://mysite.com set-cookie SEEN=1 if !cookie_set
        redirect prefix   https://mysite.com           if login_page !secure
        redirect prefix   http://mysite.com drop-query if login_page !uid_given
        redirect location http://mysite.com/           if !login_page secure
        redirect location / clear-cookie USERID=       if logout

Example: send redirects for request for articles without a '/'. acl missing_slash path_reg
^/article/[^/]\*\$ redirect code 301 prefix / drop-query append-slash if missing_slash

Example: redirect all HTTP traffic to HTTPS when SSL is handled by HAProxy. redirect scheme https if
!{ ssl_fc }

Example: append 'www.' prefix in front of all hosts not having it http-request redirect code 301
location &#92; http://www.%[hdr(host)]%[capture.req.uri]
&#92; unless { hdr_beg(host) -i www }

Example: permanently redirect only old URLs to new ones http-request redirect code 301 location
&#92; %[path,map_str(old-blog-articles.map)] ignore-empty

See [section 7](/docs/haproxy/acls-and-samples/) about ACL usage.

<a id="entry-4-2-retries"></a>

**`retries <value>`**

```haproxy
retries <value>
```

Set the number of retries to perform on a server after a failure

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<value>   is the number of times a request or connection attempt should be
          retried on a server after a failure.
```

By default, retries apply only to new connection attempts. However, when the "retry-on" directive is
used, other conditions might trigger a retry (e.g. empty response, undesired status code), and each
of them will count one attempt, and when the total number attempts reaches the value here, an error
will be returned.

In order to avoid immediate reconnections to a server which is restarting, a turn-around timer of
min("timeout connect", one second) is applied before a retry occurs on the same server.

When "option redispatch" is set, some retries may be performed on another server even if a cookie
references a different server. By default this will only be the last retry unless an argument is
passed to "option redispatch".

See also: "option redispatch"

<a id="entry-4-2-retry-on"></a>

**`retry-on [space-delimited list of keywords]`**

```haproxy
retry-on [space-delimited list of keywords]
```

Specify when to attempt to automatically retry a failed request. This setting is only valid when
"mode" is set to http and is silently ignored otherwise.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
 <keywords>  is a space-delimited list of keywords or HTTP status codes, each
             representing a type of failure event on which an attempt to
             retry the request is desired. Please read the notes at the
             bottom before changing this setting. The following keywords are
             supported:

   none              never retry

   conn-failure      retry when the connection or the SSL handshake failed
                     and the request could not be sent. This is the default.

   empty-response    retry when the server connection was closed after part
                     of the request was sent, and nothing was received from
                     the server. This type of failure may be caused by the
                     request timeout on the server side, poor network
                     condition, or a server crash or restart while
                     processing the request.

   junk-response     retry when the server returned something not looking
                     like a complete HTTP response. This includes partial
                     responses headers as well as non-HTTP contents. It
                     usually is a bad idea to retry on such events, which
                     may be caused a configuration issue (wrong server port)
                     or by the request being harmful to the server (buffer
                     overflow attack for example).

   response-timeout  the server timeout stroke while waiting for the server
                     to respond to the request. This may be caused by poor
                     network condition, the reuse of an idle connection
                     which has expired on the path, or by the request being
                     extremely expensive to process. It generally is a bad
                     idea to retry on such events on servers dealing with
                     heavy database processing (full scans, etc) as it may
                     amplify denial of service attacks.

   0rtt-rejected     retry requests which were sent over early data and were
                     rejected by the server. These requests are generally
                     considered to be safe to retry.

   <status>          any HTTP status code among "401" (Unauthorized), "403"
                     (Forbidden), "404" (Not Found), "408" (Request Timeout),
"421" (Misdirected Request), "425" (Too Early),
"429" (Too Many Requests), "500" (Server Error),
"501" (Not Implemented), "502" (Bad Gateway),
"503" (Service Unavailable), "504" (Gateway Timeout).

   all-retryable-errors
                     retry request for any error that are considered
                     retryable. This currently activates "conn-failure",
                     "empty-response", "junk-response", "response-timeout",
                     "0rtt-rejected", "500", "502", "503", and "504".
```

Using this directive replaces any previous settings with the new ones; it is not cumulative.

Please note that using anything other than "none" and "conn-failure" requires to allocate a buffer
and copy the whole request into it, so it has memory and performance impacts. Requests not fitting
in a single buffer will never be retried (see the global tune.bufsize setting).

You have to make sure the application has a replay protection mechanism built in such as a unique
transaction IDs passed in requests, or that replaying the same request has no consequence, or it is
very dangerous to use any retry-on value beside "conn-failure" and "none". Static file servers and
caches are generally considered safe against any type of retry. Using a status code can be useful to
quickly leave a server showing an abnormal behavior (out of memory, file system issues, etc), but in
this case it may be a good idea to immediately redispatch the connection to another server (please
see "option redispatch" for this). Last, it is important to understand that most causes of failures
are the requests themselves and that retrying a request causing a server to misbehave will often
make the situation even worse for this server, or for the whole service in case of redispatch.

Unless you know exactly how the application deals with replayed requests, you should not use this
directive.

The default is "conn-failure".

Example:

```text
retry-on 503 504
```

See also: "retries", "option redispatch", "tune.bufsize"

<a id="entry-4-2-server"></a>

**`server <name> <address>[:[port]] [param*]`**

```haproxy
server <name> <address>[:[port]] [param*]
```

Declare a server in a backend

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend no \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<name>    is the internal name assigned to this server. This name will
          appear in logs and alerts. If "http-send-name-header" is
          set, it will be added to the request header sent to the server.
          This name must be unique within the backend section.

<address> is the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the server. Alternatively, a
          resolvable hostname is supported, but this name will be resolved
          during start-up. Address "0.0.0.0" or "*" has a special meaning.
          It indicates that the connection will be forwarded to the same IP
          address as the one from the client connection. This is useful in
          transparent proxy architectures where the client's connection is
          intercepted and HAProxy must forward to the original destination
          address. This is more or less what the "transparent" keyword does
          except that with a server it's possible to limit concurrency and
          to report statistics. Optionally, an address family prefix may be
          used before the address to force the family regardless of the
          address format, which can be useful to specify a path to a unix
          socket with no slash ('/'). Currently supported prefixes are:
                - 'ipv4@'  -> address is always IPv4
                - 'ipv6@'  -> address is always IPv6
                - 'unix@'  -> address is a path to a local unix socket
                - 'abns@'  -> address is in abstract namespace (Linux only)
                - 'abnsz@'  -> address is in abstract namespace (Linux only)
                   but it is explicitly zero-terminated. This means no \0
                   padding is used to complete sun_path. It is useful to
                   interconnect with programs that don't implement the
                   default abns naming logic that haproxy uses.
                - 'sockpair@' -> address is the FD of a connected unix
                  socket or of a socketpair. During a connection, the
                  backend creates a pair of connected sockets, and passes
                  one of them over the FD. The bind part will use the
                  received socket as the client FD. Should be used
                  carefully.
                - 'quic4@' [ EXPERIMENTAL] -> address is resolved as IPv4
                  and protocol UDP is used. QUIC on the backend side is
                  considered experimental mainly because this prevents the
                  server removal at runtime. This requires the global
                  keyword "expose-experimental-directives" to use it.
                - 'quic6@' [ EXPERIMENTAL] -> address is resolved as IPv6
                  and protocol UDP is used. It is considered similarly
                  flagged as experimental.
                - 'rhttp@' [ EXPERIMENTAL ] -> custom address family for a
                  passive server in HTTP reverse context. This is an
                  experimental features which requires
                  "expose-experimental-directives" on a line before this
                  server.
          You may want to reference some environment variables in the
          address parameter, see section 2.3 about environment
          variables. The "init-addr" setting can be used to modify the way
          IP addresses should be resolved upon startup.

<port>    is an optional port specification. If set, all connections will
          be sent to this port. If unset, the same port the client
          connected to will be used. The port may also be prefixed by a "+"
          or a "-". In this case, the server's port will be determined by
          adding this value to the client's port.

<param*>  is a list of parameters for this server. The "server" keywords
          accepts an important number of options and has a complete section
          dedicated to it. Please refer to section 5 for more details.
```

Examples:

```text
server first  10.1.1.1:1080 cookie first  check inter 1000
server second 10.1.1.2:1080 cookie second check inter 1000
server transp ipv4@
server backup "${SRV_BACKUP}:1080" backup
server www1_dc1 "${LAN_DC1}.101:80"
server www1_dc2 "${LAN_DC2}.101:80"
```

Note: regarding Linux's abstract namespace sockets, "abns" HAProxy sockets uses the whole sun_path
length is used for the address length. Some other programs such as socat use the string length only
by default. Pass the option ",unix-tightsocklen=0" to any abstract socket definition in socat to
make it compatible with HAProxy's, or use the "abnsz" HAProxy socket family instead.

See also: "default-server", "http-send-name-header" and [section 5](/docs/haproxy/bind-and-server-options/) about server options

<a id="entry-4-2-server-state-file-name"></a>

**`server-state-file-name [ { use-backend-name | <file> } ]`**

```haproxy
server-state-file-name [ { use-backend-name | <file> } ]
```

Set the server state file to read, load and apply to servers available in this backend.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend no \| no \| yes \| yes

It only applies when the directive "load-server-state-from-file" is set to "local". When `<file>` is
not provided, if "use-backend-name" is used or if this directive is not set, then backend name is
used. If `<file>` starts with a slash '/', then it is considered as an absolute path. Otherwise,
`<file>` is concatenated to the global directive "server-state-base".

Example: the minimal configuration below would make HAProxy look for the state server file
'/etc/haproxy/states/bk':

    global
      server-state-file-base /etc/haproxy/states

    backend bk
      load-server-state-from-file

See also: "server-state-base", "load-server-state-from-file", and "show servers state"

<a id="entry-4-2-server-template"></a>

**`server-template <prefix> <num | range> <fqdn>[:<port>] [params*]`**

```haproxy
server-template <prefix> <num | range> <fqdn>[:<port>] [params*]
```

Set a template to initialize servers with shared parameters. The names of these servers are built
from `<prefix>` and \<num \| range\> parameters.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend no \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<prefix>  A prefix for the server names to be built.

<num | range>
          If <num> is provided, this template initializes <num> servers
          with 1 up to <num> as server name suffixes. A range of numbers
          <num_low>-<num_high> may also be used to use <num_low> up to
          <num_high> as server name suffixes.

<fqdn>    A FQDN for all the servers this template initializes.

<port>    Same meaning as "server" <port> argument (see "server" keyword).

<params*>
          Remaining server parameters among all those supported by "server"
          keyword.
```

Examples:

```shell
# Initializes 3 servers with srv1, srv2 and srv3 as names,
# google.com as FQDN, and health-check enabled.
server-template srv 1-3 google.com:80 check

# or
server-template srv 3 google.com:80 check

# would be equivalent to:
server srv1 google.com:80 check
server srv2 google.com:80 check
server srv3 google.com:80 check


```

<a id="entry-4-2-source"></a>

**`source <addr>[:<port>] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | client | clientip } ]`**

```haproxy
source <addr>[:<port>] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | client | clientip } ]
source <addr>[:<port>] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | hdr_ip(<hdr>[,<occ>]) } ]
source <addr>[:<port>] [interface <name>]
```

Set the source address for outgoing connections

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<addr>    is the IPv4 address HAProxy will bind to before connecting to a
          server. This address is also used as a source for health checks.

          The default value of 0.0.0.0 means that the system will select
          the most appropriate address to reach its destination. Optionally
          an address family prefix may be used before the address to force
          the family regardless of the address format, which can be useful
          to specify a path to a unix socket with no slash ('/'). Currently
          supported prefixes are:
            - 'ipv4@' -> address is always IPv4
            - 'ipv6@' -> address is always IPv6
            - 'unix@' -> address is a path to a local unix socket
            - 'abns@' -> address is in abstract namespace (Linux only)
            - 'abnsz@'  -> address is in zero-terminated abstract namespace
                           (Linux only)

          You may want to reference some environment variables in the
          address parameter, see section 2.3 about environment variables.

<port>    is an optional port. It is normally not needed but may be useful
          in some very specific contexts. The default value of zero means
          the system will select a free port. Note that port ranges are not
          supported in the backend. If you want to force port ranges, you
          have to specify them on each "server" line.

<addr2>   is the IP address to present to the server when connections are
          forwarded in full transparent proxy mode. This is currently only
          supported on some patched Linux kernels. When this address is
          specified, clients connecting to the server will be presented
          with this address, while health checks will still use the address
          <addr>.

<port2>   is the optional port to present to the server when connections
          are forwarded in full transparent proxy mode (see <addr2> above).
          The default value of zero means the system will select a free
          port.

<hdr>     is the name of a HTTP header in which to fetch the IP to bind to.
          This is the name of a comma-separated header list which can
          contain multiple IP addresses. By default, the last occurrence is
          used. This is designed to work with the X-Forwarded-For header
          and to automatically bind to the client's IP address as seen
          by previous proxy, typically Stunnel. In order to use another
          occurrence from the last one, please see the <occ> parameter
          below. When the header (or occurrence) is not found, no binding
          is performed so that the proxy's default IP address is used. Also
          keep in mind that the header name is case insensitive, as for any
          HTTP header.

<occ>     is the occurrence number of a value to be used in a multi-value
          header. This is to be used in conjunction with "hdr_ip(<hdr>)",
          in order to specify which occurrence to use for the source IP
          address. Positive values indicate a position from the first
          occurrence, 1 being the first one. Negative values indicate
          positions relative to the last one, -1 being the last one. This
          is helpful for situations where an X-Forwarded-For header is set
          at the entry point of an infrastructure and must be used several
          proxy layers away. When this value is not specified, -1 is
          assumed. Passing a zero here disables the feature.

<name>    is an optional interface name to which to bind to for outgoing
          traffic. On systems supporting this features (currently, only
          Linux), this allows one to bind all traffic to the server to
          this interface even if it is not the one the system would select
          based on routing tables. This should be used with extreme care.
          Note that using this option requires root privileges.
```

The "source" keyword is useful in complex environments where a specific address only is allowed to
connect to the servers. It may be needed when a private address must be used through a public
gateway for instance, and it is known that the system cannot determine the adequate source address
by itself.

An extension which is available on certain patched Linux kernels may be used through the "usesrc"
optional keyword. It makes it possible to connect to the servers with an IP address which does not
belong to the system itself. This is called "full transparent proxy mode". For this to work, the
destination servers have to route their traffic back to this address through the machine running
HAProxy, and IP forwarding must generally be enabled on this machine.

In this "full transparent proxy" mode, it is possible to force a specific IP address to be presented
to the servers. This is not much used in fact. A more common use is to tell HAProxy to present the
client's IP address. For this, there are two methods:

    - present the client's IP and port addresses. This is the most transparent
      mode, but it can cause problems when IP connection tracking is enabled on
      the machine, because a same connection may be seen twice with different
      states. However, this solution presents the huge advantage of not
      limiting the system to the 64k outgoing address+port couples, because all
      of the client ranges may be used.

    - present only the client's IP address and select a spare port. This
      solution is still quite elegant but slightly less transparent (downstream
      firewalls logs will not match upstream's). It also presents the downside
      of limiting the number of concurrent connections to the usual 64k ports.
      However, since the upstream and downstream ports are different, local IP
      connection tracking on the machine will not be upset by the reuse of the
      same session.

This option sets the default source for all servers in the backend. It may also be specified in a
"defaults" section. Finer source address specification is possible at the server level using the
"source" server option. Refer to [section 5](/docs/haproxy/bind-and-server-options/) for more information.

In order to work, "usesrc" requires root privileges, or on supported systems, the "cap_net_raw"
capability. See also the "setcap" global directive.

Examples:

```text
backend private
    # Connect to the servers using our 192.168.1.200 source address
    source 192.168.1.200

backend transparent_ssl1
    # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address
    source 192.168.1.200 usesrc clientip

backend transparent_ssl2
    # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address and port
    # not recommended if IP conntrack is present on the local machine.
    source 192.168.1.200 usesrc client

backend transparent_ssl3
    # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address. It
    # is more conntrack-friendly.
    source 192.168.1.200 usesrc clientip

backend transparent_smtp
    # Connect to the SMTP farm from the client's source address/port
    # with Tproxy version 4.
    source 0.0.0.0 usesrc clientip

backend transparent_http
    # Connect to the servers using the client's IP as seen by previous
    # proxy.
    source 0.0.0.0 usesrc hdr_ip(x-forwarded-for,-1)
```

See also: the "source" server option in [section 5](/docs/haproxy/bind-and-server-options/), the Tproxy patches for the Linux kernel on
[www.balabit.com](http://www.balabit.com), the "bind" keyword.

<a id="entry-4-2-srvtcpka-cnt"></a>

**`srvtcpka-cnt <count>`**

```haproxy
srvtcpka-cnt <count>
```

Sets the maximum number of keepalive probes TCP should send before dropping the connection on the
server side.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<count>   is the maximum number of keepalive probes.
```

This keyword corresponds to the socket option TCP_KEEPCNT. If this keyword is not specified,
system-wide TCP parameter (tcp_keepalive_probes) is used. The availability of this setting depends
on the operating system. It is known to work on Linux.

See also: "option srvtcpka", "srvtcpka-idle", "srvtcpka-intvl".

<a id="entry-4-2-srvtcpka-idle"></a>

**`srvtcpka-idle <timeout>`**

```haproxy
srvtcpka-idle <timeout>
```

Sets the time the connection needs to remain idle before TCP starts sending keepalive probes, if
enabled the sending of TCP keepalive packets on the server side.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<timeout> is the time the connection needs to remain idle before TCP starts
          sending keepalive probes. It is specified in seconds by default,
          but can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the
          unit, as explained at the top of this document.
```

This keyword corresponds to the socket option TCP_KEEPIDLE. If this keyword is not specified,
system-wide TCP parameter (tcp_keepalive_time) is used. The availability of this setting depends on
the operating system. It is known to work on Linux.

See also: "option srvtcpka", "srvtcpka-cnt", "srvtcpka-intvl".

<a id="entry-4-2-srvtcpka-intvl"></a>

**`srvtcpka-intvl <timeout>`**

```haproxy
srvtcpka-intvl <timeout>
```

Sets the time between individual keepalive probes on the server side.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<timeout> is the time between individual keepalive probes. It is specified
          in seconds by default, but can be in any other unit if the number
          is suffixed by the unit, as explained at the top of this
          document.
```

This keyword corresponds to the socket option TCP_KEEPINTVL. If this keyword is not specified,
system-wide TCP parameter (tcp_keepalive_intvl) is used. The availability of this setting depends on
the operating system. It is known to work on Linux.

See also: "option srvtcpka", "srvtcpka-cnt", "srvtcpka-idle".

<a id="entry-4-2-stats-admin"></a>

**`stats admin { if | unless } <cond>`**

```haproxy
stats admin { if | unless } <cond>
```

Enable statistics admin level if/unless a condition is matched

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend no \| yes \| yes \| yes

This statement enables the statistics admin level if/unless a condition is matched.

The admin level allows to enable/disable servers from the web interface. By default, statistics page
is read-only for security reasons. If "stats scope" directives are set in the section, then only
proxies designated by these directives will accept state changes; access to other ones will be
denied.

Currently, the POST request is limited to the buffer size minus the reserved buffer space, which
means that if the list of servers is too long, the request won't be processed. It is recommended to
alter few servers at a time.

Those admin POST requests are prone to CSRF attacks. This is partially mitigated by checking that
the Origin (or Referer if no Origin is present) matches the Host header, but this is not enough to
totally prevent the attack. There is no way to be completely protected from those. It is recommended
to avoid exposing it on a public interface, and to restrict who can access it.

Example:

```shell
# statistics admin level only for localhost
backend stats_localhost
    stats enable
    stats admin if LOCALHOST
```

Example:

```shell
# statistics admin level always enabled because of the authentication
backend stats_auth
    stats enable
    stats auth  admin:AdMiN123
    stats admin if TRUE
```

Example:

```shell
# statistics admin level depends on the authenticated user
userlist stats-auth
    group admin    users admin
    user  admin    insecure-password 'AdMiN123'
    group readonly users haproxy
    user  haproxy  insecure-password 'haproxy'

backend stats_auth
    stats enable
    acl AUTH       http_auth(stats-auth)
    acl AUTH_ADMIN http_auth_group(stats-auth) admin
    stats http-request auth unless AUTH
    stats admin if AUTH_ADMIN
```

See also: "stats enable", "stats auth", "stats http-request", "stats scope", [section 12.2](/docs/haproxy/other-sections/#section-12-2) about
userlists and [section 7](/docs/haproxy/acls-and-samples/) about ACL usage.

<a id="entry-4-2-ssl-f-use"></a>

**`ssl-f-use [<sslbindconf> ...]*`**

```haproxy
ssl-f-use [<sslbindconf> ...]*
```

Assignate a certificate to the current frontend.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend no \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments:

```text
<sslbindconf> supports the following keywords from the bind line
(see Section 5.1. Bind options):

- allow-0rtt
- alpn
- ca-file
- ca-verify-file
- ciphers
- ciphersuites
- client-sigalgs
- crl-file
- curves
- ecdhe
- ktls
- no-alpn
- no-ca-names
- npn
- sigalgs
- ssl-min-ver
- ssl-max-ver
- verify

sslbindconf also supports the following keywords from the crt-store load
keyword (see Section 12.7.1. Load options):

- crt
- key
- ocsp
- issuer
- sctl
- ocsp-update
```

Assignate a certificate `<crtname>` to a crt-list created automatically with the frontend name and
prefixed by @ (ex: '@frontend1').

This implicit crt-list will be assigned to every "ssl" bind lines in the current frontend.

crt-list commands from the stats socket are effective with this crt-list, so one could replace,
remove or add certificates and SSL options to it.

Example:

```text
frontend https
    bind:443 ssl
    bind quic4@:443 ssl
    ssl-f-use crt foobar.pem.rsa sigalgs "RSA-PSS+SHA256"
    ssl-f-use crt test.foobar.pem
    ssl-f-use crt test2.foobar.crt key test2.foobar.key ocsp test2.foobar.ocsp ocsp-update on
```

See also: "crt-list" and "crt".

<a id="entry-4-2-stats-auth"></a>

**`stats auth <user>:<passwd>`**

```haproxy
stats auth <user>:<passwd>
```

Enable statistics with authentication and grant access to an account

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<user>    is a user name to grant access to

<passwd>  is the cleartext password associated to this user
```

This statement enables statistics with default settings, and restricts access to declared users
only. It may be repeated as many times as necessary to allow as many users as desired. When a user
tries to access the statistics without a valid account, a "401 Forbidden" response will be returned
so that the browser asks the user to provide a valid user and password. The real which will be
returned to the browser is configurable using "stats realm".

Since the authentication method is HTTP Basic Authentication, the passwords circulate in cleartext
on the network. Thus, it was decided that the configuration file would also use cleartext passwords
to remind the users that those ones should not be sensitive and not shared with any other account.

It is also possible to reduce the scope of the proxies which appear in the report using "stats
scope".

Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is recommended to set all
other settings in order to avoid relying on default unobvious parameters.

Example:

```shell
# public access (limited to this backend only)
backend public_www
    server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
    stats enable
    stats hide-version
    stats scope   .
    stats uri     /admin?stats
    stats realm   HAProxy\ Statistics
    stats auth    admin1:AdMiN123
    stats auth    admin2:AdMiN321

# internal monitoring access (unlimited)
backend private_monitoring
    stats enable
    stats uri     /admin?stats
    stats refresh 5s
```

See also: "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats scope", "stats uri"

<a id="entry-4-2-stats-enable"></a>

**`stats enable`**

```haproxy
stats enable
```

Enable statistics reporting with default settings

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

This statement enables statistics reporting with default settings defined at build time. Unless
stated otherwise, these settings are used: - stats uri : /haproxy?stats - stats realm: "HAProxy
Statistics" - stats auth : no authentication - stats scope: no restriction

Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is recommended to set all
other settings in order to avoid relying on default unobvious parameters.

Example:

```shell
# public access (limited to this backend only)
backend public_www
    server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
    stats enable
    stats hide-version
    stats scope   .
    stats uri     /admin?stats
    stats realm   HAProxy\ Statistics
    stats auth    admin1:AdMiN123
    stats auth    admin2:AdMiN321

# internal monitoring access (unlimited)
backend private_monitoring
    stats enable
    stats uri     /admin?stats
    stats refresh 5s
```

See also: "stats auth", "stats realm", "stats uri"

<a id="entry-4-2-stats-hide-version"></a>

**`stats hide-version`**

```haproxy
stats hide-version
```

Enable statistics and hide HAProxy version reporting

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

The stats page can report some useful status information along with the statistics. Among them is
HAProxy's version. However, it is generally considered dangerous to report precise version to
anyone, as it can help them target known weaknesses with specific attacks. The "stats hide-version"
statement removes the version from the statistics report. This is recommended for public sites or
any site with a weak login/password, and is the default.

Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is recommended to set all
other settings in order to avoid relying on default unobvious parameters.

Example:

```shell
# public access (limited to this backend only)
backend public_www
    server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
    stats enable
    stats hide-version
    stats scope   .
    stats uri     /admin?stats
    stats realm   HAProxy\ Statistics
    stats auth    admin1:AdMiN123
    stats auth    admin2:AdMiN321

# internal monitoring access (unlimited)
backend private_monitoring
    stats enable
    stats uri     /admin?stats
    stats refresh 5s
```

See also: "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri", "stats show-version"

<a id="entry-4-2-stats-http-request"></a>

**`stats http-request { allow | deny | auth [realm <realm>] }`**

```haproxy
stats http-request { allow | deny | auth [realm <realm>] }
             [ { if | unless } <condition> ]
```

Access control for statistics

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend no \| no \| yes \| yes

As "http-request", these set of options allow to fine control access to statistics. Each option may
be followed by if/unless and acl. First option with matched condition (or option without condition)
is final. For "deny" a 403 error will be returned, for "allow" normal processing is performed, for
"auth" a 401/407 error code is returned so the client should be asked to enter a username and
password.

There is no fixed limit to the number of http-request statements per instance.

See also: "http-request", [section 12.2](/docs/haproxy/other-sections/#section-12-2) about userlists and [section 7](/docs/haproxy/acls-and-samples/) about ACL usage.

<a id="entry-4-2-stats-realm"></a>

**`stats realm <realm>`**

```haproxy
stats realm <realm>
```

Enable statistics and set authentication realm

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<realm>   is the name of the HTTP Basic Authentication realm reported to
          the browser. The browser uses it to display it in the pop-up
          inviting the user to enter a valid username and password.
```

The realm is read as a single word, so any spaces in it should be escaped using a backslash
('&#92;').

This statement is useful only in conjunction with "stats auth" since it is only related to
authentication.

Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is recommended to set all
other settings in order to avoid relying on default unobvious parameters.

Example:

```shell
# public access (limited to this backend only)
backend public_www
    server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
    stats enable
    stats hide-version
    stats scope   .
    stats uri     /admin?stats
    stats realm   HAProxy\ Statistics
    stats auth    admin1:AdMiN123
    stats auth    admin2:AdMiN321

# internal monitoring access (unlimited)
backend private_monitoring
    stats enable
    stats uri     /admin?stats
    stats refresh 5s
```

See also: "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats uri"

<a id="entry-4-2-stats-refresh"></a>

**`stats refresh <delay>`**

```haproxy
stats refresh <delay>
```

Enable statistics with automatic refresh

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<delay>   is the suggested refresh delay, specified in seconds, which will
          be returned to the browser consulting the report page. While the
          browser is free to apply any delay, it will generally respect it
          and refresh the page this every seconds. The refresh interval may
          be specified in any other non-default time unit, by suffixing the
          unit after the value, as explained at the top of this document.
```

This statement is useful on monitoring displays with a permanent page reporting the load balancer's
activity. When set, the HTML report page will include a link "refresh"/"stop refresh" so that the
user can select whether they want automatic refresh of the page or not.

Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is recommended to set all
other settings in order to avoid relying on default unobvious parameters.

Example:

```shell
# public access (limited to this backend only)
backend public_www
    server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
    stats enable
    stats hide-version
    stats scope   .
    stats uri     /admin?stats
    stats realm   HAProxy\ Statistics
    stats auth    admin1:AdMiN123
    stats auth    admin2:AdMiN321

# internal monitoring access (unlimited)
backend private_monitoring
    stats enable
    stats uri     /admin?stats
    stats refresh 5s
```

See also: "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"

<a id="entry-4-2-stats-scope"></a>

**`stats scope { <name> | "." }`**

```haproxy
stats scope { <name> | "." }
```

Enable statistics and limit access scope

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<name>    is the name of a listen, frontend or backend section to be
          reported. The special name "." (a single dot) designates the
          section in which the statement appears.
```

When this statement is specified, only the sections enumerated with this statement will appear in
the report. All other ones will be hidden, and attempts to change their state in admin mode will be
rejected. This statement may appear as many times as needed if multiple sections need to be
reported. Please note that the name checking is performed as simple string comparisons, and that it
is never checked that a give section name really exists.

Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is recommended to set all
other settings in order to avoid relying on default unobvious parameters.

Example:

```shell
# public access (limited to this backend only)
backend public_www
    server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
    stats enable
    stats hide-version
    stats scope   .
    stats uri     /admin?stats
    stats realm   HAProxy\ Statistics
    stats auth    admin1:AdMiN123
    stats auth    admin2:AdMiN321

# internal monitoring access (unlimited)
backend private_monitoring
    stats enable
    stats uri     /admin?stats
    stats refresh 5s
```

See also: "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri" and "stats admin"

<a id="entry-4-2-stats-show-desc"></a>

**`stats show-desc [ <desc> ]`**

```haproxy
stats show-desc [ <desc> ]
```

Enable reporting of a description on the statistics page.

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

    `<desc>`    is an optional description to be reported. If unspecified, the
              description from global section is automatically used instead.

This statement is useful for users that offer shared services to their customers, where node or
description should be different for each customer.

Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is recommended to set all
other settings in order to avoid relying on default unobvious parameters. By default description is
not shown.

Example:

```shell
# internal monitoring access (unlimited)
backend private_monitoring
    stats enable
    stats show-desc Master node for Europe, Asia, Africa
    stats uri       /admin?stats
    stats refresh   5s
```

See also: "show-node", "stats enable", "stats uri" and "description" in global section.

<a id="entry-4-2-stats-show-legends"></a>

**`stats show-legends`**

```haproxy
stats show-legends
```

Enable reporting additional information on the statistics page

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

Enable reporting additional information on the statistics page: - cap: capabilities (proxy) - mode:
one of tcp, http or health (proxy) - id: SNMP ID (proxy, socket, server) - IP (socket, server) -
cookie (backend, server)

Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is recommended to set all
other settings in order to avoid relying on default unobvious parameters. Default behavior is not to
show this information.

See also: "stats enable", "stats uri".

<a id="entry-4-2-stats-show-modules"></a>

**`stats show-modules`**

```haproxy
stats show-modules
```

Enable display of extra statistics module on the statistics page

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

New columns are added at the end of the line containing the extra statistics values as a tooltip.

Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is recommended to set all
other settings in order to avoid relying on default unobvious parameters. Default behavior is not to
show this information.

See also: "stats enable", "stats uri".

<a id="entry-4-2-stats-show-node"></a>

**`stats show-node [ <name> ]`**

```haproxy
stats show-node [ <name> ]
```

Enable reporting of a host name on the statistics page.

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<name>    is an optional name to be reported. If unspecified, the
          node name from global section is automatically used instead.
```

This statement is useful for users that offer shared services to their customers, where node or
description might be different on a stats page provided for each customer. Default behavior is not
to show host name.

Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is recommended to set all
other settings in order to avoid relying on default unobvious parameters.

Example:

```shell
# internal monitoring access (unlimited)
backend private_monitoring
    stats enable
    stats show-node Europe-1
    stats uri       /admin?stats
    stats refresh   5s
```

See also: "show-desc", "stats enable", "stats uri", and "node" in global section.

<a id="entry-4-2-stats-show-version"></a>

**`stats show-version`**

```haproxy
stats show-version
```

Enable statistics and show HAProxy version reporting

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

The stats page can report some useful status information along with the statistics. Among them is
HAProxy's version. However, it is generally considered dangerous to report precise version to
anyone, as it can help them target known weaknesses with specific attacks, and so is disabled by
default. The "stats show-version" enables displaying those informations. This is not recommanded for
public sites or any site with a weak login/password.

See also: "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri", "stats hide-version"

<a id="entry-4-2-stats-uri"></a>

**`stats uri <prefix>`**

```haproxy
stats uri <prefix>
```

Enable statistics and define the URI prefix to access them

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<prefix>  is the prefix of any URI which will be redirected to stats. This
          prefix may contain a question mark ('?') to indicate part of a
          query string.
```

The statistics URI is intercepted on the relayed traffic, so it appears as a page within the normal
application. It is strongly advised to ensure that the selected URI will never appear in the
application, otherwise it will never be possible to reach it in the application.

The default URI compiled in HAProxy is "/haproxy?stats", but this may be changed at build time, so
it's better to always explicitly specify it here. It is generally a good idea to include a question
mark in the URI so that intermediate proxies refrain from caching the results. Also, since any
string beginning with the prefix will be accepted as a stats request, the question mark helps
ensuring that no valid URI will begin with the same words.

It is sometimes very convenient to use "/" as the URI prefix, and put that statement in a "listen"
instance of its own. That makes it easy to dedicate an address or a port to statistics only.

Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is recommended to set all
other settings in order to avoid relying on default unobvious parameters.

Example:

```shell
# public access (limited to this backend only)
backend public_www
    server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
    stats enable
    stats hide-version
    stats scope   .
    stats uri     /admin?stats
    stats realm   HAProxy\ Statistics
    stats auth    admin1:AdMiN123
    stats auth    admin2:AdMiN321

# internal monitoring access (unlimited)
backend private_monitoring
    stats enable
    stats uri     /admin?stats
    stats refresh 5s
```

See also: "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm"

<a id="entry-4-2-stick-match"></a>

**`stick match <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <cond>]`**

```haproxy
stick match <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <cond>]
```

Define a request pattern matching condition to stick a user to a server

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend no \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<pattern>  is a sample expression rule as described in section 7.3. It
           describes what elements of the incoming request or connection
           will be analyzed in the hope to find a matching entry in a
           stickiness table. This rule is mandatory.

<table>    is an optional stickiness table name. If unspecified, the same
           backend's table is used. A stickiness table is declared using
           the "stick-table" statement.

<cond>     is an optional matching condition. It makes it possible to match
           on a certain criterion only when other conditions are met (or
           not met). For instance, it could be used to match on a source IP
           address except when a request passes through a known proxy, in
           which case we'd match on a header containing that IP address.
```

Some protocols or applications require complex stickiness rules and cannot always simply rely on
cookies nor hashing. The "stick match" statement describes a rule to extract the stickiness
criterion from an incoming request or connection. See [section 7](/docs/haproxy/acls-and-samples/) for a complete list of possible
patterns and transformation rules.

The table has to be declared using the "stick-table" statement. It must be of a type compatible with
the pattern. By default it is the one which is present in the same backend. It is possible to share
a table with other backends by referencing it using the "table" keyword. If another table is
referenced, the server's ID inside the backends are used. By default, all server IDs start at 1 in
each backend, so the server ordering is enough. But in case of doubt, it is highly recommended to
force server IDs using their "id" setting.

It is possible to restrict the conditions where a "stick match" statement will apply, using "if" or
"unless" followed by a condition. See [section 7](/docs/haproxy/acls-and-samples/) for ACL based conditions.

There is no limit on the number of "stick match" statements. The first that applies and matches will
cause the request to be directed to the same server as was used for the request which created the
entry. That way, multiple matches can be used as fallbacks.

The stick rules are checked after the persistence cookies, so they will not affect stickiness if a
cookie has already been used to select a server. That way, it becomes very easy to insert cookies
and match on IP addresses in order to maintain stickiness between HTTP and HTTPS.

Example:

```shell
# forward SMTP users to the same server they just used for POP in the
# last 30 minutes
backend pop
    mode tcp
    balance roundrobin
    stick store-request src
    stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
    server s1 192.168.1.1:110
    server s2 192.168.1.1:110

backend smtp
    mode tcp
    balance roundrobin
    stick match src table pop
    server s1 192.168.1.1:25
    server s2 192.168.1.1:25
```

See also: "stick-table", "stick on", [section 11](/docs/haproxy/stick-tables-and-peers/) about stick-tables, and [section 7](/docs/haproxy/acls-and-samples/) about ACLs and
samples fetching.

<a id="entry-4-2-stick-on"></a>

**`stick on <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <condition>]`**

```haproxy
stick on <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <condition>]
```

Define a request pattern to associate a user to a server

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend no \| no \| yes \| yes

Note: This form is exactly equivalent to "stick match" followed by "stick store-request", all with
the same arguments. Please refer to both keywords for details. It is only provided as a convenience
for writing more maintainable configurations.

Examples:

```shell
# The following form ...
stick on src table pop if !localhost

# ...is strictly equivalent to this one:
stick match src table pop if !localhost
stick store-request src table pop if !localhost


# Use cookie persistence for HTTP, and stick on source address for HTTPS as
# well as HTTP without cookie. Share the same table between both accesses.
backend http
    mode http
    balance roundrobin
    stick on src table https
    cookie SRV insert indirect nocache
    server s1 192.168.1.1:80 cookie s1
    server s2 192.168.1.1:80 cookie s2

backend https
    mode tcp
    balance roundrobin
    stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
    stick on src
    server s1 192.168.1.1:443
    server s2 192.168.1.1:443
```

See also: "stick match", "stick store-request", and [section 11](/docs/haproxy/stick-tables-and-peers/) about stick-tables.

<a id="entry-4-2-stick-store-request"></a>

**`stick store-request <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <condition>]`**

```haproxy
stick store-request <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <condition>]
```

Define a request pattern used to create an entry in a stickiness table

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend no \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<pattern>  is a sample expression rule as described in section 7.3. It
           describes what elements of the incoming request or connection
           will be analyzed, extracted and stored in the table once a
           server is selected.

<table>    is an optional stickiness table name. If unspecified, the same
           backend's table is used. A stickiness table is declared using
           the "stick-table" statement.

<cond>     is an optional storage condition. It makes it possible to store
           certain criteria only when some conditions are met (or not met).
           For instance, it could be used to store the source IP address
           except when the request passes through a known proxy, in which
           case we'd store a converted form of a header containing that IP
           address.
```

Some protocols or applications require complex stickiness rules and cannot always simply rely on
cookies nor hashing. The "stick store-request" statement describes a rule to decide what to extract
from the request and when to do it, in order to store it into a stickiness table for further
requests to match it using the "stick match" statement. Obviously the extracted part must make sense
and have a chance to be matched in a further request. Storing a client's IP address for instance
often makes sense. Storing an ID found in a URL parameter also makes sense. Storing a source port
will almost never make any sense because it will be randomly matched. See [section 7](/docs/haproxy/acls-and-samples/) for a complete
list of possible patterns and transformation rules.

The table has to be declared using the "stick-table" statement. It must be of a type compatible with
the pattern. By default it is the one which is present in the same backend. It is possible to share
a table with other backends by referencing it using the "table" keyword. If another table is
referenced, the server's ID inside the backends are used. By default, all server IDs start at 1 in
each backend, so the server ordering is enough. But in case of doubt, it is highly recommended to
force server IDs using their "id" setting.

It is possible to restrict the conditions where a "stick store-request" statement will apply, using
"if" or "unless" followed by a condition. This condition will be evaluated while parsing the
request, so any criteria can be used. See [section 7](/docs/haproxy/acls-and-samples/) for ACL based conditions.

There is no limit on the number of "stick store-request" statements, but there is a limit of 8
simultaneous stores per request or response. This makes it possible to store up to 8 criteria, all
extracted from either the request or the response, regardless of the number of rules. Only the 8
first ones which match will be kept. Using this, it is possible to feed multiple tables at once in
the hope to increase the chance to recognize a user on another protocol or access method. Using
multiple store-request rules with the same table is possible and may be used to find the best
criterion to rely on, by arranging the rules by decreasing preference order. Only the first
extracted criterion for a given table will be stored. All subsequent store-request rules referencing
the same table will be skipped and their ACLs will not be evaluated.

The "store-request" rules are evaluated once the server connection has been established, so that the
table will contain the real server that processed the request.

Example:

```shell
# forward SMTP users to the same server they just used for POP in the
# last 30 minutes
backend pop
    mode tcp
    balance roundrobin
    stick store-request src
    stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
    server s1 192.168.1.1:110
    server s2 192.168.1.1:110

backend smtp
    mode tcp
    balance roundrobin
    stick match src table pop
    server s1 192.168.1.1:25
    server s2 192.168.1.1:25
```

See also: "stick-table", "stick on", [section 11](/docs/haproxy/stick-tables-and-peers/) about stick-tables, and [section 7](/docs/haproxy/acls-and-samples/) about ACLs and
sample fetching.

<a id="entry-4-2-stick-store-response"></a>

**`stick store-response <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <condition>]`**

```haproxy
stick store-response <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <condition>]
```

Define a response pattern used to create an entry in a stickiness table

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend no \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<pattern>  is a sample expression rule as described in section 7.3. It
           describes what elements of the response or connection will
           be analyzed, extracted and stored in the table once a
           server is selected.

<table>    is an optional stickiness table name. If unspecified, the same
           backend's table is used. A stickiness table is declared using
           the "stick-table" statement.

<cond>     is an optional storage condition. It makes it possible to store
           certain criteria only when some conditions are met (or not met).
           For instance, it could be used to store the SSL session ID only
           when the response is a SSL server hello.
```

Some protocols or applications require complex stickiness rules and cannot always simply rely on
cookies nor hashing. The "stick store-response" statement describes a rule to decide what to extract
from the response and when to do it, in order to store it into a stickiness table for further
requests to match it using the "stick match" statement. Obviously the extracted part must make sense
and have a chance to be matched in a further request. Storing an ID found in a header of a response
makes sense. See [section 7](/docs/haproxy/acls-and-samples/) for a complete list of possible patterns and transformation rules.

The table has to be declared using the "stick-table" statement. It must be of a type compatible with
the pattern. By default it is the one which is present in the same backend. It is possible to share
a table with other backends by referencing it using the "table" keyword. If another table is
referenced, the server's ID inside the backends are used. By default, all server IDs start at 1 in
each backend, so the server ordering is enough. But in case of doubt, it is highly recommended to
force server IDs using their "id" setting.

It is possible to restrict the conditions where a "stick store-response" statement will apply, using
"if" or "unless" followed by a condition. This condition will be evaluated while parsing the
response, so any criteria can be used. See [section 7](/docs/haproxy/acls-and-samples/) for ACL based conditions.

There is no limit on the number of "stick store-response" statements, but there is a limit of 8
simultaneous stores per request or response. This makes it possible to store up to 8 criteria, all
extracted from either the request or the response, regardless of the number of rules. Only the 8
first ones which match will be kept. Using this, it is possible to feed multiple tables at once in
the hope to increase the chance to recognize a user on another protocol or access method. Using
multiple store-response rules with the same table is possible and may be used to find the best
criterion to rely on, by arranging the rules by decreasing preference order. Only the first
extracted criterion for a given table will be stored. All subsequent store-response rules
referencing the same table will be skipped and their ACLs will not be evaluated. However, even if a
store-request rule references a table, a store-response rule may also use the same table. This means
that each table may learn exactly one element from the request and one element from the response at
once.

The table will contain the real server that processed the request.

Example:

```shell
# Learn SSL session ID from both request and response and create affinity.
backend https
    mode tcp
    balance roundrobin
    # maximum SSL session ID length is 32 bytes.
    stick-table type binary len 32 size 30k expire 30m

    acl clienthello req.ssl_hello_type 1
    acl serverhello res.ssl_hello_type 2

    # use tcp content accepts to detects ssl client and server hello.
    tcp-request inspect-delay 5s
    tcp-request content accept if clienthello

    # no timeout on response inspect delay by default.
    tcp-response content accept if serverhello

    # SSL session ID (SSLID) may be present on a client or server hello.
    # Its length is coded on 1 byte at offset 43 and its value starts
    # at offset 44.

    # Match and learn on request if client hello.
    stick on req.payload_lv(43,1) if clienthello

    # Learn on response if server hello.
    stick store-response resp.payload_lv(43,1) if serverhello

    server s1 192.168.1.1:443
    server s2 192.168.1.1:443
```

See also: "stick-table", "stick on", [section 11](/docs/haproxy/stick-tables-and-peers/) about stick-tables, and [section 7](/docs/haproxy/acls-and-samples/) about ACLs and
pattern extraction.

<a id="entry-4-2-stick-table-type"></a>

**`stick-table type <type> size <size> [expire <expire>] [args...]`**

```haproxy
stick-table type <type> size <size> [expire <expire>] [args...]
```

Configure the stickiness table for the current section

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend no \| yes \| yes \| yes

This is used to declare and configure a stick-table. Please refer to [section 11.1](/docs/haproxy/stick-tables-and-peers/#section-11-1) for the complete
details and the list of supported arguments. Only the type and the size are mandatory.

<a id="entry-4-2-tcp-check-comment"></a>

**`tcp-check comment <string>`**

```haproxy
tcp-check comment <string>
```

Defines a comment for the following the tcp-check rule, reported in logs if it fails.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<string>  is the comment message to add in logs if the following tcp-check
          rule fails.
```

It only works for connect, send and expect rules. It is useful to make user-friendly error
reporting.

See also: "option tcp-check", "tcp-check connect", "tcp-check send" and "tcp-check expect".

<a id="entry-4-2-tcp-check-connect"></a>

**`tcp-check connect [default] [port <expr>] [addr <ip>] [send-proxy] [via-socks4]`**

```haproxy
tcp-check connect [default] [port <expr>] [addr <ip>] [send-proxy] [via-socks4]
                  [ssl] [sni <sni>] [alpn <alpn>] [linger]
                  [proto <name>] [comment <msg>]
```

Opens a new connection

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
comment <msg>  defines a message to report if the rule evaluation fails.

default      Use default options of the server line to do the health
             checks. The server options are used only if not redefined.

port <expr>  if not set, check port or server port is used.
             It tells HAProxy where to open the connection to.
             <port> must be a valid TCP port source integer, from 1 to
             65535 or an sample-fetch expression.

addr <ip>    defines the IP address to do the health check.

send-proxy   send a PROXY protocol string

via-socks4   enables outgoing health checks using upstream socks4 proxy.

ssl          opens a ciphered connection

sni <sni>    specifies the SNI to use to do health checks over SSL.

alpn <alpn>  defines which protocols to advertise with ALPN. The protocol
             list consists in a comma-delimited list of protocol names,
             for instance: "http/1.1,http/1.0" (without quotes).
             If it is not set, the server ALPN is used.

proto <name> forces the multiplexer's protocol to use for this connection.
             It must be a TCP mux protocol and it must be usable on the
             backend side. The list of available protocols is reported in
             haproxy -vv.

linger       cleanly close the connection instead of using a single RST.
```

When an application lies on more than a single TCP port or when HAProxy load-balance many services
in a single backend, it makes sense to probe all the services individually before considering a
server as operational.

When there are no TCP port configured on the server line neither server port directive, then the
'tcp-check connect port `<port>`' must be the first step of the sequence.

In a tcp-check ruleset a 'connect' is required, it is also mandatory to start the ruleset with a
'connect' rule. Purpose is to ensure admin know what they do.

When a connect must start the ruleset, if may still be preceded by set-var, unset-var or comment
rules.

Examples:

```shell
# check HTTP and HTTPs services on a server.
# first open port 80 thanks to server line port directive, then
# tcp-check opens port 443, ciphered and run a request on it:
option tcp-check
tcp-check connect
tcp-check send GET\ /\ HTTP/1.0\r\n
tcp-check send Host:\ haproxy.1wt.eu\r\n
tcp-check send \r\n
tcp-check expect rstring (2..|3..)
tcp-check connect port 443 ssl
tcp-check send GET\ /\ HTTP/1.0\r\n
tcp-check send Host:\ haproxy.1wt.eu\r\n
tcp-check send \r\n
tcp-check expect rstring (2..|3..)
server www 10.0.0.1 check port 80

# check both POP and IMAP from a single server:
option tcp-check
tcp-check connect port 110 linger
tcp-check expect string +OK\ POP3\ ready
tcp-check connect port 143
tcp-check expect string *\ OK\ IMAP4\ ready
server mail 10.0.0.1 check
```

See also: "option tcp-check", "tcp-check send", "tcp-check expect"

<a id="entry-4-2-tcp-check-expect"></a>

**`tcp-check expect [min-recv <int>] [comment <msg>]`**

```haproxy
tcp-check expect [min-recv <int>] [comment <msg>]
                 [ok-status <st>] [error-status <st>] [tout-status <st>]
                 [on-success <fmt>] [on-error <fmt>] [status-code <expr>]
                 [!] <match> <pattern>
```

Specify data to be collected and analyzed during a generic health check

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
comment <msg>  defines a message to report if the rule evaluation fails.

min-recv  is optional and can define the minimum amount of data required to
          evaluate the current expect rule. If the number of received bytes
          is under this limit, the check will wait for more data. This
          option can be used to resolve some ambiguous matching rules or to
          avoid executing costly regex matches on content known to be still
          incomplete. If an exact string (string or binary) is used, the
          minimum between the string length and this parameter is used.
          This parameter is ignored if it is set to -1. If the expect rule
          does not match, the check will wait for more data. If set to 0,
          the evaluation result is always conclusive.

ok-status <st>     is optional and can be used to set the check status if
                   the expect rule is successfully evaluated and if it is
                   the last rule in the tcp-check ruleset. "L7OK", "L7OKC",
                   "L6OK" and "L4OK" are supported:
                     - L7OK : check passed on layer 7
                     - L7OKC: check conditionally passed on layer 7, set
                               server to NOLB state.
                     - L6OK : check passed on layer 6
                     - L4OK : check passed on layer 4
                    By default "L7OK" is used.

error-status <st>  is optional and can be used to set the check status if
                   an error occurred during the expect rule evaluation.
                   "L7OKC", "L7RSP", "L7STS", "L6RSP" and "L4CON" are
                   supported:
                     - L7OKC: check conditionally passed on layer 7, set
                               server to NOLB state.
                     - L7RSP: layer 7 invalid response - protocol error
                     - L7STS: layer 7 response error, for example HTTP 5xx
                     - L6RSP: layer 6 invalid response - protocol error
                     - L4CON: layer 1-4 connection problem
                   By default "L7RSP" is used.

tout-status <st>   is optional and can be used to set the check status if
                   a timeout occurred during the expect rule evaluation.
                   "L7TOUT", "L6TOUT", and "L4TOUT" are supported:
                     - L7TOUT: layer 7 (HTTP/SMTP) timeout
                     - L6TOUT: layer 6 (SSL) timeout
                     - L4TOUT: layer 1-4 timeout
                   By default "L7TOUT" is used.

on-success <fmt>   is optional and can be used to customize the
                   informational message reported in logs if the expect
                   rule is successfully evaluated and if it is the last rule
                   in the tcp-check ruleset. <fmt> is a Custom log format
                   (see section 8.2.6).

on-error <fmt>     is optional and can be used to customize the
                   informational message reported in logs if an error
                   occurred during the expect rule evaluation. <fmt> is a
                   Custom log format (see section 8.2.6).

status-code <expr> is optional and can be used to set the check status code
                   reported in logs, on success or on error. <expr> is a
                   standard HAProxy expression formed by a sample-fetch
                   followed by some converters.

<match>   is a keyword indicating how to look for a specific pattern in the
          response. The keyword may be one of "string", "rstring", "binary" or
          "rbinary".
          The keyword may be preceded by an exclamation mark ("!") to negate
          the match. Spaces are allowed between the exclamation mark and the
          keyword. See below for more details on the supported keywords.

<pattern> is the pattern to look for. It may be a string or a regular
          expression. If the pattern contains spaces, they must be escaped
          with the usual backslash ('\').
          If the match is set to binary, then the pattern must be passed as
          a series of hexadecimal digits in an even number. Each sequence of
          two digits will represent a byte. The hexadecimal digits may be
          used upper or lower case.
```

The available matches are intentionally similar to their http-check cousins:

```text
string <string>: test the exact string matches in the response buffer.
                  A health check response will be considered valid if the
                  response's buffer contains this exact string. If the
                  "string" keyword is prefixed with "!", then the response
                  will be considered invalid if the body contains this
                  string. This can be used to look for a mandatory pattern
                  in a protocol response, or to detect a failure when a
                  specific error appears in a protocol banner.

rstring <regex>: test a regular expression on the response buffer.
                  A health check response will be considered valid if the
                  response's buffer matches this expression. If the
                  "rstring" keyword is prefixed with "!", then the response
                  will be considered invalid if the body matches the
                  expression.

string-lf <fmt>: test a Custom log format match in the response's buffer.
                  A health check response will be considered valid if the
                  response's buffer contains the  string resulting of the
                  evaluation of <fmt>, which follows the Custom log format
                  rules described in section 8.2.6. If prefixed with "!",
                  then the response will be considered invalid if the
                  buffer contains the string.

binary <hexstring>: test the exact string in its hexadecimal form matches
                     in the response buffer. A health check response will
                     be considered valid if the response's buffer contains
                     this exact hexadecimal string.
                     Purpose is to match data on binary protocols.

rbinary <regex>: test a regular expression on the response buffer, like
                  "rstring". However, the response buffer is transformed
                  into its hexadecimal form, including NUL-bytes. This
                  allows using all regex engines to match any binary
                  content.  The hexadecimal transformation takes twice the
                  size of the original response. As such, the expected
                  pattern should work on at-most half the response buffer
                  size.

binary-lf <hexfmt>: test a Custom log format in its hexadecimal form match
                     in the response's buffer. A health check response will
                     be considered valid if the response's buffer contains
                     the hexadecimal string resulting of the evaluation of
                     <fmt>, which follows the Custom log format rules (see
                     section 8.2.6). If prefixed with "!", then the
                     response will be considered invalid if the buffer
                     contains the hexadecimal string. The hexadecimal
                     string is converted in a binary string before matching
                     the response's buffer.
```

It is important to note that the responses will be limited to a certain size defined by the global
"tune.bufsize" option, which defaults to 16384 bytes. Thus, too large responses may not contain the
mandatory pattern when using "string", "rstring" or binary. If a large response is absolutely
required, it is possible to change the default max size by setting the global variable. However, it
is worth keeping in mind that parsing very large responses can waste some CPU cycles, especially
when regular expressions are used, and that it is always better to focus the checks on smaller
resources. Also, in its current state, the check will not find any string nor regex past a null
character in the response. Similarly it is not possible to request matching the null character.

Examples:

```shell
# perform a POP check
option tcp-check
tcp-check expect string +OK\ POP3\ ready

# perform an IMAP check
option tcp-check
tcp-check expect string *\ OK\ IMAP4\ ready

# look for the redis master server
option tcp-check
tcp-check send PING\r\n
tcp-check expect string +PONG
tcp-check send info\ replication\r\n
tcp-check expect string role:master
tcp-check send QUIT\r\n
tcp-check expect string +OK

```

See also: "option tcp-check", "tcp-check connect", "tcp-check send", "tcp-check send-binary",
"http-check expect", tune.bufsize

<a id="entry-4-2-tcp-check-send"></a>

**`tcp-check send <data> [comment <msg>]`**

```haproxy
tcp-check send <data> [comment <msg>]
tcp-check send-lf <fmt> [comment <msg>]
```

Specify a string or a Custom log format to be sent as a question during a generic health check

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
comment <msg>  defines a message to report if the rule evaluation fails.

<data>         is the string that will be sent during a generic health
               check session.

<fmt>          is the Custom log format that will be sent, once evaluated,
               during a generic health check session (see section 8.2.6).
```

Examples:

```shell
# look for the redis master server
option tcp-check
tcp-check send info\ replication\r\n
tcp-check expect string role:master
```

See also: "option tcp-check", "tcp-check connect", "tcp-check expect", "tcp-check send-binary",
tune.bufsize

<a id="entry-4-2-tcp-check-send-binary"></a>

**`tcp-check send-binary <hexstring> [comment <msg>]`**

```haproxy
tcp-check send-binary <hexstring> [comment <msg>]
tcp-check send-binary-lf <hexfmt> [comment <msg>]
```

Specify an hex digits string or an hex digits Custom log format to be sent as a binary question
during a raw tcp health check

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
comment <msg>  defines a message to report if the rule evaluation fails.

<hexstring>    is the hexadecimal string that will be send, once converted
               to binary, during a generic health check session.

<hexfmt>       is the hexadecimal Custom log format that will be send, once
               evaluated and converted to binary, during a generic health
               check session (see section 8.2.6).
```

Examples:

```shell
# redis check in binary
option tcp-check
tcp-check send-binary 50494e470d0a # PING\r\n
tcp-check expect binary 2b504F4e47 # +PONG

```

See also: "option tcp-check", "tcp-check connect", "tcp-check expect", "tcp-check send",
tune.bufsize

<a id="entry-4-2-tcp-check-set-var"></a>

**`tcp-check set-var(<var-name>[,<cond>...]) <expr>`**

```haproxy
tcp-check set-var(<var-name>[,<cond>...]) <expr>
tcp-check set-var-fmt(<var-name>[,<cond>...]) <fmt>
```

This operation sets the content of a variable. The variable is declared inline.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<var-name>   The name of the variable. Only "proc", "sess" and "check"
             scopes can be used. See section 2.8 about variables for details.

 <cond>      A set of conditions that must all be true for the variable to
             actually be set (such as "ifnotempty", "ifgt" ...). See the
             set-var converter's description for a full list of possible
             conditions.

 <expr>      Is a sample-fetch expression potentially followed by converters.

 <fmt>       This is the value expressed using Custom log format rules (see
             Custom log format in section 8.2.6).
```

Examples:

```text
tcp-check set-var(check.port) int(1234)
tcp-check set-var-fmt(check.name) "%H"

```

<a id="entry-4-2-tcp-check-unset-var"></a>

**`tcp-check unset-var(<var-name>)`**

```haproxy
tcp-check unset-var(<var-name>)
```

Free a reference to a variable within its scope.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<var-name>   The name of the variable. Only "proc", "sess" and "check"
             scopes can be used. See section 2.8 about variables for details.
```

Examples:

```text
tcp-check unset-var(check.port)

```

<a id="entry-4-2-tcp-request-connection"></a>

**`tcp-request connection <action> <options...> [ { if | unless } <condition> ]`**

```haproxy
tcp-request connection <action> <options...> [ { if | unless } <condition> ]
```

Perform an action on an incoming connection depending on a layer 4 condition

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes(!) \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments:

```text
<action>    defines the action to perform if the condition applies. See
            below.

<condition> is a standard layer4-only ACL-based condition (see section 7).
```

Immediately after acceptance of a new incoming connection, it is possible to evaluate some
conditions to decide whether this connection must be accepted or dropped or have its counters
tracked. Those conditions cannot make use of any data contents because the connection has not been
read from yet, and the buffers are not yet allocated. This is used to selectively and very quickly
accept or drop connections from various sources with a very low overhead. If some contents need to
be inspected in order to take the decision, the "tcp-request content" statements must be used
instead.

The "tcp-request connection" rules are evaluated in their exact declaration order. If no rule
matches or if there is no rule, the default action is to accept the incoming connection. There is no
specific limit to the number of rules which may be inserted. Any rule may optionally be followed by
an ACL-based condition, in which case it will only be evaluated if the condition evaluates to true.

The condition is evaluated just before the action is executed, and the action is performed exactly
once. As such, there is no problem if an action changes an element which is checked as part of the
condition. This also means that multiple actions may rely on the same condition so that the first
action that changes the condition's evaluation is sufficient to implicitly disable the remaining
actions. This is used for example when trying to assign a value to a variable from various sources
when it's empty.

The first keyword after "tcp-request connection" in the syntax is the rule's action, optionally
followed by a varying number of arguments for the action. The supported actions and their respective
syntaxes are enumerated in [section 4.3](/docs/haproxy/proxies/#section-4-3) "Actions" (look for actions which tick "TCP RqCon").

This directive is only available from named defaults sections, not anonymous ones. Rules defined in
the defaults section are evaluated before ones in the associated proxy section. To avoid
ambiguities, in this case the same defaults section cannot be used by proxies with the frontend
capability and by proxies with the backend capability. It means a listen section cannot use a
defaults section defining such rules.

Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on the action, it is simply
performed unconditionally. That can be useful for "track-sc\*" actions as well as for changing the
default action to a reject.

Example: accept all connections from white-listed hosts, reject too fast connection without counting
them, and track accepted connections. This results in connection rate being capped from abusive
sources.

        tcp-request connection accept if { src -f /etc/haproxy/whitelist.lst }
        tcp-request connection reject if { src_conn_rate gt 10 }
        tcp-request connection track-sc0 src

Example: accept all connections from white-listed hosts, count all other connections and reject too
fast ones. This results in abusive ones being blocked as long as they don't slow down.

        tcp-request connection accept if { src -f /etc/haproxy/whitelist.lst }
        tcp-request connection track-sc0 src
        tcp-request connection reject if { sc0_conn_rate gt 10 }

Example: enable the PROXY protocol for traffic coming from all known proxies.

        tcp-request connection expect-proxy layer4 if { src -f proxies.lst }

See [section 7](/docs/haproxy/acls-and-samples/) about ACL usage.

See also: "tcp-request session", "tcp-request content", "stick-table"

<a id="entry-4-2-tcp-request-content"></a>

**`tcp-request content <action> [{if | unless} <condition>]`**

```haproxy
tcp-request content <action> [{if | unless} <condition>]
```

Perform an action on a new session depending on a layer 4-7 condition

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes(!) \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<action>    defines the action to perform if the condition applies. See
            below.

<condition> is a standard layer 4-7 ACL-based condition (see section 7).
```

A request's contents can be analyzed at an early stage of request processing called "TCP content
inspection". During this stage, ACL-based rules are evaluated every time the request contents are
updated, until either an "accept", a "reject" or a "switch-mode" rule matches, or the TCP request
inspection delay expires with no matching rule.

The first difference between these rules and "tcp-request connection" rules is that "tcp-request
content" rules can make use of contents to take a decision. Most often, these decisions will
consider a protocol recognition or validity. The second difference is that content-based rules can
be used in both frontends and backends. In case of HTTP keep-alive with the client, all tcp-request
content rules are evaluated again, so HAProxy keeps a record of what sticky counters were assigned
by a "tcp-request connection" versus a "tcp-request content" rule, and flushes all the
content-related ones after processing an HTTP request, so that they may be evaluated again by the
rules being evaluated again for the next request. This is of particular importance when the rule
tracks some L7 information or when it is conditioned by an L7-based ACL, since tracking may change
between requests.

Content-based rules are evaluated in their exact declaration order. If no rule matches or if there
is no rule, the default action is to accept the contents. There is no specific limit to the number
of rules which may be inserted.

While there is nothing mandatory about it, it is recommended to use the track-sc0 in "tcp-request
connection" rules, track-sc1 for "tcp-request content" rules in the frontend, and track-sc2 for
"tcp-request content" rules in the backend, because that makes the configuration more readable and
easier to troubleshoot, but this is just a guideline and all counters may be used everywhere.

The first keyword after "tcp-request content" in the syntax is the rule's action, optionally
followed by a varying number of arguments for the action. The supported actions and their respective
syntaxes are enumerated in [section 4.3](/docs/haproxy/proxies/#section-4-3) "Actions" (look for actions which tick "TCP RqCnt").

This directive is only available from named defaults sections, not anonymous ones. Rules defined in
the defaults section are evaluated before ones in the associated proxy section. To avoid
ambiguities, in this case the same defaults section cannot be used by proxies with the frontend
capability and by proxies with the backend capability. It means a listen section cannot use a
defaults section defining such rules.

Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on the action, it is simply
performed unconditionally. That can be useful for "track-sc\*" actions as well as for changing the
default action to a reject.

Note also that it is recommended to use a "tcp-request session" rule to track information that does
*not* depend on Layer 7 contents, especially for HTTP frontends. Some HTTP processing are performed
at the session level and may lead to an early rejection of the requests. Thus, the tracking at the
content level may be disturbed in such case. A warning is emitted during startup to prevent, as far
as possible, such unreliable usage.

It is perfectly possible to match layer 7 contents with "tcp-request content" rules from a TCP
proxy, since HTTP-specific ACL matches are able to preliminarily parse the contents of a buffer
before extracting the required data. If the buffered contents do not parse as a valid HTTP message,
then the ACL does not match. The parser which is involved there is exactly the same as for all other
HTTP processing, so there is no risk of parsing something differently. In an HTTP frontend or an
HTTP backend, it is guaranteed that HTTP contents will always be immediately present when the rule
is evaluated first because the HTTP parsing is performed in the early stages of the connection
processing, at the session level. But for such proxies, using "http-request" rules is much more
natural and recommended.

Tracking layer7 information is also possible provided that the information are present when the rule
is processed. The rule processing engine is able to wait until the inspect delay expires when the
data to be tracked is not yet available.

Example:

```text
tcp-request content use-service lua.deny if { src -f /etc/haproxy/blacklist.lst }
```

Example:

```text
tcp-request content set-var(sess.my_var) src
tcp-request content set-var-fmt(sess.from) %[src]:%[src_port]
tcp-request content unset-var(sess.my_var2)
```

Example:

```shell
# Accept HTTP requests containing a Host header saying "example.com"
# and reject everything else. (Only works for HTTP/1 connections)
acl is_host_com hdr(Host) -i example.com
tcp-request inspect-delay 30s
tcp-request content accept if is_host_com
tcp-request content reject

# Accept HTTP requests containing a Host header saying "example.com"
# and reject everything else. (works for HTTP/1 and HTTP/2 connections)
acl is_host_com hdr(Host) -i example.com
tcp-request inspect-delay 5s
tcp-request content switch-mode http if HTTP
tcp-request content reject   # non-HTTP traffic is implicit here
...
http-request reject unless is_host_com
```

Example:

```shell
# reject SMTP connection if client speaks first
tcp-request inspect-delay 30s
acl content_present req.len gt 0
tcp-request content reject if content_present

# Forward HTTPS connection only if client speaks
tcp-request inspect-delay 30s
acl content_present req.len gt 0
tcp-request content accept if content_present
tcp-request content reject
```

Example:

```shell
# Track the last IP(stick-table type string) from X-Forwarded-For
tcp-request inspect-delay 10s
tcp-request content track-sc0 hdr(x-forwarded-for,-1)
# Or track the last IP(stick-table type ip|ipv6) from X-Forwarded-For
tcp-request content track-sc0 req.hdr_ip(x-forwarded-for,-1)
```

Example:

```shell
# track request counts per "base" (concatenation of Host+URL)
tcp-request inspect-delay 10s
tcp-request content track-sc0 base table req-rate
```

Example: track per-frontend and per-backend counters, block abusers at the frontend when the backend
detects abuse(and marks gpc0).

        frontend http
            # Use General Purpose Counter 0 in SC0 as a global abuse counter
            # protecting all our sites
            stick-table type ip size 1m expire 5m store gpc0
            tcp-request connection track-sc0 src
            tcp-request connection reject if { sc0_get_gpc0 gt 0 }
            ...
            use_backend http_dynamic if { path_end .php }

        backend http_dynamic
            # if a source makes too fast requests to this dynamic site (tracked
            # by SC1), block it globally in the frontend.
            stick-table type ip size 1m expire 5m store http_req_rate(10s)
            acl click_too_fast sc1_http_req_rate gt 10
            acl mark_as_abuser sc0_inc_gpc0(http) gt 0
            tcp-request content track-sc1 src
            tcp-request content reject if click_too_fast mark_as_abuser

See [section 7](/docs/haproxy/acls-and-samples/) about ACL usage.

See also: "tcp-request connection", "tcp-request session", "tcp-request inspect-delay", and
"http-request".

<a id="entry-4-2-tcp-request-inspect-delay"></a>

**`tcp-request inspect-delay <timeout>`**

```haproxy
tcp-request inspect-delay <timeout>
```

Set the maximum allowed time to wait for data during content inspection

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes(!) \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
          can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
          as explained at the top of this document.
```

People using HAProxy primarily as a TCP relay are often worried about the risk of passing any type
of protocol to a server without any analysis. In order to be able to analyze the request contents,
we must first withhold the data then analyze them. This statement simply enables withholding of data
for at most the specified amount of time.

TCP content inspection applies very early when a connection reaches a frontend, then very early when
the connection is forwarded to a backend. This means that a connection may experience a first delay
in the frontend and a second delay in the backend if both have tcp-request rules.

Note that when performing content inspection, HAProxy will evaluate the whole rules for every new
chunk which gets in, taking into account the fact that those data are partial. If no rule matches
before the aforementioned delay, a last check is performed upon expiration, this time considering
that the contents are definitive. If no delay is set, HAProxy will not wait at all and will
immediately apply a verdict based on the available information. Obviously this is unlikely to be
very useful and might even be racy, so such setups are not recommended.

Note the inspection delay is shortened if an connection error or shutdown is experienced or if the
request buffer appears as full.

As soon as a rule matches, the request is released and continues as usual. If the timeout is reached
and no rule matches, the default policy will be to let it pass through unaffected.

For most protocols, it is enough to set it to a few seconds, as most clients send the full request
immediately upon connection. Add 3 or more seconds to cover TCP retransmits but that's all. For some
protocols, it may make sense to use large values, for instance to ensure that the client never talks
before the server (e.g. SMTP), or to wait for a client to talk before passing data to the server
(e.g. SSL). Note that the client timeout must cover at least the inspection delay, otherwise it will
expire first. If the client closes the connection or if the buffer is full, the delay immediately
expires since the contents will not be able to change anymore.

This directive is only available from named defaults sections, not anonymous ones. Proxies inherit
this value from their defaults section.

See also: "tcp-request content accept", "tcp-request content reject", "timeout client".

<a id="entry-4-2-tcp-request-session"></a>

**`tcp-request session <action> [{if | unless} <condition>]`**

```haproxy
tcp-request session <action> [{if | unless} <condition>]
```

Perform an action on a validated session depending on a layer 5 condition

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes(!) \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments:

```text
<action>    defines the action to perform if the condition applies. See
            below.

<condition> is a standard layer5-only ACL-based condition (see section 7).
```

Once a session is validated, (i.e. after all handshakes have been completed), it is possible to
evaluate some conditions to decide whether this session must be accepted or dropped or have its
counters tracked. Those conditions cannot make use of any data contents because no buffers are
allocated yet and the processing cannot wait at this stage. The main use case is to copy some early
information into variables (since variables are accessible in the session), or to keep track of some
information collected after the handshake, such as SSL-level elements (SNI, ciphers, client cert's
CN) or information from the PROXY protocol header (e.g. track a source forwarded this way). The
extracted information can thus be copied to a variable or tracked using "track-sc" rules. Of course
it is also possible to decide to accept/reject as with other rulesets. Most operations performed
here could also be performed in "tcp-request content" rules, except that in HTTP these rules are
evaluated for each new request, and that might not always be acceptable. For example a rule might
increment a counter on each evaluation. It would also be possible that a country is resolved by
geolocation from the source IP address, assigned to a session-wide variable, then the source address
rewritten from an HTTP header for all requests. If some contents need to be inspected in order to
take the decision, the "tcp-request content" statements must be used instead.

The "tcp-request session" rules are evaluated in their exact declaration order. If no rule matches
or if there is no rule, the default action is to accept the incoming session. There is no specific
limit to the number of rules which may be inserted.

The first keyword after "tcp-request session" in the syntax is the rule's action, optionally
followed by a varying number of arguments for the action. The supported actions and their respective
syntaxes are enumerated in [section 4.3](/docs/haproxy/proxies/#section-4-3) "Actions" (look for actions which tick "TCP RqSes").

This directive is only available from named defaults sections, not anonymous ones. Rules defined in
the defaults section are evaluated before ones in the associated proxy section. To avoid
ambiguities, in this case the same defaults section cannot be used by proxies with the frontend
capability and by proxies with the backend capability. It means a listen section cannot use a
defaults section defining such rules.

Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on the action, it is simply
performed unconditionally. That can be useful for "track-sc\*" actions as well as for changing the
default action to a reject.

Example: track the original source address by default, or the one advertised in the PROXY protocol
header for connection coming from the local proxies. The first connection-level rule enables receipt
of the PROXY protocol for these ones, the second rule tracks whatever address we decide to keep
after optional decoding.

        tcp-request connection expect-proxy layer4 if { src -f proxies.lst }
        tcp-request session track-sc0 src

Example: accept all sessions from white-listed hosts, reject too fast sessions without counting
them, and track accepted sessions. This results in session rate being capped from abusive sources.

        tcp-request session accept if { src -f /etc/haproxy/whitelist.lst }
        tcp-request session reject if { src_sess_rate gt 10 }
        tcp-request session track-sc0 src

Example: accept all sessions from white-listed hosts, count all other sessions and reject too fast
ones. This results in abusive ones being blocked as long as they don't slow down.

        tcp-request session accept if { src -f /etc/haproxy/whitelist.lst }
        tcp-request session track-sc0 src
        tcp-request session reject if { sc0_sess_rate gt 10 }

See [section 7](/docs/haproxy/acls-and-samples/) about ACL usage.

See also: "tcp-request connection", "tcp-request content", "stick-table"

<a id="entry-4-2-tcp-response-content"></a>

**`tcp-response content <action> [{if | unless} <condition>]`**

```haproxy
tcp-response content <action> [{if | unless} <condition>]
```

Perform an action on a session response depending on a layer 4-7 condition

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes(!) \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<action>    defines the action to perform if the condition applies. See
            below.

<condition> is a standard layer 4-7 ACL-based condition (see section 7).
```

Response contents can be analyzed at an early stage of response processing called "TCP content
inspection". During this stage, ACL-based rules are evaluated every time the response contents are
updated, until either a final rule matches, or a TCP response inspection delay is set and expires
with no matching rule.

Most often, these decisions will consider a protocol recognition or validity.

Content-based rules are evaluated in their exact declaration order. If no rule matches or if there
is no rule, the default action is to accept the contents. There is no specific limit to the number
of rules which may be inserted.

The first keyword after "tcp-response content" in the syntax is the rule's action, optionally
followed by a varying number of arguments for the action. The supported actions and their respective
syntaxes are enumerated in [section 4.3](/docs/haproxy/proxies/#section-4-3) "Actions" (look for actions which tick "TCP RsCnt").

This directive is only available from named defaults sections, not anonymous ones. Rules defined in
the defaults section are evaluated before ones in the associated proxy section. To avoid
ambiguities, in this case the same defaults section cannot be used by proxies with the frontend
capability and by proxies with the backend capability. It means a listen section cannot use a
defaults section defining such rules.

Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on the action, it is simply
performed unconditionally. That can be useful for for changing the default action to a reject.

Several types of actions are supported:

It is perfectly possible to match layer 7 contents with "tcp-response content" rules, but then it is
important to ensure that a full response has been buffered, otherwise no contents will match. In
order to achieve this, the best solution involves detecting the HTTP protocol during the inspection
period.

See [section 7](/docs/haproxy/acls-and-samples/) about ACL usage.

See also: "tcp-request content", "tcp-response inspect-delay"

<a id="entry-4-2-tcp-response-inspect-delay"></a>

**`tcp-response inspect-delay <timeout>`**

```haproxy
tcp-response inspect-delay <timeout>
```

Set the maximum allowed time to wait for a response during content inspection

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes(!) \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
          can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
          as explained at the top of this document.
```

This directive is only available from named defaults sections, not anonymous ones. Proxies inherit
this value from their defaults section.

See also: "tcp-response content", "tcp-request inspect-delay".

<a id="entry-4-2-timeout-check"></a>

**`timeout check <timeout>`**

```haproxy
timeout check <timeout>
```

Set additional check timeout, but only after a connection has been already established.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
          can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
          as explained at the top of this document.
```

If set, HAProxy uses min("timeout connect", "inter") as a connect timeout for check and "timeout
check" as an additional read timeout. The "min" is used so that people running with *very* long
"timeout connect" (e.g. those who needed this due to the queue or tarpit) do not slow down their
checks. (Please also note that there is no valid reason to have such long connect timeouts, because
"timeout queue" and "timeout tarpit" can always be used to avoid that).

If "timeout check" is not set HAProxy uses "inter" for complete check timeout (connect + read)
exactly like all \<1.3.15 version.

In most cases check request is much simpler and faster to handle than normal requests and people may
want to kick out laggy servers so this timeout should be smaller than "timeout server".

This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in "defaults" sections.
This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to forget about it.

See also: "timeout connect", "timeout queue", "timeout server", "timeout tarpit".

<a id="entry-4-2-timeout-client"></a>

**`timeout client <timeout>`**

```haproxy
timeout client <timeout>
```

Set the maximum inactivity time on the client side.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments:

```text
<timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
          can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
          as explained at the top of this document.
```

The inactivity timeout applies when the client is expected to acknowledge or send data. In HTTP
mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider during the first phase, when the client
sends the request, and during the response while it is reading data sent by the server. That said,
for the first phase, it is preferable to set the "timeout http-request" to better protect HAProxy
from Slowloris like attacks. The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any
other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this document. In TCP
mode (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly recommended that the client timeout
remains equal to the server timeout in order to avoid complex situations to debug. It is a good
practice to cover one or several TCP packet losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above
multiples of 3 seconds (e.g. 4 or 5 seconds). If some long-lived streams are mixed with short-lived
streams (e.g. WebSocket and HTTP), it's worth considering "timeout tunnel", which overrides "timeout
client" and "timeout server" for tunnels, as well as "timeout client-fin" for half-closed
connections.

This parameter is specific to frontends, but can be specified once for all in "defaults" sections.
This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to forget about it. An unspecified timeout results
in an infinite timeout, which is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a
warning during startup because it may result in accumulation of expired sessions in the system if
the system's timeouts are not configured either.

See also: "timeout server", "timeout tunnel", "timeout http-request".

<a id="entry-4-2-timeout-client-fin"></a>

**`timeout client-fin <timeout>`**

```haproxy
timeout client-fin <timeout>
```

Set the inactivity timeout on the client side for half-closed connections.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments:

```text
<timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
          can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
          as explained at the top of this document.
```

The inactivity timeout applies when the client is expected to acknowledge or send data while one
direction is already shut down. This timeout is different from "timeout client" in that it only
applies to connections which are closed in one direction. This is particularly useful to avoid
keeping connections in FIN_WAIT state for too long when clients do not disconnect cleanly. This
problem is particularly common long connections such as RDP or WebSocket. Note that this timeout can
override "timeout tunnel" when a connection shuts down in one direction. It is applied to idle
HTTP/2 connections once a GOAWAY frame was sent, often indicating an expectation that the connection
quickly ends.

This parameter is specific to frontends, but can be specified once for all in "defaults" sections.
By default it is not set, so half-closed connections will use the other timeouts (timeout.client or
timeout.tunnel).

See also: "timeout client", "timeout server-fin", and "timeout tunnel".

<a id="entry-4-2-timeout-client-hs"></a>

**`timeout client-hs <timeout>`**

```haproxy
timeout client-hs <timeout>
```

Set the maximum time to wait for a client TLS handshake to complete. This is usable both for TCP and
QUIC connections.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments:

```text
<timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
          can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
          as explained at the top of this document.
```

If this handshake timeout is not set, this is the client timeout which is used in place.

<a id="entry-4-2-timeout-connect"></a>

**`timeout connect <timeout>`**

```haproxy
timeout connect <timeout>
```

Set the maximum time to wait for a connection attempt to a server to succeed.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
          can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
          as explained at the top of this document.
```

If the server is located on the same LAN as HAProxy, the connection should be immediate (less than a
few milliseconds). Anyway, it is a good practice to cover one or several TCP packet losses by
specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3 seconds (e.g. 4 or 5 seconds). By
default, the connect timeout also presets both queue and tarpit timeouts to the same value if these
have not been specified.

This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in "defaults" sections.
This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to forget about it. An unspecified timeout results
in an infinite timeout, which is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a
warning during startup because it may result in accumulation of failed sessions in the system if the
system's timeouts are not configured either.

See also: "timeout check", "timeout queue", "timeout server", "timeout tarpit".

<a id="entry-4-2-timeout-http-keep-alive"></a>

**`timeout http-keep-alive <timeout>`**

```haproxy
timeout http-keep-alive <timeout>
```

Set the maximum allowed time to wait for a new HTTP request to appear

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
          can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
          as explained at the top of this document.
```

By default, the time to wait for a new request in case of keep-alive is set by "timeout
http-request". However this is not always convenient because some people want very short keep-alive
timeouts in order to release connections faster, and others prefer to have larger ones but still
have short timeouts once the request has started to present itself.

The "http-keep-alive" timeout covers these needs. It will define how long to wait for a new HTTP
request to start coming after a response was sent. Once the first byte of request has been seen, the
"http-request" timeout is used to wait for the complete request to come. Note that empty lines prior
to a new request do not refresh the timeout and are not counted as a new request.

There is also another difference between the two timeouts: when a connection expires during timeout
http-keep-alive, no error is returned, the connection just closes. If the connection expires in
"http-request" while waiting for a request to complete, an HTTP 408 error is returned to the client
before closing the connection, unless "option http-ignore-probes" is set in the frontend.

In general "timeout http-keep-alive" is best used to prevent clients from holding open an otherwise
idle connection too long on sites seeing large amounts of short connections. This can be
accomplished by setting the value to a few tens to hundreds of milliseconds in HTTP/1.1. This will
close the connection after the client requests a page without having to hold that connection open to
wait for more activity from the client. In that scenario, a new activity from the browser would
result in a new handshake at the TCP and/or SSL layer. A common use case for this is HTTP sites
serving only a redirect to the HTTPS page. Such connections are better not kept idle too long
because they won't be reused, unless maybe to fetch a favicon.

Another use case is the exact opposite: some sites want to permit clients to reuse idle connections
for a long time (e.g. 30 seconds to one minute) but do not want to wait that long for the first
request, in order to avoid a very inexpensive attack vector. In this case, the http-keep-alive
timeout would be set to a large value, but http-request would remain low (a few seconds).

When set to a very small value additional requests that are not pipelined are likely going to be
handled over another connection unless the requests are truly pipelined, which is very rare with
HTTP/1.1 (requests being sent back-to-back without waiting for a response). Most HTTP/1.1
implementations send a request, wait for a response and then send another request. A small value
here for HTTP/1.1 may be advantageous to use less memory and sockets for sites with hundreds of
thousands of clients, at the expense of an increase in handshake computation costs.

Special care should be taken with small values when dealing with HTTP/2. The nature of HTTP/2 is to
multiplex requests over a connection in order to save on the overhead of reconnecting the TCP and/or
SSL layers. The protocol also uses control frames which cope poorly with early TCP connection
closures, on very rare occasions this may result in truncated responses when data are destroyed in
flight after leaving HAProxy (which then cannot even log an error). A suggested low starting value
for HTTP/2 connections would be around 4 seconds. This would prevent most modern keep-alive
implementations from needlessly holding open stale connections, and at the same time would allow
subsequent requests to reuse the connection. However, this should be adjusted as needed and is
simply a starting point.

If this parameter is not set, the "http-request" timeout applies, and if both are not set, "timeout
client" still applies at the lower level. It should be set in the frontend to take effect, unless
the frontend is in TCP mode, in which case the HTTP backend's timeout will be used.

See also: "timeout http-request", "timeout client".

<a id="entry-4-2-timeout-http-request"></a>

**`timeout http-request <timeout>`**

```haproxy
timeout http-request <timeout>
```

Set the maximum allowed time to wait for a complete HTTP request

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
          can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
          as explained at the top of this document.
```

In order to offer DoS protection, it may be required to lower the maximum accepted time to receive a
complete HTTP request without affecting the client timeout. This helps protecting against
established connections on which nothing is sent. The client timeout cannot offer a good protection
against this abuse because it is an inactivity timeout, which means that if the attacker sends one
character every now and then, the timeout will not trigger. With the HTTP request timeout, no matter
what speed the client types, the request will be aborted if it does not complete in time. When the
timeout expires, an HTTP 408 response is sent to the client to inform it about the problem, and the
connection is closed. The logs will report termination codes "cR". Some recent browsers are having
problems with this standard, well-documented behavior, so it might be needed to hide the 408 code
using "option http-ignore-probes" or "errorfile 408 /dev/null". See more details in the explanations
of the "cR" termination code in [section 8.5](/docs/haproxy/configuration-logging/#section-8-5).

By default, this timeout only applies to the header part of the request, and not to any data. As
soon as the empty line is received, this timeout is not used anymore. When combined with "option
http-buffer-request", this timeout also applies to the body of the request.. It is used again on
keep-alive connections to wait for a second request if "timeout http-keep-alive" is not set.

Generally it is enough to set it to a few seconds, as most clients send the full request immediately
upon connection. Add 3 or more seconds to cover TCP retransmits but that's all. Setting it to very
low values (e.g. 50 ms) will generally work on local networks as long as there are no packet losses.
This will prevent people from sending bare HTTP requests using telnet.

If this parameter is not set, the client timeout still applies between each chunk of the incoming
request. It should be set in the frontend to take effect, unless the frontend is in TCP mode, in
which case the HTTP backend's timeout will be used.

See also: "errorfile", "http-ignore-probes", "timeout http-keep-alive", and "timeout client",
"option http-buffer-request".

<a id="entry-4-2-timeout-queue"></a>

**`timeout queue <timeout>`**

```haproxy
timeout queue <timeout>
```

Set the maximum time to wait in the queue for a connection slot to be free

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
          can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
          as explained at the top of this document.
```

When a server's maxconn is reached, connections are left pending in a queue which may be
server-specific or global to the backend. In order not to wait indefinitely, a timeout is applied to
requests pending in the queue. If the timeout is reached, it is considered that the request will
almost never be served, so it is dropped and a 503 error is returned to the client.

The "timeout queue" statement allows to fix the maximum time for a request to be left pending in a
queue. If unspecified, the same value as the backend's connection timeout ("timeout connect") is
used, for backwards compatibility with older versions with no "timeout queue" parameter.

See also: "timeout connect".

<a id="entry-4-2-timeout-server"></a>

**`timeout server <timeout>`**

```haproxy
timeout server <timeout>
```

Set the maximum inactivity time on the server side.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
          can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
          as explained at the top of this document.
```

The inactivity timeout applies when the server is expected to acknowledge or send data. In HTTP
mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider during the first phase of the server's
response, when it has to send the headers, as it directly represents the server's processing time
for the request. To find out what value to put there, it's often good to start with what would be
considered as unacceptable response times, then check the logs to observe the response time
distribution, and adjust the value accordingly.

The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other unit if the number is
suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this document. In TCP mode (and to a lesser extent,
in HTTP mode), it is highly recommended that the client timeout remains equal to the server timeout
in order to avoid complex situations to debug. Whatever the expected server response times, it is a
good practice to cover at least one or several TCP packet losses by specifying timeouts that are
slightly above multiples of 3 seconds (e.g. 4 or 5 seconds minimum). If some long-lived streams are
mixed with short-lived streams (e.g. WebSocket and HTTP), it's worth considering "timeout tunnel",
which overrides "timeout client" and "timeout server" for tunnels.

This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in "defaults" sections.
This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to forget about it. An unspecified timeout results
in an infinite timeout, which is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a
warning during startup because it may result in accumulation of expired sessions in the system if
the system's timeouts are not configured either.

See also: "timeout client" and "timeout tunnel".

<a id="entry-4-2-timeout-server-fin"></a>

**`timeout server-fin <timeout>`**

```haproxy
timeout server-fin <timeout>
```

Set the inactivity timeout on the server side for half-closed connections.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http, log

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
          can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
          as explained at the top of this document.
```

The inactivity timeout applies when the server is expected to acknowledge or send data while one
direction is already shut down. This timeout is different from "timeout server" in that it only
applies to connections which are closed in one direction. This is particularly useful to avoid
keeping connections in FIN_WAIT state for too long when a remote server does not disconnect cleanly.
This problem is particularly common long connections such as RDP or WebSocket. Note that this
timeout can override "timeout tunnel" when a connection shuts down in one direction. This setting
was provided for completeness, but in most situations, it should not be needed.

This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in "defaults" sections. By
default it is not set, so half-closed connections will use the other timeouts (timeout.server or
timeout.tunnel).

See also: "timeout client-fin", "timeout server", and "timeout tunnel".

<a id="entry-4-2-timeout-tarpit"></a>

**`timeout tarpit <timeout>`**

```haproxy
timeout tarpit <timeout>
```

Set the duration for which tarpitted connections will be maintained

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<timeout> is the tarpit duration specified in milliseconds by default, but
          can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
          as explained at the top of this document.
```

When a connection is tarpitted using "http-request tarpit", it is maintained open with no activity
for a certain amount of time, then closed. "timeout tarpit" defines how long it will be maintained
open.

The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other unit if the number is
suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this document. If unspecified, the same value as
the backend's connection timeout ("timeout connect") is used, for backwards compatibility with older
versions with no "timeout tarpit" parameter.

See also: "timeout connect".

<a id="entry-4-2-timeout-tunnel"></a>

**`timeout tunnel <timeout>`**

```haproxy
timeout tunnel <timeout>
```

Set the maximum inactivity time on the client and server side for tunnels.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
          can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
          as explained at the top of this document.
```

The tunnel timeout applies when a bidirectional connection is established between a client and a
server, and the connection remains inactive in both directions. This timeout supersedes both the
client and server timeouts once the connection becomes a tunnel. In TCP, this timeout is used as
soon as no analyzer remains attached to either connection (e.g. tcp content rules are accepted). In
HTTP, this timeout is used when a connection is upgraded (e.g. when switching to the WebSocket
protocol, or forwarding a CONNECT request to a proxy), or after the first response when no
keepalive/close option is specified.

Since this timeout is usually used in conjunction with long-lived connections, it usually is a good
idea to also set "timeout client-fin" to handle the situation where a client suddenly disappears
from the net and does not acknowledge a close, or sends a shutdown and does not acknowledge pending
data anymore. This can happen in lossy networks where firewalls are present, and is detected by the
presence of large amounts of sessions in a FIN_WAIT state.

The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other unit if the number is
suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this document. Whatever the expected normal idle
time, it is a good practice to cover at least one or several TCP packet losses by specifying
timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3 seconds (e.g. 4 or 5 seconds minimum).

This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in "defaults" sections.
This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to forget about it.

Example:

```text
defaults http
    option http-server-close
    timeout connect 5s
    timeout client 30s
    timeout client-fin 30s
    timeout server 30s
    timeout tunnel  1h    # timeout to use with WebSocket and CONNECT
```

See also: "timeout client", "timeout client-fin", "timeout server".

<a id="entry-4-2-transparent"></a>

**`transparent (deprecated)`**

```haproxy
transparent (deprecated)
```

Enable client-side transparent proxying

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments: none

This keyword was introduced in order to provide layer 7 persistence to layer 3 load balancers. The
idea is to use the OS's ability to redirect an incoming connection for a remote address to a local
process (here HAProxy), and let this process know what address was initially requested. When this
option is used, sessions without cookies will be forwarded to the original destination IP address of
the incoming request (which should match that of another equipment), while requests with cookies
will still be forwarded to the appropriate server.

The "transparent" keyword is deprecated, use "option transparent" instead.

Note that contrary to a common belief, this option does NOT make HAProxy present the client's IP to
the server when establishing the connection.

See also: "option transparent"

<a id="entry-4-2-unique-id-format"></a>

**`unique-id-format <fmt>`**

```haproxy
unique-id-format <fmt>
```

Generate a unique ID for each request.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<fmt>   is a Custom log format string (see section 8.2.6).
```

This keyword creates a ID for each request using the custom log format. A unique ID is useful to
trace a request passing through many components of a complex infrastructure. The newly created ID
may also be logged using the %ID alias in the Custom log format string.

The format should be composed from elements that are guaranteed to be unique when combined together.
For instance, if multiple HAProxy instances are involved, it might be important to include the node
name. It is often needed to log the incoming connection's source and destination addresses and
ports. Note that since multiple requests may be performed over the same connection, including a
request counter may help differentiate them. Similarly, a timestamp may protect against a rollover
of the counter. Logging the process ID will avoid collisions after a service restart.

It is recommended to use hexadecimal notation for many fields since it makes them more compact and
saves space in logs.

For regular connections the format configured in the frontend is used to generate the unique ID. For
health checks the format of the backend is used when using the "unique-id" fetch within a tcp-check
or an http-check ruleset.

Example:

```text
unique-id-format %{+X}o\ %ci:%cp_%fi:%fp_%Ts_%rt:%pid

will generate:

       7F000001:8296_7F00001E:1F90_4F7B0A69_0003:790A
```

See also: "unique-id-header"

<a id="entry-4-2-unique-id-header"></a>

**`unique-id-header <name>`**

```haproxy
unique-id-header <name>
```

Add a unique ID header in the HTTP request.

May be used in the following contexts: http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend yes \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments:

```text
<name>   is the name of the header.
```

Add a unique-id header in the HTTP request sent to the server, using the unique-id-format. It can't
work if the unique-id-format doesn't exist.

Example:

```text
    unique-id-format %{+X}o\ %ci:%cp_%fi:%fp_%Ts_%rt:%pid
    unique-id-header X-Unique-ID

    will generate:

       X-Unique-ID: 7F000001:8296_7F00001E:1F90_4F7B0A69_0003:790A

See also: "unique-id-format"
```

<a id="entry-4-2-use-backend"></a>

**`use_backend <backend> [{if | unless} <condition>]`**

```haproxy
use_backend <backend> [{if | unless} <condition>]
```

Switch to a specific backend if/unless an ACL-based condition is matched.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend no \| yes \| yes \| no

Arguments:

```text
<backend>   is the name of a valid backend or "listen" section, or a
            Custom log format resolving to a backend name (see Custom
            Log Format in section 8.2.6).

<condition> is a condition composed of ACLs, as described in section 7. If
            it is omitted, the rule is unconditionally applied.
```

When doing content-switching, connections arrive on a frontend and are then dispatched to various
backends depending on a number of conditions. The relation between the conditions and the backends
is described with the "use_backend" keyword. While it is normally used with HTTP processing, it can
also be used in pure TCP, either without content using stateless ACLs (e.g. source address
validation) or combined with a "tcp-request" rule to wait for some payload.

There may be as many "use_backend" rules as desired. All of these rules are evaluated in their
declaration order, and the first one which matches will assign the backend. This is even the case if
the backend is considered as down. However, if a matching rule targets a disabled or unpublished
backend, it is ignored instead and rules evaluation continue.

In the first form, the backend will be used if the condition is met. In the second form, the backend
will be used if the condition is not met. If no condition is valid, the backend defined with
"default_backend" will be used unless it is disabled or unpublished. If no default backend is
available, either the servers in the same section are used (in case of a "listen" section) or, in
case of a frontend, no server is used and a 503 service unavailable response is returned.

Note that it is possible to switch from a TCP frontend to an HTTP backend. In this case, either the
frontend has already checked that the protocol is HTTP, and backend processing will immediately
follow, or the backend will wait for a complete HTTP request to get in. This feature is useful when
a frontend must decode several protocols on a unique port, one of them being HTTP.

When `<backend>` is a simple name, it is resolved at configuration time, and an error is reported if
the specified backend does not exist. If `<backend>` is a Custom log format instead, no check may be
done at configuration time, so the backend name is resolved dynamically at run time. If the
resulting backend name does not correspond to any valid backend, no other rule is evaluated, and the
default_backend directive is applied instead. Note that when using dynamic backend names, it is
highly recommended to use a prefix that no other backend uses in order to ensure that an
unauthorized backend cannot be forced from the request.

It is worth mentioning that "use_backend" rules with an explicit name are used to detect the
association between frontends and backends to compute the backend's "fullconn" setting. This cannot
be done for dynamic names.

See also: "default_backend", "tcp-request", "fullconn", "log-format", and [section 7](/docs/haproxy/acls-and-samples/) about ACLs.

<a id="entry-4-2-use-fcgi-app"></a>

**`use-fcgi-app <name>`**

```haproxy
use-fcgi-app <name>
```

Defines the FastCGI application to use for the backend.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend no \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<name>    is the name of the FastCGI application to use.
```

See [section 10.1](/docs/haproxy/fastcgi/#section-10-1) about FastCGI application setup for details.

<a id="entry-4-2-use-server"></a>

**`use-server <server> if <condition>`**

```haproxy
use-server <server> if <condition>
use-server <server> unless <condition>
```

Only use a specific server if/unless an ACL-based condition is matched.

May be used in the following contexts: tcp, http

May be used in sections: defaults \| frontend \| listen \| backend no \| no \| yes \| yes

Arguments:

```text
<server>    is the name of a valid server in the same backend section
            or a Custom log format string resolving to a server name
            (see section 8.2.6).

<condition> is a condition composed of ACLs, as described in section 7.
```

By default, connections which arrive to a backend are load-balanced across the available servers
according to the configured algorithm, unless a persistence mechanism such as a cookie is used and
found in the request.

Sometimes it is desirable to forward a particular request to a specific server without having to
declare a dedicated backend for this server. This can be achieved using the "use-server" rules.
These rules are evaluated after the "redirect" rules and before evaluating cookies, and they have
precedence on them. There may be as many "use-server" rules as desired. All of these rules are
evaluated in their declaration order, and the first one which matches will assign the server.

If a rule designates a server which is down, and "option persist" is not used and no force-persist
rule was validated, it is ignored and evaluation goes on with the next rules until one matches.

In the first form, the server will be used if the condition is met. In the second form, the server
will be used if the condition is not met. If no condition is valid, the processing continues and the
server will be assigned according to other persistence mechanisms.

Note that even if a rule is matched, cookie processing is still performed but does not assign the
server. This allows prefixed cookies to have their prefix stripped.

The "use-server" statement works both in HTTP and TCP mode. This makes it suitable for use with
content-based inspection. For instance, a server could be selected in a farm according to the TLS
SNI field when using protocols with implicit TLS (also see "req.ssl_sni"). And if these servers have
their weight set to zero, they will not be used for other traffic.

Example:

```shell
# intercept incoming TLS requests based on the SNI field
use-server www if { req.ssl_sni -i www.example.com }
server     www 192.168.0.1:443 weight 0
use-server mail if { req.ssl_sni -i mail.example.com }
server     mail 192.168.0.1:465 weight 0
use-server imap if { req.ssl_sni -i imap.example.com }
server     imap 192.168.0.1:993 weight 0
# all the rest is forwarded to this server
server  default 192.168.0.2:443 check
```

When `<server>` is a simple name, it is checked against existing servers in the configuration and an
error is reported if the specified server does not exist. If it is a Custom log format, no check is
performed when parsing the configuration, and if we can't resolve a valid server name at runtime but
the use-server rule was conditioned by an ACL returning true, no other use-server rule is applied
and we fall back to load balancing.

See also: "use_backend", [section 5](/docs/haproxy/bind-and-server-options/) about server and [section 7](/docs/haproxy/acls-and-samples/) about ACLs.

## 4.3. Actions keywords matrix {#section-4-3}

Several rule sets are evaluated at various stages of the request or response processing, and for
each rule found in these rule sets, an action may be executed if the optional condition is met.

A large number of actions are provided by default, they can modify contents, accept/block
processing, change internal states etc. And it is possible to define new actions in Lua (in which
case their names will always be prefixed with "lua.").

While historically some actions did only exist in specific rule sets, nowadays many actions are
usable with many rule sets. The listing in this section will indicate for which supported action
where it may be used, by ticking the corresponding abbreviated entry names among the following rule
sets:

- QUIC Ini: the action is valid for "quic-initial" rules
- TCP RqCon: the action is valid for "tcp-request connection" rules
- TCP RqSes: the action is valid for "tcp-request session" rules
- TCP RqCnt: the action is valid for "tcp-request content" rules
- TCP RsCnt: the action is valid for "tcp-response content" rules
- HTTP Req: the action is valid for "http-request" rules
- HTTP Res: the action is valid for "http-response" rules
- HTTP Aft: the action is valid for "http-after-response" rules

The same abbreviations are used in the reference [section 4.4](/docs/haproxy/proxies/#section-4-4) below.

```text
 keyword                QUIC: Ini   TCP: RqCon RqSes RqCnt RsCnt   HTTP: Req Res Aft
----------------------+-----------+-----------+-----+-----+------+----------+---+----
accept                         X           X     X     X     X            -   -   -
add-acl                        -           -     -     -     -            X   X   -
add-header                     -           -     -     -     -            X   X   X
add-headers-bin                -           -     -     -     -            X   X   X
allow                          -           -     -     -     -            X   X   X
attach-srv                     -           -     X     -     -            -   -   -
auth                           -           -     -     -     -            X   -   -
cache-store                    -           -     -     -     -            -   X   -
cache-use                      -           -     -     -     -            X   -   -
capture                        -           -     -     X     -            X   X   X
close                          -           -     -     -     X            -   -   -
del-acl                        -           -     -     -     -            X   X   -
del-header                     -           -     -     -     -            X   X   X
del-headers-bin                -           -     -     -     -            X   X   X
del-map                        -           -     -     -     -            X   X   X
deny                           -           -     -     -     -            X   X   -
dgram-drop                     X           -     -     -     -            -   -   -
disable-l7-retry               -           -     -     -     -            X   -   -
do-log                         X           X     X     X     X            X   X   X
do-resolve                     -           -     -     X     -            X   -   -
early-hint                     -           -     -     -     -            X   -   -
expect-netscaler-cip           -           X     -     -     -            -   -   -
expect-proxy layer4            -           X     -     -     -            -   -   -
normalize-uri                  -           -     -     -     -            X   -   -
pause                          -           -     -     -     -            X   X   -
redirect                       -           -     -     -     -            X   X   -
reject                         X           X     X     X     X            X   -   -
replace-header                 -           -     -     -     -            X   X   X
replace-path                   -           -     -     -     -            X   -   -
replace-pathq                  -           -     -     -     -            X   -   -
replace-uri                    -           -     -     -     -            X   -   -
replace-value                  -           -     -     -     -            X   X   X
return                         -           -     -     -     -            X   X   -
sc-add-gpc                     -           X     X     X     X            X   X   X
--keyword---------------QUIC--Ini---TCP--RqCon-RqSes-RqCnt-RsCnt---HTTP--Req-Res-Aft-sc-inc-gpc                     -           X     X     X     X            X   X   X
sc-inc-gpc0                    -           X     X     X     X            X   X   X
sc-inc-gpc1                    -           X     X     X     X            X   X   X
sc-set-gpt                     -           X     X     X     X            X   X   X
sc-set-gpt0                    -           X     X     X     X            X   X   X
send-retry                     X           -     -     -     -            -   -   -
send-spoe-group                -           -     -     X     X            X   X   -
set-bandwidth-limit            -           -     -     X     X            X   X   -
set-bc-mark                    -           -     -     X     -            X   -   -
set-bc-tos                     -           -     -     X     -            X   -   -
set-dst                        -           X     X     X     -            X   -   -
set-dst-port                   -           X     X     X     -            X   -   -
set-fc-mark                    -           X     X     X     X            X   X   -
set-fc-tos                     -           X     X     X     X            X   X   -
set-header                     -           -     -     -     -            X   X   X
set-headers-bin                -           -     -     -     -            X   X   X
set-log-level                  -           -     -     X     X            X   X   X
set-map                        -           -     -     -     -            X   X   X
set-mark (deprecated)          -           X     X     X     X            X   X   -
set-method                     -           -     -     -     -            X   -   -
set-nice                       -           -     -     X     X            X   X   -
set-path                       -           -     -     -     -            X   -   -
set-pathq                      -           -     -     -     -            X   -   -
set-priority-class             -           -     -     X     -            X   -   -
set-priority-offset            -           -     -     X     -            X   -   -
--keyword---------------QUIC--Ini---TCP--RqCon-RqSes-RqCnt-RsCnt---HTTP--Req-Res-Aft-set-query                      -           -     -     -     -            X   -   -
set-retries                    -           -     -     X     -            X   -   -
set-src                        -           X     X     X     -            X   -   -
set-src-port                   -           X     X     X     -            X   -   -
set-status                     -           -     -     -     -            -   X   X
set-timeout                    -           -     -     -     -            X   X   -
set-tos (deprecated)           -           X     X     X     X            X   X   -
set-uri                        -           -     -     -     -            X   -   -
set-var                        -           X     X     X     X            X   X   X
set-var-fmt                    -           X     X     X     X            X   X   X
silent-drop                    -           X     X     X     X            X   X   -
strict-mode                    -           -     -     -     -            X   X   X
switch-mode                    -           -     -     X     -            -   -   -
tarpit                         -           -     -     -     -            X   -   -
track-sc0                      -           X     X     X     -            X   X   -
track-sc1                      -           X     X     X     -            X   X   -
track-sc2                      -           X     X     X     -            X   X   -
unset-var                      -           X     X     X     X            X   X   X
use-service                    -           -     -     X     -            X   -   -
wait-for-body                  -           -     -     -     -            X   X   -
wait-for-handshake             -           -     -     -     -            X   -   -
--keyword---------------QUIC--Ini---TCP--RqCon-RqSes-RqCnt-RsCnt---HTTP--Req-Res-Aft-
```

## 4.4. Alphabetically sorted actions reference {#section-4-4}

This section provides a detailed description of each action and its usage, using the same ruleset
terminology marking as described in [section 4.3](/docs/haproxy/proxies/#section-4-3) above.

<a id="entry-4-4-accept"></a>

**`accept`**

```haproxy
accept
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft X \| X \| X \| X \| X
\| - \| - \| -

This stops the evaluation of the rules and lets the request or response pass the check. This action
is final, i.e. no further rules from the same rule set are evaluated for the current section. There
is no difference between this and the "allow" action except that for historical compatibility,
"accept" is used for TCP and QUIC rules and "allow" for HTTP rules. See also the "allow" action
below.

<a id="entry-4-4-add-acl"></a>

**`add-acl(<file-name>) <key fmt>`**

```haproxy
add-acl(<file-name>) <key fmt>
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| X \| -

This is used to add a new entry into an ACL. The ACL must be loaded from a file (even a dummy empty
file). The file name of the ACL to be updated is passed between parentheses. It takes one argument:
`<key fmt>`, which follows Custom log format rules described in [section 8.2.6](/docs/haproxy/configuration-logging/#section-8-2-6), to collect content of
the new entry. It performs a lookup in the ACL before insertion, to avoid duplicated (or more)
values. It is the equivalent of the "add acl" command from the stats socket, but can be triggered by
an HTTP request.

<a id="entry-4-4-add-header"></a>

**`add-header <name> <fmt>`**

```haproxy
add-header <name> <fmt>
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| X \| X

This appends an HTTP header field whose name is specified in `<name>` and whose value is defined by
`<fmt>` which follows the Custom log format rules (see Custom log format in [section 8.2.6](/docs/haproxy/configuration-logging/#section-8-2-6)). This is
particularly useful to pass connection-specific information to the server (e.g. the client's SSL
certificate), or to combine several headers into one. This rule is not final, so it is possible to
add other similar rules. Note that header addition is performed immediately, so one rule might reuse
the resulting header from a previous rule.

<a id="entry-4-4-add-headers-bin"></a>

**`add-headers-bin <expr> [ prefix <str> ]`**

```haproxy
add-headers-bin <expr> [ prefix <str> ]
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| X \| X

This is a variant of the "add-header" action where the header names and values are passed as a
varint encoded binary string. See the "req.hdrs_bin" sample fetch about the varint format. This is
useful when you want to set multiple headers at once, without having to know the header names in
advance. Note that these headers have not been validated by the HTTP parser and could lead to
emitting invalid messages and in worst cases lead to request smuggling attacks. The number of
headers inserted are also of importance, as that is limited by tune.http.maxhdr. Optional prefix
will only set the headers from the encoded string that start with `<str>`.

Example:

```shell
# This would reset the Accept/UA/Host headers to their initial values
http-request set-var(txn.oldheaders) req.hdrs_bin
http-request del-header Accept
http-request del-header User-Agent
http-request del-header Host
http-request add-headers-bin var(txn.oldheaders)

```

<a id="entry-4-4-allow"></a>

**`allow`**

```haproxy
allow
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| X \| X

This stops the evaluation of the rules and lets the request pass the check. This action is final,
i.e. no further rules from the same rule set are evaluated for the current section. There is no
difference between this and the "accept" action except that for historical compatibility, "accept"
is used for TCP rules and "allow" for HTTP rules. See also the "accept" action above.

<a id="entry-4-4-attach-srv"></a>

**`attach-srv <srv> [name <expr>] [ EXPERIMENTAL ]`**

```haproxy
attach-srv <srv> [name <expr>] [ EXPERIMENTAL ]
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| X \| - \| -
\| - \| - \| -

This is used to intercept the connection after proper HTTP/2 establishment. The connection is
reversed to the backend side and inserted into the idle pool of server `<srv>`. This may only be
used with servers having an 'rhttp@' address.

The connection is inserted into the server idle pool with a name defined by the result of the
`<expr>` evaluation. This is the name that will be matched against by requests subject to
"pool-conn-name" or "sni" parameter. See "http-reuse" for more details.

Reverse HTTP is currently still in active development. Configuration mechanism may change in the
future. For this reason it is internally marked as experimental, meaning that
"expose-experimental-directives" must appear on a line before this directive.

Note that a very similar but independent protocol is under development. See
<https://www.ietf.org/archive/id/draft-bt-httpbis-reverse-http-00.html>.

<a id="entry-4-4-auth"></a>

**`auth [realm <realm>]`**

```haproxy
auth [realm <realm>]
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| - \| -

This stops the evaluation of the rules and immediately responds with an HTTP 401 or 407 error code
to invite the user to present a valid user name and password. No further "http-request" rules are
evaluated. An optional "realm" parameter is supported, it sets the authentication realm that is
returned with the response (typically the application's name).

The corresponding proxy's error message is used. It may be customized using an "errorfile" or an
"http-error" directive. For 401 responses, all occurrences of the WWW-Authenticate header are
removed and replaced by a new one with a basic authentication challenge for realm "`<realm>`". For
407 responses, the same is done on the Proxy-Authenticate header. If the error message must not be
altered, consider to use "http-request return" rule instead.

Example:

```text
acl auth_ok http_auth_group(L1) G1
http-request auth unless auth_ok

```

<a id="entry-4-4-cache-store"></a>

**`cache-store <name>`**

```haproxy
cache-store <name>
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| - \| X \| -

Store an http-response within the cache. The storage of the response headers is done at this step,
which means you can use others http-response actions to modify headers before or after the storage
of the response. This action is responsible for the setup of the cache storage filter.

See [section 6.2](/docs/haproxy/cache/#section-6-2) about cache setup.

<a id="entry-4-4-cache-use"></a>

**`cache-use <name>`**

```haproxy
cache-use <name>
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| - \| -

Try to deliver a cached object from the cache `<name>`. This directive is also mandatory to store
the cache as it calculates the cache hash. If you want to use a condition for both storage and
delivering that's a good idea to put it after this one.

See [section 6.2](/docs/haproxy/cache/#section-6-2) about cache setup.

<a id="entry-4-4-capture"></a>

**`capture <sample> [ len <length> | id <id> ]`**

```haproxy
capture <sample> [ len <length> | id <id> ]
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| X \| -
\| X \| X \| X

This captures sample expression `<sample>` from the request or response buffer, and converts it to a
string of at most `<len>` characters. The resulting string is stored into the next "capture" slot
(either request or response), so it will possibly appear next to some captured HTTP headers. It will
then automatically appear in the logs, and it will be possible to extract it using sample fetch
methods to feed it into headers or anything. The length should be limited given that this size will
be allocated for each capture during the whole stream life. Note that the length is only usable with
"http-request" rules. Please check [section 7.3](/docs/haproxy/acls-and-samples/#section-7-3) (Fetching samples), "capture request header" and
"capture response header" for more information.

If the keyword "id" is used instead of "len", the action tries to store the captured string in a
previously declared capture slot. This is useful to run captures in backends. The slot id can be
declared by a previous directive "http-request capture" or with the "declare capture" keyword.

When using this action in a backend, please double check that the relevant frontend(s) have the
required capture slots otherwise, this rule will be ignored at run time. This can't be detected at
configuration parsing time due to HAProxy's ability to dynamically resolve backend name at runtime.

<a id="entry-4-4-close"></a>

**`close`**

```haproxy
close
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| X
\| - \| - \| -

This is used to immediately close the connection with the server. No further "tcp-response content"
rules are evaluated. The main purpose of this action is to force a connection to be finished between
a client and a server after an exchange when the application protocol expects some long time outs to
elapse first. The goal is to eliminate idle connections which take significant resources on servers
with certain protocols.

<a id="entry-4-4-del-acl"></a>

**`del-acl(<file-name>) <key fmt>`**

```haproxy
del-acl(<file-name>) <key fmt>
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| X \| -

This is used to delete an entry from an ACL. The ACL must be loaded from a file (even a dummy empty
file). The file name of the ACL to be updated is passed between parentheses. It takes one argument:
`<key fmt>`, which follows Custom log format rules of [section 8.2.6](/docs/haproxy/configuration-logging/#section-8-2-6), to collect content of the entry
to delete. It is the equivalent of the "del acl" command from the stats socket, but can be triggered
by an HTTP request or response.

<a id="entry-4-4-del-header"></a>

**`del-header <name> [ -m <meth> ]`**

```haproxy
del-header <name> [ -m <meth> ]
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| X \| X

This removes all HTTP header fields whose name is specified in `<name>`. `<meth>` is the matching
method, applied on the header name. Supported matching methods are "str" (exact match), "beg"
(prefix match), "end" (suffix match), "sub" (substring match) and "reg" (regex match). If not
specified, exact matching method is used.

<a id="entry-4-4-del-headers-bin"></a>

**`del-headers-bin <expr> [ -m <meth> ]`**

```haproxy
del-headers-bin <expr> [ -m <meth> ]
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| X \| X

This removes all HTTP header fields whose names are specified in `<expr>`. `<expr>` must return a
varint encoded binary string of all header names that should be deleted. See "add-headers-bin" and
"set-headers-bin" for the description of encoding and examples. `<meth>` is the matching method,
applied on all the header names. Supported matching methods are "str" (exact match), "beg" (prefix
match), "end" (suffix match) and "sub" (substring match). The "reg" (regex match) is not supported
due to unpredictable performance during runtime. If not specified, exact matching method is used.

<a id="entry-4-4-del-map"></a>

**`del-map(<map-name>) <key fmt>`**

```haproxy
del-map(<map-name>) <key fmt>
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| X \| X

This is used to delete an entry from a MAP. `<map-name>` must follow the format described in 2.7.
about name format for maps and ACLs. The name of the MAP to be updated is passed between
parentheses. It takes one argument: `<key fmt>`, which follows Custom log format rules of [section
8.2.6](/docs/haproxy/configuration-logging/#section-8-2-6), to collect content of the entry to delete. It takes one argument: "file name" It is the
equivalent of the "del map" command from the stats socket, but can be triggered by an HTTP request
or response.

<a id="entry-4-4-deny"></a>

**`deny [ { status | deny_status } <code> ] [ content-type <type> ]`**

```haproxy
deny [ { status | deny_status } <code> ] [ content-type <type> ]
     [ { default-errorfiles | errorfile <file> | errorfiles <name> |
```

       file `<file>` | lf-file `<file>` | string `<str>` | lf-string `<fmt>` } ]
     [ hdr `<name>` `<fmt>` ]*

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| X \| -

This stops the evaluation of the rules and immediately rejects the request or response. By default
an HTTP 403 error is returned for requests, and 502 for responses, but the returned response may be
customized using same syntax as for the "return" action. Thus, see "return" below for details. For
compatibility purposes, when no argument is defined, or only "deny_status", the argument
"default-errorfiles" is implied. It means "deny [deny_status `<status>`]" is an alias of "deny
[status `<status>`] default-errorfiles". This action is final, i.e. no further rules from the same
rule set are evaluated for the current section. See also the "return" action for the advanced
syntax.

<a id="entry-4-4-dgram-drop"></a>

**`dgram-drop`**

```haproxy
dgram-drop
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft X \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| - \| - \| -

This silently ignores the reception of a QUIC initial packet which otherwise would have resulted in
a new QUIC connection instantiation and its SSL handshake execution.

<a id="entry-4-4-disable-l7-retry"></a>

**`disable-l7-retry`**

```haproxy
disable-l7-retry
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| - \| -

This disables any attempt to retry the request if it fails for any other reason than a connection
failure. This can be useful for example to make sure POST requests aren't retried on failure.

<a id="entry-4-4-do-log"></a>

**`do-log [profile <log_profile>]`**

```haproxy
do-log [profile <log_profile>]
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft X \| X \| X \| X \| X
\| X \| X \| X

This action manually triggers a log emission on the proxy. This means log options on the proxy will
be considered (including formatting options such as "log-format"), but it will not interfere with
the logs automatically generated by the proxy during transaction handling.

Using "log-profile", it is possible to precisely describe how the log should be emitted for each of
the available contexts where the action may be used. That is, 'on' keyword followed by of the
following values: 'quic-init', 'tcp-req-conn', 'tcp-req-sess', 'tcp-req-cont', 'tcp-res-cont',
'http-req', 'http-res', 'http-after-res'.

Also, they will be properly reported when using "%OG" logformat alias.

Optional "profile" argument may be used to specify the name of a log-profile section that should be
used for this do-log action specifically instead of the one associated to the current logger that
applies by default.

Example:

```text
log-profile my-dft-prof
  on tcp-req-conn format "Connect: %ci"

log-profile my-local-prof
  on tcp-req-conn format "Local Connect: %ci"

frontend myfront
  log stdout format rfc5424 profile my-dft-prof local0
  log-format "log generated using proxy logformat, from '%OG'"
  acl local src 127.0.0.1
  # on connection use either log-profile from the logger (my-dft-prof) or
  # explicit my-local-prof if source ip is localhost
  tcp-request connection do-log if !local
  tcp-request connection do-log profile my-local-prof if local
  # on content use proxy logformat, since no override was specified
  # in my-dft-prof
  tcp-request content do-log
```

<a id="entry-4-4-do-resolve"></a>

**`do-resolve(<var>,<resolvers>[,ipv4|ipv6]) <expr>`**

```haproxy
do-resolve(<var>,<resolvers>[,ipv4|ipv6]) <expr>
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| X \| -
\| X \| - \| -

This action performs a DNS resolution of the output of `<expr>` and stores the result in the
variable `<var>`. It uses the DNS resolvers section pointed by `<resolvers>`. It is possible to
choose a resolution preference using the optional arguments 'ipv4' or 'ipv6'. See also the global
"dns-accept-family" keyword to enforce strict usage of a specific family.

When performing the DNS resolution, the client side connection is on pause waiting till the end of
the resolution. If an IP address can be found, it is stored into `<var>`. If any kind of error
occurs, then `<var>` is not set. One can use this action to discover a server IP address at run time
and based on information found in the request (IE a Host header). If this action is used to find the
server's IP address (using the "set-dst" action), then the server IP address in the backend must be
set to 0.0.0.0. The do-resolve action takes an host-only parameter, any port must be removed from
the string.

Example:

```text
resolvers mydns
  nameserver local 127.0.0.53:53
  nameserver google 8.8.8.8:53
  timeout retry   1s
  hold valid 10s
  hold nx 3s
  hold other 3s
  hold obsolete 0s
  accepted_payload_size 8192

frontend fe
  bind 10.42.0.1:80
  http-request do-resolve(txn.myip,mydns,ipv4) hdr(Host),host_only
  http-request capture var(txn.myip) len 40

  # return 503 when the variable is not set,
  # which mean DNS resolution error
  use_backend b_503 unless { var(txn.myip) -m found }

  default_backend be

backend b_503
  # dummy backend used to return 503.
  # one can use the errorfile directive to send a nice
  # 503 error page to end users

backend be
  # rule to prevent HAProxy from reconnecting to services
  # on the local network (forged DNS name used to scan the network)
  http-request deny if { var(txn.myip) -m ip 127.0.0.0/8 10.0.0.0/8 }
  http-request set-dst var(txn.myip)
  server clear 0.0.0.0:0
```

NOTE: Don't forget to set the "protection" rules to ensure HAProxy won't be used to scan the network
or worst won't loop over itself...

<a id="entry-4-4-early-hint"></a>

**`early-hint <name> <fmt>`**

```haproxy
early-hint <name> <fmt>
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| - \| -

This is used to build an HTTP 103 Early Hints response prior to any other one. This appends an HTTP
header field to this response whose name is specified in `<name>` and whose value is defined by
`<fmt>` which follows the Custom Log Format rules (see Custom log format in [section 8.2.6](/docs/haproxy/configuration-logging/#section-8-2-6)). This is
particularly useful to pass to the client some Link headers to preload resources required to render
the HTML documents.

See RFC 8297 for more information.

<a id="entry-4-4-expect-netscaler-cip-layer4"></a>

**`expect-netscaler-cip layer4`**

```haproxy
expect-netscaler-cip layer4
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| X \| - \| - \| -
\| - \| - \| -

This configures the client-facing connection to receive a NetScaler Client IP insertion protocol
header before any byte is read from the socket. This is equivalent to having the
"accept-netscaler-cip" keyword on the "bind" line, except that using the TCP rule allows the PROXY
protocol to be accepted only for certain IP address ranges using an ACL. This is convenient when
multiple layers of load balancers are passed through by traffic coming from public hosts.

<a id="entry-4-4-expect-proxy-layer4"></a>

**`expect-proxy layer4`**

```haproxy
expect-proxy layer4
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| X \| - \| - \| -
\| - \| - \| -

This configures the client-facing connection to receive a PROXY protocol header before any byte is
read from the socket. This is equivalent to having the "accept-proxy" keyword on the "bind" line,
except that using the TCP rule allows the PROXY protocol to be accepted only for certain IP address
ranges using an ACL. This is convenient when multiple layers of load balancers are passed through by
traffic coming from public hosts.

<a id="entry-4-4-normalize-uri"></a>

**`normalize-uri <normalizer>`**

```haproxy
normalize-uri <normalizer>
normalize-uri fragment-encode
normalize-uri fragment-strip
normalize-uri path-merge-slashes
normalize-uri path-strip-dot
normalize-uri path-strip-dotdot [ full ]
normalize-uri percent-decode-unreserved [ strict ]
normalize-uri percent-to-uppercase [ strict ]
normalize-uri query-sort-by-name
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| - \| -

Performs normalization of the request's URI.

URI normalization in HAProxy 2.4 is currently available as an experimental technical preview. As
such, it requires the global directive 'expose-experimental-directives' first to be able to invoke
it. You should be prepared that the behavior of normalizers might change to fix possible issues,
possibly breaking proper request processing in your infrastructure.

Each normalizer handles a single type of normalization to allow for a fine-grained selection of the
level of normalization that is appropriate for the supported backend.

As an example the "path-strip-dotdot" normalizer might be useful for a static fileserver that
directly maps the requested URI to the path within the local filesystem. However it might break
routing of an API that expects a specific number of segments in the path.

It is important to note that some normalizers might result in unsafe transformations for broken
URIs. It might also be possible that a combination of normalizers that are safe by themselves
results in unsafe transformations when improperly combined.

As an example the "percent-decode-unreserved" normalizer might result in unexpected results when a
broken URI includes bare percent characters. One such a broken URI is "/%%36%36" which would be
decoded to "/%66" which in turn is equivalent to "/f". By specifying the "strict" option requests to
such a broken URI would safely be rejected.

The following normalizers are available:

- fragment-encode: Encodes "#" as "%23".

  The "fragment-strip" normalizer should be preferred, unless it is known that broken clients do not
  correctly encode '#' within the path component.

  Example:

  - /#foo -\> /%23foo

- fragment-strip: Removes the URI's "fragment" component.

  According to RFC 3986#3.5 the "fragment" component of an URI should not be sent, but handled by
  the User Agent after retrieving a resource.

  This normalizer should be applied first to ensure that the fragment is not interpreted as part of
  the request's path component.

  Example:

  - /#foo -\> /

- path-strip-dot: Removes "/./" segments within the "path" component (RFC 3986#6.2.2.3).

  Segments including percent encoded dots ("%2E") will not be detected. Use the
  "percent-decode-unreserved" normalizer first if this is undesired.

  Example:

  - /. -\> /
  - /./bar/ -\> /bar/
  - /a/./a -\> /a/a
  - /.well-known/ -\> /.well-known/ (no change)

- path-strip-dotdot: Normalizes "/../" segments within the "path" component (RFC 3986#6.2.2.3).

  This merges segments that attempt to access the parent directory with their preceding segment.

  Empty segments do not receive special treatment. Use the "merge-slashes" normalizer first if this
  is undesired.

  Segments including percent encoded dots ("%2E") will not be detected. Use the
  "percent-decode-unreserved" normalizer first if this is undesired.

  Example:

  - /foo/../ -\> /
  - /foo/../bar/ -\> /bar/
  - /foo/bar/../ -\> /foo/
  - /../bar/ -\> /../bar/
  - /bar/../../ -\> /../
  - /foo//../ -\> /foo/
  - /foo/%2E%2E/ -\> /foo/%2E%2E/

  If the "full" option is specified then "../" at the beginning will be removed as well:

  Example:

  - /../bar/ -\> /bar/
  - /bar/../../ -\> /

- path-merge-slashes: Merges adjacent slashes within the "path" component into a single slash.

  Example:

  - // -\> /
  - /foo//bar -\> /foo/bar

- percent-decode-unreserved: Decodes unreserved percent encoded characters to their representation
  as a regular character (RFC 3986#6.2.2.2).

  The set of unreserved characters includes all letters, all digits, "-", ".", "\_", and "~".

  Example:

  - /%61dmin -\> /admin
  - /foo%3Fbar=baz -\> /foo%3Fbar=baz (no change)
  - /%%36%36 -\> /%66 (unsafe)
  - /%ZZ -\> /%ZZ

  If the "strict" option is specified then invalid sequences will result in a HTTP 400 Bad Request
  being returned.

  Example:

  - /%%36%36 -\> HTTP 400
  - /%ZZ -\> HTTP 400

- percent-to-uppercase: Uppercases letters within percent-encoded sequences (RFC 3986#6.2.2.1).

  Example:

  - /%6f -\> /%6F
  - /%zz -\> /%zz

  If the "strict" option is specified then invalid sequences will result in a HTTP 400 Bad Request
  being returned.

  Example:

  - /%zz -\> HTTP 400

- query-sort-by-name: Sorts the query string parameters by parameter name. Parameters are assumed to
  be delimited by '&'. Shorter names sort before longer names and identical parameter names maintain
  their relative order.

  Example:

  - /?c=3&a=1&b=2 -\> /?a=1&b=2&c=3
  - /?aaa=3&a=1&aa=2 -\> /?a=1&aa=2&aaa=3
  - /?a=3&b=4&a=1&b=5&a=2 -\> /?a=3&a=1&a=2&b=4&b=5

<a id="entry-4-4-pause"></a>

**`pause { <timeout> | <expr> }`**

```haproxy
pause { <timeout> | <expr> }
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| X \| -

This suspends the message analysis for the specified number of milliseconds. The timeout can be
specified in milliseconds or with any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit as explained
at the top of this document. It is also possible to write an expression which must return a number
interpreted as a timeout in milliseconds. If the expression evaluation fails or if it returns an
invalid value, the action is ignored and the evaluation continues.

This action may be used for debugging purpose. But it could also be used to slow down some clients
based on specific criteria. For instance, it is possible to slow down clients if their requests rate
is too high, by tracking them via a "track-sc" rule.

<a id="entry-4-4-redirect"></a>

**`redirect <rule>`**

```haproxy
redirect <rule>
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| X \| -

This performs an HTTP redirection based on a redirect rule. This is exactly the same as the
"redirect" statement except that it inserts a redirect rule which is processed in the middle of
other "http-request" or "http-response" rules and that these rules use the Custom log format. For
responses, only the "location" type of redirect is permitted. In addition, when a redirect is
performed during a response, the transfer from the server to HAProxy is interrupted so that no
payload can be forwarded to the client. This may cause some connections to be closed on HTTP/1. This
action is final, i.e. no further rules from the same rule set are evaluated for the current section.
See the "redirect" keyword for the rule's syntax.

<a id="entry-4-4-reject"></a>

**`reject`**

```haproxy
reject
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft X \| X \| X \| X \| X
\| X \| - \| -

This stops the evaluation of the rules and immediately closes the connection without sending any
response. For HTTP rules, it acts similarly to the "tcp-request content reject" rules. It can be
useful to force an immediate connection closure on HTTP/2 connections.

In "tcp-request connection" rules, rejected connections do not even become a session, which is why
they are accounted separately for in the stats, as "denied connections". They are not considered for
the session rate-limit and are not logged either. The reason is that these rules should only be used
to filter extremely high connection rates such as the ones encountered during a massive DDoS attack.
Under these extreme conditions, the simple action of logging each event would make the system
collapse and would considerably lower the filtering capacity. If logging is absolutely desired, then
"tcp-request content" rules should be used instead, as "tcp-request session" rules will not log
either.

When used in "tcp-response content" rules, the server connection will be closed and the response
aborted. This is generally used to prevent sensitive information from leaking, typically after
inspecting contents in conjunction with the "wait-for-body" action.

This action can also be used in "quic-initial" rules. The newly opened QUIC connection is
immediately closed without any SSL handshake processing and the client is notified via a
CONNECTION_REFUSED error code.

<a id="entry-4-4-replace-header"></a>

**`replace-header <name> <match-regex> <replace-fmt>`**

```haproxy
replace-header <name> <match-regex> <replace-fmt>
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| X \| X

This matches the value of all occurrences of header field `<name>` against `<match-regex>`. Matching
is performed case-sensitively. Matching values are completely replaced by `<replace-fmt>`. Format
characters are allowed in `<replace-fmt>` and work like `<fmt>` arguments in "http-request
add-header". Standard back-references using the backslash ('&#92;') followed
by a number are supported.

This action acts on whole header lines, regardless of the number of values they may contain. Thus it
is well-suited to process headers naturally containing commas in their value, such as
If-Modified-Since or Set-Cookie. Headers that contain a comma-separated list of values, such as
Accept, or Cache-Control should be processed using the "replace-value" action instead. See also the
"replace-value" action.

Example:

```shell
http-request replace-header Cookie foo=([^;]*);(.*) foo=\1;ip=%bi;\2

# applied to:
Cookie: foo=foobar; expires=Tue, 14-Jun-2016 01:40:45 GMT;

# outputs:
Cookie: foo=foobar;ip=192.168.1.20; expires=Tue, 14-Jun-2016 01:40:45 GMT;

# assuming the backend IP is 192.168.1.20

http-request replace-header User-Agent curl foo

# applied to:
User-Agent: curl/7.47.0

# outputs:
User-Agent: foo
```

Example:

```shell
http-response replace-header Set-Cookie (C=[^;]*);(.*) \1;ip=%bi;\2

# applied to:
Set-Cookie: C=1; expires=Tue, 14-Jun-2016 01:40:45 GMT

# outputs:
Set-Cookie: C=1;ip=192.168.1.20; expires=Tue, 14-Jun-2016 01:40:45 GMT

# assuming the backend IP is 192.168.1.20.

```

<a id="entry-4-4-replace-path"></a>

**`replace-path <match-regex> <replace-fmt>`**

```haproxy
replace-path <match-regex> <replace-fmt>
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| - \| -

This works like "replace-header" except that it works on the request's path component instead of a
header. The path component starts at the first '/' after an optional scheme+authority and ends
before the question mark. Thus, the replacement does not modify the scheme, the authority and the
query-string.

It is worth noting that regular expressions may be more expensive to evaluate than certain ACLs, so
rare replacements may benefit from a condition to avoid performing the evaluation at all if it does
not match.

Example:

```shell
# prefix /foo: turn /bar?q=1 into /foo/bar?q=1:
http-request replace-path (.*) /foo\1

# strip /foo: turn /foo/bar?q=1 into /bar?q=1
http-request replace-path /foo/(.*) /\1
# or more efficient if only some requests match:
http-request replace-path /foo/(.*) /\1 if { url_beg /foo/ }

```

<a id="entry-4-4-replace-pathq"></a>

**`replace-pathq <match-regex> <replace-fmt>`**

```haproxy
replace-pathq <match-regex> <replace-fmt>
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| - \| -

This does the same as "http-request replace-path" except that the path contains the query-string if
any is present. Thus, the path and the query-string are replaced.

Example:

```shell
# suffix /foo: turn /bar?q=1 into /bar/foo?q=1:
http-request replace-pathq ([^?]*)(\?(.*))? \1/foo\2

```

<a id="entry-4-4-replace-uri"></a>

**`replace-uri <match-regex> <replace-fmt>`**

```haproxy
replace-uri <match-regex> <replace-fmt>
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| - \| -

This works like "replace-header" except that it works on the request's URI part instead of a header.
The URI part may contain an optional scheme, authority or query string. These are considered to be
part of the value that is matched against.

It is worth noting that regular expressions may be more expensive to evaluate than certain ACLs, so
rare replacements may benefit from a condition to avoid performing the evaluation at all if it does
not match.

IMPORTANT NOTE: historically in HTTP/1.x, the vast majority of requests sent by browsers use the
"origin form", which differs from the "absolute form" in that they do not contain a scheme nor
authority in the URI portion. Mostly only requests sent to proxies, those forged by hand and some
emitted by certain applications use the absolute form. As such, "replace-uri" usually works fine
most of the time in HTTP/1.x with rules starting with a "/". But with HTTP/2, clients are encouraged
to send absolute URIs only, which look like the ones HTTP/1 clients use to talk to proxies. Such
partial replace-uri rules may then fail in HTTP/2 when they work in HTTP/1. Either the rules need to
be adapted to optionally match a scheme and authority, or replace-path should be used.

Example:

```shell
# rewrite all "http" absolute requests to "https":
http-request replace-uri ^http://(.*) https://\1

# prefix /foo: turn /bar?q=1 into /foo/bar?q=1:
http-request replace-uri ([^/:]*://[^/]*)?(.*) \1/foo\2

```

<a id="entry-4-4-replace-value"></a>

**`replace-value <name> <match-regex> <replace-fmt>`**

```haproxy
replace-value <name> <match-regex> <replace-fmt>
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| X \| X

This works like "replace-header" except that it matches the regex against every comma-delimited
value of the header field `<name>` instead of the entire header. This is suited for all headers
which are allowed to carry more than one value. An example could be the Accept request header, or
Cache-Control for requests or responses.

Example:

```shell
http-request replace-value X-Forwarded-For ^192\.168\.(.*)$ 172.16.\1

# applied to:
X-Forwarded-For: 192.168.10.1, 192.168.13.24, 10.0.0.37

# outputs:
X-Forwarded-For: 172.16.10.1, 172.16.13.24, 10.0.0.37
```

Example:

```shell
http-after-response replace-value Cache-control ^public$ private

# applied to:
Cache-Control: max-age=3600, public

# outputs:
Cache-Control: max-age=3600, private

```

<a id="entry-4-4-return"></a>

**`return [ status <code> ] [ content-type <type> ]`**

```haproxy
return [ status <code> ] [ content-type <type> ]
       [ { default-errorfiles | errorfile <file> | errorfiles <name> |
```

         file `<file>` | lf-file `<file>` | string `<str>` | lf-string `<fmt>` } ]
       [ hdr `<name>` `<fmt>` ]*

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| X \| -

This stops the evaluation of the rules and immediately returns a response. The default status code
used for the response is 200. It can be optionally specified as an arguments to "status". The
response content-type may also be specified as an argument to "content-type". Finally the response
itself may be defined. It can be a full HTTP response specifying the errorfile to use, or the
response payload specifying the file or the string to use. These rules are followed to create the
response:

- If neither the errorfile nor the payload to use is defined, a dummy response is returned. Only the
  "status" argument is considered. It can be any code in the range [200, 599]. The "content-type"
  argument, if any, is ignored.

- If "default-errorfiles" argument is set, the proxy's errorfiles are considered. If the "status"
  argument is defined, it must be one of the status code handled by HAProxy (200, 400, 403, 404,
  405, 408, 410, 413, 414, 425, 429, 431, 500, 501, 502, 503, and 504). The "content-type" argument,
  if any, is ignored.

- If a specific errorfile is defined, with an "errorfile" argument, the corresponding file,
  containing a full HTTP response, is returned. Only the "status" argument is considered. It must be
  one of the status code handled by HAProxy (200, 400, 403, 404, 405, 408, 410, 413, 414, 425, 429,
  431, 500, 501, 502, 503, and 504). The "content-type" argument, if any, is ignored.

- If an http-errors section is defined, with an "errorfiles" argument, the corresponding file in the
  specified http-errors section, containing a full HTTP response, is returned. Only the "status"
  argument is considered. It must be one of the status code handled by HAProxy (200, 400, 403, 404,
  405, 408, 410, 413, 414, 425, 429, 431, 500, 501, 502, 503, and 504). The "content-type" argument,
  if any, is ignored.

- If a "file" or a "lf-file" argument is specified, the file's content is used as the response
  payload. If the file is not empty, its content-type must be set as argument to "content-type".
  Otherwise, any "content-type" argument is ignored. With a "lf-file" argument, the file's content
  is evaluated as a Custom log format (see [section 8.2.6](/docs/haproxy/configuration-logging/#section-8-2-6)). With a "file" argument, it is considered
  as a raw content.

- If a "string" or "lf-string" argument is specified, the defined string is used as the response
  payload. The content-type must always be set as argument to "content-type". With a "lf-string"
  argument, the string is evaluated as a Custom log format (see [section 8.2.6](/docs/haproxy/configuration-logging/#section-8-2-6)). With a "string"
  argument, it is considered as a raw string.

When the response is not based on an errorfile, it is possible to append HTTP header fields to the
response using "hdr" arguments. Otherwise, all "hdr" arguments are ignored. For each one, the header
name is specified in `<name>` and its value is defined by `<fmt>` which follows the Custom log
format rules described in [section 8.2.6](/docs/haproxy/configuration-logging/#section-8-2-6).

Note that the generated response must be smaller than a buffer. And to avoid any warning, when an
errorfile or a raw file is loaded, the buffer space reserved for the headers rewriting should also
be free.

This action is final, i.e. no further rules from the same rule set are evaluated for the current
section.

Example:

```text
http-request return errorfile /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/200.http \
    if { path /ping }

http-request return content-type image/x-icon file /var/www/favicon.ico  \
    if { path /favicon.ico }

http-request return status 403 content-type text/plain    \
    lf-string "Access denied. IP %[src] is blacklisted."  \
    if { src -f /etc/haproxy/blacklist.lst }

```

<a id="entry-4-4-sc-add-gpc"></a>

**`sc-add-gpc(<idx>,<sc-id>) { <int> | <expr> }`**

```haproxy
sc-add-gpc(<idx>,<sc-id>) { <int> | <expr> }
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| X \| X \| X \| X
\| X \| X \| X

This action increments the General Purpose Counter at the index `<idx>` of the array associated to
the sticky counter designated by `<sc-id>` by the value of either integer `<int>` or the integer
evaluation of expression `<expr>`. Integers and expressions are limited to unsigned 32-bit values.
If an error occurs, this action silently fails and the actions evaluation continues. `<idx>` is an
integer between 0 and 99 and `<sc-id>` is an integer between 0 and 2. It also silently fails if the
there is no GPC stored at this index. The entry in the table is refreshed even if the value is zero.
The 'gpc_rate' is automatically adjusted to reflect the average growth rate of the gpc value.

This action applies only to the 'gpc' and 'gpc_rate' array data_types (and not to the legacy 'gpc0',
'gpc1', 'gpc0_rate' nor 'gpc1_rate' data_types). There is no equivalent function for legacy data
types, but if the value is always 1, please see 'sc-inc-gpc()', 'sc-inc-gpc0()' and 'sc-inc-gpc1()'.
There is no way to decrement the value either, but it is possible to store exact values in a General
Purpose Tag using 'sc-set-gpt()' instead.

The main use of this action is to count scores or total volumes (e.g. estimated danger per source IP
reported by the server or a WAF, total uploaded bytes, etc).

<a id="entry-4-4-sc-inc-gpc"></a>

**`sc-inc-gpc(<idx>,<sc-id>)`**

```haproxy
sc-inc-gpc(<idx>,<sc-id>)
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| X \| X \| X \| X
\| X \| X \| X

This actions increments the General Purpose Counter at the index `<idx>` of the array associated to
the sticky counter designated by `<sc-id>`. If an error occurs, this action silently fails and the
actions evaluation continues. `<idx>` is an integer between 0 and 99 and `<sc-id>` is an integer
between 0 and 2. It also silently fails if the there is no GPC stored at this index. This action
applies only to the 'gpc' and 'gpc_rate' array data_types (and not to the legacy 'gpc0', 'gpc1',
'gpc0_rate' nor 'gpc1_rate' data_types).

<a id="entry-4-4-sc-inc-gpc0"></a>

**`sc-inc-gpc0(<sc-id>)`**

```haproxy
sc-inc-gpc0(<sc-id>)
sc-inc-gpc1(<sc-id>)
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| X \| X \| X \| X
\| X \| X \| X

This actions increments the GPC0 or GPC1 counter according with the sticky counter designated by
`<sc-id>`. If an error occurs, this action silently fails and the actions evaluation continues.

<a id="entry-4-4-sc-set-gpt"></a>

**`sc-set-gpt(<idx>,<sc-id>) { <int> | <expr> }`**

```haproxy
sc-set-gpt(<idx>,<sc-id>) { <int> | <expr> }
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| X \| X \| X \| X
\| X \| X \| X

This action sets the 32-bit unsigned GPT at the index `<idx>` of the array associated to the sticky
counter designated by `<sc-id>` at the value of `<int>`/`<expr>`. The expected result is a boolean.

If an error occurs, this action silently fails and the actions evaluation continues. `<idx>` is an
integer between 0 and 99 and `<sc-id>` is an integer between 0 and 2. It also silently fails if the
there is no GPT stored at this index.

This action applies only to the 'gpt' array data_type (and not to the legacy 'gpt0' data-type).

<a id="entry-4-4-sc-set-gpt0"></a>

**`sc-set-gpt0(<sc-id>) { <int> | <expr> }`**

```haproxy
sc-set-gpt0(<sc-id>) { <int> | <expr> }
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| X \| X \| X \| X
\| X \| X \| X

This action sets the 32-bit unsigned GPT0 tag according to the sticky counter designated by
`<sc-id>` and the value of `<int>`/`<expr>`. The expected result is a boolean. If an error occurs,
this action silently fails and the actions evaluation continues. This action is an alias for
"sc-set-gpt(0,`<sc-id>`)". See also the "sc-set-gpt" action.

<a id="entry-4-4-send-retry"></a>

**`send-retry`**

```haproxy
send-retry
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft X \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| - \| - \| -

This action forces the emission of a Retry packet in response to a client Initial packet without
token. This is useful to ensure client address is validated prior to instantiating any connection
elements and starting the handshake.

<a id="entry-4-4-send-spoe-group"></a>

**`send-spoe-group <engine-name> <group-name>`**

```haproxy
send-spoe-group <engine-name> <group-name>
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| X \| X
\| X \| X \| -

This action is used to trigger sending of a group of SPOE messages. To do so, the SPOE engine used
to send messages must be defined, as well as the SPOE group to send. Of course, the SPOE engine must
refer to an existing SPOE filter. If not engine name is provided on the SPOE filter line, the SPOE
agent name must be used.

Arguments:

```text
<engine-name>  The SPOE engine name.

<group-name>   The SPOE group name as specified in the engine
               configuration.

```

<a id="entry-4-4-set-bandwidth-limit"></a>

**`set-bandwidth-limit <name> [limit {<expr> | <size>}] [period {<expr> | <time>}]`**

```haproxy
set-bandwidth-limit <name> [limit {<expr> | <size>}] [period {<expr> | <time>}]
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| X \| X
\| X \| X \| -

This action is used to enable the bandwidth limitation filter `<name>`, either on the upload or
download direction depending on the filter type. Custom limit and period may be defined, if and only
if `<name>` references a per-stream bandwidth limitation filter. When a set-bandwidth-limit rule is
executed, it first resets all settings of the filter to their defaults prior to enabling it. As a
consequence, if several "set-bandwidth-limit" actions are executed for the same filter, only the
last one is considered. Several bandwidth limitation filters can be enabled on the same stream.

Note that this action cannot be used in a defaults section because bandwidth limitation filters
cannot be defined in defaults sections. In addition, only the HTTP payload transfer is limited. The
HTTP headers are not considered.

Arguments:

```text
<expr>  Is a standard HAProxy expression formed by a sample-fetch followed
        by some converters. The result is converted to an integer. It is
        interpreted as a size in bytes for the "limit" parameter and as a
        duration in milliseconds for the "period" parameter.

<size>  Is a number. It follows the HAProxy size format and is expressed in
        bytes.

<time>  Is a number. It follows the HAProxy time format and is expressed in
        milliseconds.
```

Example:

```text
http-request set-bandwidth-limit global-limit
http-request set-bandwidth-limit my-limit limit 1m period 10s
```

See [section 9.7](/docs/haproxy/filters/#section-9-7) about bandwidth limitation filter setup.

<a id="entry-4-4-set-bc-mark"></a>

**`set-bc-mark { <mark> | <expr> }`**

```haproxy
set-bc-mark { <mark> | <expr> }
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| X \| -
\| X \| - \| -

This is used to set the Netfilter/IPFW MARK on the backend connection (all packets sent to the
server) to the value passed in `<mark>` or `<expr>` on platforms which support it. This value is an
unsigned 32 bit value which can be matched by netfilter/ipfw and by the routing table or monitoring
the packets through DTrace. `<mark>` can be expressed both in decimal or hexadecimal format
(prefixed by "0x"). Alternatively, `<expr>` can be used: it is a standard HAProxy expression formed
by a sample-fetch followed by some converters which must resolve to integer type. This action can be
useful to force certain packets to take a different route (for example a cheaper network path for
bulk downloads). This works on Linux kernels 2.6.32 and above and requires admin privileges, as well
on FreeBSD and OpenBSD. The mark will be set for the whole duration of the backend/server connection
(from connect to close).

<a id="entry-4-4-set-bc-tos"></a>

**`set-bc-tos { <tos> | <expr> }`**

```haproxy
set-bc-tos { <tos> | <expr> }
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| X \| -
\| X \| - \| -

This is used to set the TOS or DSCP field value on the backend connection (all packets sent to the
server) to the value passed in `<tos>` or `<expr>` on platforms which support this. This value
represents the whole 8 bits of the IP TOS field. Note that only the 6 higher bits are used in DSCP
or TOS, and the two lower bits are always 0. Alternatively, `<expr>` can be used: it is a standard
HAProxy expression formed by a sample-fetch followed by some converters which must resolve to
integer type. This action can be used to adjust some routing behavior on inner routers based on some
information from the request. The tos will be set for the whole duration of the backend/server
connection (from connect to close).

See RFC 2474, 2597, 3260 and 4594 for more information.

<a id="entry-4-4-set-dst"></a>

**`set-dst <expr>`**

```haproxy
set-dst <expr>
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| X \| X \| X \| -
\| X \| - \| -

This is used to set the destination IP address to the value of specified expression. Useful when a
proxy in front of HAProxy rewrites destination IP, but provides the correct IP in a HTTP header; or
you want to mask the IP for privacy. If you want to connect to the new address/port, use '0.0.0.0:0'
as a server address in the backend.

Arguments:

```text
<expr>  Is a standard HAProxy expression formed by a sample-fetch followed
        by some converters.
```

Example:

```text
http-request set-dst hdr(x-dst)
http-request set-dst dst,ipmask(24)
```

When possible, set-dst preserves the original destination port as long as the address family allows
it, otherwise the destination port is set to 0.

<a id="entry-4-4-set-dst-port"></a>

**`set-dst-port <expr>`**

```haproxy
set-dst-port <expr>
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| X \| X \| X \| -
\| X \| - \| -

This is used to set the destination port address to the value of specified expression. If you want
to connect to the new address/port, use '0.0.0.0:0' as a server address in the backend.

Arguments:

```text
<expr>  Is a standard HAProxy expression formed by a sample-fetch
        followed by some converters.
```

Example:

```text
http-request set-dst-port hdr(x-port)
http-request set-dst-port int(4000)
```

When possible, set-dst-port preserves the original destination address as long as the address family
supports a port, otherwise it forces the destination address to IPv4 "0.0.0.0" before rewriting the
port.

<a id="entry-4-4-set-fc-mark"></a>

**`set-fc-mark { <mark> | <expr> }`**

```haproxy
set-fc-mark { <mark> | <expr> }
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| X \| X \| X \| X
\| X \| X \| -

This is used to set the Netfilter/IPFW MARK on all packets sent to the client to the value passed in
`<mark>` or `<expr>` on platforms which support it. This value is an unsigned 32 bit value which can
be matched by netfilter/ipfw and by the routing table or monitoring the packets through DTrace.
`<mark>` can be expressed both in decimal or hexadecimal format (prefixed by "0x"). Alternatively,
`<expr>` can be used: it is a standard HAProxy expression formed by a sample-fetch followed by some
converters which must resolve to integer type. This action can be useful to force certain packets to
take a different route (for example a cheaper network path for bulk downloads). This works on Linux
kernels 2.6.32 and above and requires admin privileges, as well on FreeBSD and OpenBSD.

<a id="entry-4-4-set-fc-tos"></a>

**`set-fc-tos { <tos | <expr> }`**

```haproxy
set-fc-tos { <tos | <expr> }
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| X \| X \| X \| X
\| X \| X \| -

This is used to set the TOS or DSCP field value of packets sent to the client to the value passed in
`<tos>` or `<expr>` on platforms which support this. This value represents the whole 8 bits of the
IP TOS field. Note that only the 6 higher bits are used in DSCP or TOS, and the two lower bits are
always 0. Alternatively, `<expr>` can be used: it is a standard HAProxy expression formed by a
sample-fetch followed by some converters which must resolve to integer type. This action can be used
to adjust some routing behavior on border routers based on some information from the request.

See RFC 2474, 2597, 3260 and 4594 for more information.

<a id="entry-4-4-set-header"></a>

**`set-header <name> <fmt>`**

```haproxy
set-header <name> <fmt>
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| X \| X

This does the same as the "add-header" action except that the header is first removed if it existed.
This is useful when passing security information to the server, where the header must not be
manipulated by external users, or to force certain response headers such as "Server" to hide
external information. Note that the new value is computed before the removal so it is possible to
concatenate a value to an existing header.

Example:

```text
http-request set-header X-Haproxy-Current-Date %T
http-request set-header X-SSL                  %[ssl_fc]
http-request set-header X-SSL-Session_ID       %[ssl_fc_session_id,hex]
http-request set-header X-SSL-Client-Verify    %[ssl_c_verify]
http-request set-header X-SSL-Client-DN        %{+Q}[ssl_c_s_dn]
http-request set-header X-SSL-Client-CN        %{+Q}[ssl_c_s_dn(cn)]
http-request set-header X-SSL-Issuer           %{+Q}[ssl_c_i_dn]
http-request set-header X-SSL-Client-NotBefore %{+Q}[ssl_c_notbefore]
http-request set-header X-SSL-Client-NotAfter  %{+Q}[ssl_c_notafter]
```

<a id="entry-4-4-set-headers-bin"></a>

**`set-headers-bin <expr> [ prefix <str> ]`**

```haproxy
set-headers-bin <expr> [ prefix <str> ]
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| X \| X

This is a variant of the "set-header" action where the header names and values are passed as a
varint encoded binary string. See the "req.hdrs_bin" sample fetch about the varint format. This is
useful when you want to set multiple headers at once, without having to know the header names in
advance. Note that these headers have not been validated by the HTTP parser and could lead to
emitting invalid messages and in worst cases lead to request smuggling attacks. The number of
headers inserted are also of importance, as that is limited by tune.http.maxhdr. Optional prefix
will only set the headers from the encoded string that start with `<str>`.

Example:

```shell
# This would reset the Accept/UA/Host headers to their initial values
http-request set-var(txn.oldheaders) req.hdrs_bin
http-request del-header Accept
http-request del-header User-Agent
http-request del-header Host
http-request set-headers-bin var(txn.oldheaders)

```

<a id="entry-4-4-set-log-level"></a>

**`set-log-level <level>`**

```haproxy
set-log-level <level>
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| X \| X
\| X \| X \| X

This is used to change the log level of the current request when a certain condition is met. Valid
levels are the 8 syslog levels (see the "log" keyword) plus the special level "silent" which
disables logging for this request. This rule is not final so the last matching rule wins. This rule
can be useful to disable health checks coming from another equipment.

<a id="entry-4-4-set-map"></a>

**`set-map(<map-name>) <key fmt> <value fmt>`**

```haproxy
set-map(<map-name>) <key fmt> <value fmt>
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| X \| X

This is used to add a new entry into a map. `<map-name>` must follow the format described in 2.7.
about name format for maps and ACLs. The name of the MAP to be updated is passed between
parentheses. It takes 2 arguments: `<key fmt>`, which follows Custom log format rules described in
[section 8.2.6](/docs/haproxy/configuration-logging/#section-8-2-6), used to collect map key, and `<value fmt>`, which follows Custom log format rules,
used to collect content for the new entry. It performs a lookup in the map before insertion, to
avoid duplicated (or more) values. It is the equivalent of the "set map" command from the stats
socket, but can be triggered by an HTTP request.

<a id="entry-4-4-set-mark"></a>

**`set-mark <mark> (deprecated)`**

```haproxy
set-mark <mark> (deprecated)
```

This is an alias for "set-fc-mark" (which should be used instead).

<a id="entry-4-4-set-method"></a>

**`set-method <fmt>`**

```haproxy
set-method <fmt>
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| - \| -

This rewrites the request method with the result of the evaluation of format string `<fmt>`. There
should be very few valid reasons for having to do so as this is more likely to break something than
to fix it.

<a id="entry-4-4-set-nice"></a>

**`set-nice <nice>`**

```haproxy
set-nice <nice>
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| X \| X
\| X \| X \| -

This sets the "nice" factor of the current request/response being processed. It only has effect
against the other requests being processed at the same time. The default value is 0, unless altered
by the "nice" setting on the "bind" line. The accepted range is -1024..1024. The higher the value,
the nicest the request will be. Lower values will make the request more important than other ones.
This can be useful to improve the speed of some requests, or lower the priority of non-important
requests. Using this setting without prior experimentation can cause some major slowdown.

<a id="entry-4-4-set-path"></a>

**`set-path <fmt>`**

```haproxy
set-path <fmt>
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| - \| -

    This rewrites the request path with the result of the evaluation of format
    string `<fmt>`. The query string, if any, is left intact. If a scheme and
    authority is found before the path, they are left intact as well. If the
    request doesn't have a path ("*"), this one is replaced with the format.
    This can be used to prepend a directory component in front of a path for
    example. See also "http-request set-query" and "http-request set-uri".

Example:

```shell
# prepend the host name before the path
http-request set-path /%[hdr(host)]%[path]

```

<a id="entry-4-4-set-pathq"></a>

**`set-pathq <fmt>`**

```haproxy
set-pathq <fmt>
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| - \| -

This does the same as "http-request set-path" except that the query-string is also rewritten. It may
be used to remove the query-string, including the question mark (it is not possible using
"http-request set-query").

<a id="entry-4-4-set-priority-class"></a>

**`set-priority-class <expr>`**

```haproxy
set-priority-class <expr>
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| X \| -
\| X \| - \| -

This is used to set the queue priority class of the current request. The value must be a sample
expression which converts to an integer in the range -2047..2047. Results outside this range will be
truncated. The priority class determines the order in which queued requests are processed. Lower
values have higher priority.

<a id="entry-4-4-set-priority-offset"></a>

**`set-priority-offset <expr>`**

```haproxy
set-priority-offset <expr>
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| X \| -
\| X \| - \| -

This is used to set the queue priority timestamp offset of the current request. The value must be a
sample expression which converts to an integer in the range -524287..524287. Results outside this
range will be truncated. When a request is queued, it is ordered first by the priority class, then
by the current timestamp adjusted by the given offset in milliseconds. Lower values have higher
priority. Note that the resulting timestamp is is only tracked with enough precision for 524,287ms
(8m44s287ms). If the request is queued long enough to where the adjusted timestamp exceeds this
value, it will be misidentified as highest priority. Thus it is important to set "timeout queue" to
a value, where when combined with the offset, does not exceed this limit.

<a id="entry-4-4-set-query"></a>

**`set-query <fmt>`**

```haproxy
set-query <fmt>
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| - \| -

This rewrites the request's query string which appears after the first question mark ("?") with the
result of the evaluation of format string `<fmt>`. The part prior to the question mark is left
intact. If the request doesn't contain a question mark and the new value is not empty, then one is
added at the end of the URI, followed by the new value. If a question mark was present, it will
never be removed even if the value is empty. This can be used to add or remove parameters from the
query string.

See also "http-request set-query" and "http-request set-uri".

Example:

```shell
# replace "%3D" with "=" in the query string
http-request set-query %[query,regsub(%3D,=,g)]

```

<a id="entry-4-4-set-retries"></a>

**`set-retries <int> | <epxr>`**

```haproxy
set-retries <int> | <epxr>
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| X \| -
\| X \| - \| -

This action overrides the specified "retries" value for the current stream only. It can be an
integer value, in the range [0, 100], or an expression which must return a integer in the range
[0, 100].

Note that this action is only relevant on the backend side and thus this rule is only available for
the proxies with backend capability. It is also not allowed in "defaults" sections. When the action
is used for a listener, it is evaluated in the frontend context. So retries value is conserved only
if stream is not routed to a different backend, via a use-backend rule for instance. Otherwise the
default retries value of the selected backend will be preset.

Example:

```text
tcp-request content set-retries 3
http-request set-retries var(txn.retries)
```

<a id="entry-4-4-set-src"></a>

**`set-src <expr>`**

```haproxy
set-src <expr>
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| X \| X \| X \| -
\| X \| - \| -

This is used to set the source IP address to the value of specified expression. Useful when a proxy
in front of HAProxy rewrites source IP, but provides the correct IP in a HTTP header; or you want to
mask source IP for privacy. All subsequent calls to "src" fetch will return this value (see
example).

Arguments:

```text
<expr>  Is a standard HAProxy expression formed by a sample-fetch followed
        by some converters.
```

See also "option forwardfor".

Example:

```shell
http-request set-src hdr(x-forwarded-for)
http-request set-src src,ipmask(24)

# After the masking this will track connections
# based on the IP address with the last byte zeroed out.
http-request track-sc0 src
```

When possible, set-src preserves the original source port as long as the address family allows it,
otherwise the source port is set to 0.

<a id="entry-4-4-set-src-port"></a>

**`set-src-port <expr>`**

```haproxy
set-src-port <expr>
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| X \| X \| X \| -
\| X \| - \| -

This is used to set the source port address to the value of specified expression.

Arguments:

```text
<expr>  Is a standard HAProxy expression formed by a sample-fetch followed
        by some converters.
```

Example:

```text
http-request set-src-port hdr(x-port)
http-request set-src-port int(4000)
```

When possible, set-src-port preserves the original source address as long as the address family
supports a port, otherwise it forces the source address to IPv4 "0.0.0.0" before rewriting the port.

<a id="entry-4-4-set-status"></a>

**`set-status <status> [reason <str>]`**

```haproxy
set-status <status> [reason <str>]
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| - \| X \| X

This replaces the response status code with `<status>` which must be an integer between 100 and 999.
Optionally, a custom reason text can be provided defined by `<str>`, or the default reason for the
specified code will be used as a fallback. Note that the reason string only exists in HTTP/1.x and
is ignored by other versions of the protocol.

Example:

```shell
# return "431 Request Header Fields Too Large"
http-response set-status 431
# return "503 Slow Down", custom reason
http-response set-status 503 reason "Slow Down".

```

<a id="entry-4-4-set-timeout"></a>

**`set-timeout { client | connect | queue | server | tarpit | tunnel } { <timeout> | <expr> }`**

```haproxy
set-timeout { client | connect | queue | server | tarpit | tunnel } { <timeout> | <expr> }
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| X \| -

This action overrides the specified "client", "connect", "queue", "server", "tarpit" or "tunnel"
timeout for the current stream only. Changing one timeout does not influence any other timeouts,
even if they are inherited from each other during configuration parsing (see last example). The
timeout can be specified in milliseconds or with any other unit if the number is suffixed by the
unit as explained at the top of this document. It is also possible to write an expression which must
return a number interpreted as a timeout in milliseconds.

Note that the connect, queue, server and tunnel timeouts are only relevant on the backend side and
thus this rule is only available for the proxies with backend capabilities. Likewise, client timeout
is only relevant for frontend side. Tarpit timeout is available to both sides. The timeout value
must be non-null to obtain the expected results. When the action is used for a listener, it is
evaluated in the frontend context. So custom values for backend-side timeouts are conserved only if
stream is not routed to a different backend, via a use-backend rule for instance. Otherwise the
default values of the selected backend will be preset.

Example:

```text
http-request set-timeout tunnel 5s
http-request set-timeout server req.hdr(host),map_int(host.lst)
```

Example:

```text
http-response set-timeout tunnel 5s
http-response set-timeout server res.hdr(X-Refresh-Seconds),mul(1000)
```

Example:

```text
defaults
  # This will set both tarpit and queue timeout to 5s as they are not
  # defined
  timeout connect 5s
  timeout client 30s
  timeout server 30s

listen foo
  # This will only change the connect timeout to 10s without affecting
  # queue or tarpit timeouts
  http-request set-timeout connect 10s
```

<a id="entry-4-4-set-tos"></a>

**`set-tos <tos> (deprecated)`**

```haproxy
set-tos <tos> (deprecated)
```

This is an alias for "set-fc-tos" (which should be used instead).

<a id="entry-4-4-set-uri"></a>

**`set-uri <fmt>`**

```haproxy
set-uri <fmt>
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| - \| -

This rewrites the request URI with the result of the evaluation of format string `<fmt>`. The
scheme, authority, path and query string are all replaced at once. This can be used to rewrite hosts
in front of proxies, or to perform complex modifications to the URI such as moving parts between the
path and the query string. If an absolute URI is set, it will be sent as is to HTTP/1.1 servers. If
it is not the desired behavior, the host, the path and/or the query string should be set separately.
See also "http-request set-path" and "http-request set-query".

<a id="entry-4-4-set-var"></a>

**`set-var(<var-name>[,<cond>...]) <expr>`**

```haproxy
set-var(<var-name>[,<cond>...]) <expr>
set-var-fmt(<var-name>[,<cond>...]) <fmt>
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| X \| X \| X \| X
\| X \| X \| X

This is used to set the contents of a variable. The variable is declared inline.

Arguments:

```text
<var-name>   The name of the variable. Variable of the parent stream cannot
             be set. See section 2.8 about variables for details.

 <cond>      A set of conditions that must all be true for the variable to
             actually be set (such as "ifnotempty", "ifgt" ...). See the
             set-var converter's description for a full list of possible
             conditions.

 <expr>      Is a standard HAProxy expression formed by a sample-fetch
             followed by some converters.

 <fmt>       This is the value expressed using Custom log format rules (see
             Custom log format in section 8.2.6).
```

All scopes are usable for HTTP rules, but scopes "proc" and "sess" are the only usable ones in rule
sets which do not have access to contents such as "tcp-request connection" and "tcp-request
session".

Example:

```text
http-request set-var(req.my_var) req.fhdr(user-agent),lower
http-request set-var-fmt(txn.from) %[src]:%[src_port]

```

<a id="entry-4-4-silent-drop"></a>

**`silent-drop [ rst-ttl <ttl> ]`**

```haproxy
silent-drop [ rst-ttl <ttl> ]
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| X \| X \| X \| X
\| X \| X \| -

This stops the evaluation of the rules and makes the client-facing connection suddenly disappear
using a system-dependent way that tries to prevent the client from being notified. When called
without the rst-ttl argument, we try to prevent sending any FIN or RST packet back to the client by
using TCP_REPAIR. If this fails (mainly because of missing privileges), we fall back to sending a
RST packet with a TTL of 1.

The effect is that the client still sees an established connection while there is none on HAProxy,
saving resources. However, stateful equipment placed between the HAProxy and the client (firewalls,
proxies, load balancers) will also keep the established connection in their session tables.

The optional rst-ttl changes this behaviour: TCP_REPAIR is not used, and an RST packet with a
configurable TTL is sent. When set to a reasonable value, the RST packet travels through the local
infrastructure, deleting the connection in firewalls and other systems, but disappears before
reaching the client. Future packets from the client will then be dropped already by front equipment.
These local RSTs protect local resources, but not the client's. This must not be used unless the
consequences of doing this are fully understood.

<a id="entry-4-4-strict-mode"></a>

**`strict-mode { on | off }`**

```haproxy
strict-mode { on | off }
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| X \| X

This enables or disables the strict rewriting mode for following rules. It does not affect rules
declared before it and it is only applicable on rules performing a rewrite on the requests. When the
strict mode is enabled, any rewrite failure triggers an internal error. Otherwise, such errors are
silently ignored. The purpose of the strict rewriting mode is to make some rewrites optional while
others must be performed to continue the request processing.

By default, the strict rewriting mode is enabled. Its value is also reset when a ruleset evaluation
ends. So, for instance, if you change the mode on the frontend, the default mode is restored when
HAProxy starts the backend rules evaluation.

<a id="entry-4-4-switch-mode-http"></a>

**`switch-mode http [ proto <name> ]`**

```haproxy
switch-mode http [ proto <name> ]
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| X \| -
\| - \| - \| -

This action is used to perform a connection upgrade. Only HTTP upgrades are supported for now. The
protocol may optionally be specified. This action is only available for a proxy with the frontend
capability. The connection upgrade is immediately performed, following "tcp-request content" rules
are not evaluated. This upgrade method should be preferred to the implicit one consisting to rely on
the backend mode. When used, it is possible to set HTTP directives in a frontend without any
warning. These directives will be conditionally evaluated if the HTTP upgrade is performed. However,
an HTTP backend must still be selected. It remains unsupported to route an HTTP connection (upgraded
or not) to a TCP server.

See [section 4](/docs/haproxy/proxies/) about Proxies for more details on HTTP upgrades.

<a id="entry-4-4-tarpit"></a>

**`tarpit [ { status | deny_status } <code>] [content-type <type>]`**

```haproxy
tarpit [ { status | deny_status } <code>] [content-type <type>]
       [ { default-errorfiles | errorfile <file> | errorfiles <name> |
```

           file `<file>` | lf-file `<file>` | string `<str>` | lf-string `<fmt>` } ]
       [ hdr `<name>` `<fmt>` ]*

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| - \| -

This stops the evaluation of the rules and immediately blocks the request without responding for a
delay specified by "timeout tarpit" or "timeout connect" if the former is not set. After that delay,
if the client is still connected, a response is returned so that the client does not suspect it has
been tarpitted. Logs will report the flags "PT". The goal of the tarpit rule is to slow down robots
during an attack when they're limited on the number of concurrent requests. It can be very efficient
against very dumb robots, and will significantly reduce the load on firewalls compared to a "deny"
rule. But when facing "correctly" developed robots, it can make things worse by forcing HAProxy and
the front firewall to support insane number of concurrent connections. By default an HTTP error 500
is returned. But the response may be customized using same syntax than "http-request return" rules.
Thus, see "http-request return" for details.

For compatibility purpose, when no argument is defined, or only "deny_status", the argument
"default-errorfiles" is implied. It means "http-request tarpit [deny_status `<status>`]" is an
alias of "http-request tarpit [status `<status>`] default-errorfiles". No further "http-request"
rules are evaluated. See also "http-request return" and "http-request silent-drop".

<a id="entry-4-4-track-sc0"></a>

**`track-sc0 <key> [table <table>]`**

```haproxy
track-sc0 <key> [table <table>]
track-sc1 <key> [table <table>]
track-sc2 <key> [table <table>]
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| X \| X \| X \| -
\| X \| X \| -

This enables tracking of sticky counters from current request. These rules do not stop evaluation
and do not change default action. The number of counters that may be simultaneously tracked by the
same connection is set by the global "tune.stick-counters" setting, which defaults to
MAX_SESS_STKCTR if set at build time (it is reported in haproxy -vv) and which defaults to 3, so the
track-sc number is between 0 and (tune.stick-counters-1). The first "track-sc0" rule executed
enables tracking of the counters of the specified table as the first set. The first "track-sc1" rule
executed enables tracking of the counters of the specified table as the second set. The first
"track-sc2" rule executed enables tracking of the counters of the specified table as the third set.
It is a recommended practice to use the first set of counters for the per-frontend counters and the
second set for the per-backend ones. But this is just a guideline, all may be used everywhere.

Arguments:

```text
<key>   is mandatory, and is a sample expression rule as described in
        section 7.3. It describes what elements of the incoming connection,
        request or response will be analyzed, extracted, combined, and used
        to select which table entry to update the counters.

<table> is an optional table to be used instead of the default one, which
        is the stick-table declared in the current proxy. All the counters
        for the matches and updates for the key will then be performed in
        that table until the session ends.
```

Once a "track-sc\*" rule is executed, the key is looked up in the table and if it is not found, an
entry is allocated for it. Then a pointer to that entry is kept during all the session's life, and
this entry's counters are updated as often as possible, every time the session's counters are
updated, and also systematically when the session ends. Counters are only updated for events that
happen after the tracking has been started. As an exception, connection counters and request
counters are systematically updated so that they reflect useful information.

If the entry tracks concurrent connection counters, one connection is counted for as long as the
entry is tracked, and the entry will not expire during that time. Tracking counters also provides a
performance advantage over just checking the keys, because only one table lookup is performed for
all ACL checks that make use of it.

<a id="entry-4-4-unset-var"></a>

**`unset-var(<var-name>)`**

```haproxy
unset-var(<var-name>)
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| X \| X \| X \| X
\| X \| X \| X

This is used to unset a variable. See the "set-var" action for details about `<var-name>`.

Example:

```text
http-request unset-var(req.my_var)

```

<a id="entry-4-4-use-service"></a>

**`use-service <service-name>`**

```haproxy
use-service <service-name>
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| X \| -
\| X \| - \| -

This action executes the configured TCP or HTTP service to reply to the request, depending on the
rule set it's used in. The rule is final, i.e. no further rules are evaluated in the same rule set.

A service may choose to reply by sending any valid response or it may immediately close the
connection without sending any response. For HTTP services, a valid response requires a valid HTTP
response. Outside natives services, for instance the Prometheus exporter for HTTP services, it is
possible to write custom TCP and HTTP services in Lua.

Arguments:

```text
<service-name>  is mandatory. It is the service to call
```

Example:

```text
http-request use-service prometheus-exporter if { path /metrics }

```

<a id="entry-4-4-wait-for-body-time"></a>

**`wait-for-body time <time> [ at-least <bytes> ] [use-large-buffer]`**

```haproxy
wait-for-body time <time> [ at-least <bytes> ] [use-large-buffer]
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| X \| -

This will delay the processing of the request or response until one of the following conditions
occurs:

- The full request body is received, in which case processing proceeds normally.
- `<bytes>` bytes have been received, when the "at-least" argument is given and `<bytes>` is
  non-zero, in which case processing proceeds normally.
- The request buffer is full, in which case processing proceeds normally. The size of this buffer is
  determined by the "tune.bufsize" option.
- The request has been waiting for more than `<time>` milliseconds. In this case HAProxy will
  respond with a 408 "Request Timeout" error to the client and stop processing the request. Note
  that if any of the other conditions happens first, this timeout will not occur even if the full
  body has not yet been received.

"use-large-buffer" option may be set to allocate a large buffer if regular one is to small to store
the message body. To be used, "tune.bufsize.large" global option must be defined.

This action may be used as a replacement for "option http-buffer-request".

Arguments:

```text
<time>    is mandatory. It is the maximum time to wait for the body. It
          follows the HAProxy time format and is expressed in milliseconds.

<bytes>   is optional. It is the minimum payload size to receive to stop to
          wait. It follows the HAProxy size format and is expressed in
          bytes. A value of 0 (the default) means no limit.
```

Example:

```text
http-request wait-for-body time 1s at-least 1k if METH_POST
```

See also: "option http-buffer-request" and "tune.bufsize.large"

<a id="entry-4-4-wait-for-handshake"></a>

**`wait-for-handshake`**

```haproxy
wait-for-handshake
```

Usable in: QUIC Ini\| TCP RqCon\| RqSes\| RqCnt\| RsCnt\| HTTP Req\| Res\| Aft - \| - \| - \| - \| -
\| X \| - \| -

This will delay the processing of the request until the SSL handshake happened. This is mostly
useful to delay processing early data until we're sure they are valid.

---

Backlinks:

- [7. ACLs & Samples](/docs/haproxy/acls-and-samples/)
- [8. Logging](/docs/haproxy/configuration-logging/)
- [10. FastCGI](/docs/haproxy/fastcgi/)
- [3. Global Section](/docs/haproxy/global/)
- [1. HTTP Fundamentals](/docs/haproxy/http-fundamentals/)
- [12. Other Sections](/docs/haproxy/other-sections/)
